ECLIPSE Office User Course

Training and Exercise Guide

ECLIPSE 2001a
September 1, 2001

ECL_ECLIPSEOffice_User_2001a_NAM_01Sep01 www.geoquest.com
Copyright Notice

 2001 Schlumberger. All right reserved.

No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or

translated in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying and recording, without the prior written permission of
Schlumberger Oil and Gas Information Solutions, 5599 San Felipe, Suite
1700, Houston, TX 77056-2722.

Disclaimer

Use of this product is governed by the License Agreement. Schlumberger

makes no warranties, express, implied, or statutory, with respect to the product
described herein and disclaims without limitation any warranties of
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Schlumberger reserves the
right to revise the information in this manual at any time without notice.

Trademark Information

The Calculator, Charisma, ConPac, ECLIPSE 100, ECLIPSE 200, ECLIPSE

300, ECLIPSE 500, ECLIPSE Office, EDIT, Extract, Fill, Finder, FloGeo
FrontSim, FloGrid, FloViz, GeoFrame, GRAF, GRID, GridSim, Open-
ECLIPSE, PetraGrid, PlanOpt, Pseudo, RTView, VFPi, PVTi, SimOpt,
SCAL, Schedule, Weltest 200, Geonet and GeoQuest Launcher are service
marks of Schlumberger.

All other products and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies or organizations.
 Contents

Chapter 1 About this Course ................................................................. 1-1

Overview............................................................................................... 1-1

Course Objectives................................................................................. 1-2

Hardware and Software Requirements ................................................. 1-3

Hardware and Software Requirements ................................................. 1-4

Application Interface and Operatives ................................................... 1-7

Standard Buttons............................................................................... 1-7
3D Viewer Controls .......................................................................... 1-7
How to Use the Training Guide.......................................................... 1-10
Common Commands ...................................................................... 1-10
Typographic Conventions ............................................................... 1-12
Procedures and Exercises................................................................ 1-15
Course Agenda.................................................................................... 1-16

Getting Started .................................................................................... 1-17

Chapter 2 Overview of ECLIPSE Office .............................................. 2-1

What is ECLIPSE Office? .................................................................... 2-1

Overview of the Simulation Workflow ................................................ 2-2

Reservoir Grid Design ...................................................................... 2-2
Reservoir Description ....................................................................... 2-3
Select Simulation Model................................................................... 2-5
Solve for Pressures and Saturations – History Matching.................. 2-5
Predict and Optimize Future Production .......................................... 2-6

ECLIPSE Office User Course iii

Contents

ECLIPSE Office in the Simulation Workflow ..................................... 2-6

Workflow in ECLIPSE Office.............................................................. 2-7

Main Modules in ECLIPSE Office....................................................... 2-8

Data Manager.................................................................................... 2-8
Case Manager.................................................................................... 2-9
Run Manager..................................................................................... 2-9
Result Viewer ................................................................................... 2-9
Report Generator............................................................................... 2-9
Chapter 3 Understanding Data Entry .................................................... 3-1

Overview............................................................................................... 3-1

Main Window ....................................................................................... 3-1

Application Launch Buttons ............................................................. 3-2
Status Bar.......................................................................................... 3-3
Module Launch Buttons.................................................................... 3-3
Log Window ..................................................................................... 3-3
Case Information Area...................................................................... 3-3
Data Tree........................................................................................... 3-4
Commonly used menu items............................................................. 3-4
Case Manager ..................................................................................... 3-11

Data Manager...................................................................................... 3-11

Data Manager Sections ................................................................... 3-13
Section Main Windows................................................................... 3-18
Keyword Editor Panels ................................................................... 3-23
Box Editor....................................................................................... 3-30
Keyword Explorer........................................................................... 3-33
Reporting Times and Events........................................................... 3-35
Selecting Summary vectors............................................................. 3-36
Chapter 4 Using Correlations ................................................................ 4-1

Overview............................................................................................... 4-1

PVT Correlations Panel ........................................................................ 4-2

Command Bar menu options ............................................................ 4-2
Rock Properties fields....................................................................... 4-4
Oil Properties fields .......................................................................... 4-5
Water properties fields...................................................................... 4-9

iv ECLIPSE Office User Course

Contents

Gas properties fields ....................................................................... 4-11

SCAL Correlations Panel ................................................................... 4-18
Command Bar menu options .......................................................... 4-18
Chapter 5 Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer ..................................... 5-1

Overview............................................................................................... 5-1

Main Window ....................................................................................... 5-1

Limitations ........................................................................................ 5-2
Commonly used menu items............................................................. 5-2
Chapter 6 Controlling Runs................................................................... 6-1

Overview............................................................................................... 6-1

Run Manager Main Window ................................................................ 6-2

Panel Fields....................................................................................... 6-3
Command Bar menu options ............................................................ 6-6
Configuring a Simulator Run............................................................ 6-9
Run time monitoring....................................................................... 6-16
Controlling the simulator ................................................................ 6-18
Chapter 7 Using the Results Viewer ..................................................... 7-1

Overview............................................................................................... 7-1

Results Viewer Main Window ............................................................. 7-2

Window Components ....................................................................... 7-3
2D Viewer (line plots and solutions) .................................................... 7-4
Command Bar menu items ............................................................... 7-5
3D Viewer........................................................................................... 7-33
Commonly Used menu items.......................................................... 7-34
Chapter 8 Generating Printed Reports................................................... 8-1

Overview............................................................................................... 8-1

Report Generator main window............................................................ 8-3

Command Bar menu items ............................................................... 8-4
Report Types......................................................................................... 8-8
Summary........................................................................................... 8-8

v ECLIPSE Office User Course

Contents

Economics......................................................................................... 8-9
Print (PRT)...................................................................................... 8-12
Errors, warns... ................................................................................ 8-13
Chapter 9 Performing Sensitivity Studies ............................................. 9-1

Overview............................................................................................... 9-1

Setting up multiple runs........................................................................ 9-1

Multiple Runs ................................................................................... 9-2
Sensitivities....................................................................................... 9-4
Removing a run / Creating a case ..................................................... 9-6
Submitting multiple runs .................................................................. 9-7
Chapter 10 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder.......................... 10-1

Overview............................................................................................. 10-1

Using the Unstructured Gridder.......................................................... 10-2

Properties ........................................................................................ 10-4
Maps................................................................................................ 10-4
Gridding .......................................................................................... 10-5
Reservoir Data Tree ........................................................................ 10-8
Limitations .................................................................................... 10-11
Command Bar menu items ........................................................... 10-13
View menu.................................................................................... 10-19
Exercises.......................................................................................................1

Overview...................................................................................................1

Project Directory Management .................................................................1

Reservoir Description ...............................................................................2

Exercise 1 Building a Base Case; Part 1 – Case and Grid Definition ...4
Introduction...........................................................................................4
Exercise Steps .......................................................................................4
Exercise 2 – Building a Base Case; Part 2 – PVT and SCAL
Correlations ............................................................................................21
Introduction.........................................................................................21
Using PVT Correlations......................................................................21
Using SCAL Correlations ...................................................................33
Exercise 3 – Building a Base Case; Part 3 – Completing the Data Entry39

vi ECLIPSE Office User Course

Contents

Introduction.........................................................................................39
Initialization of the model...................................................................39
Defining REGIONS data ....................................................................43
Defining the Well Schedule................................................................56
Requesting Summary Output..............................................................59
Exercise 4 – Running the Base Case ......................................................65
Introduction.........................................................................................65
Running the Base Case .......................................................................65
Discussion...........................................................................................71
Exercise 5 – Analyzing the Base Case....................................................73
Introduction.........................................................................................73
Checking the Run for Errors ...............................................................73
Fluids-in-place and Material balance reports......................................77
Creating Production and Injection plots .............................................80
Discussion...........................................................................................95
Using the 3D Viewer to examine water flow......................................95
Exercise 6 – History Matching; Case Snark_HM-1 .............................101
Introduction.......................................................................................101
Case Management.............................................................................101
Importing and manipulating tabular data ..........................................104
Defining Saturation Table regions ....................................................111
Running the case...............................................................................113
Analyzing the Results .......................................................................114
Comparing results of different cases.................................................116
Exercise 7 – History Matching; Case Snark_HM-2 .............................127
Introduction.......................................................................................127
Case Management.............................................................................127
Running the case...............................................................................132
Examining the Warning messages ....................................................133
Tuning the Simulation ......................................................................133
Discussion.........................................................................................135
Analyzing the results.........................................................................137
Exercise 8 – History Matching; Case Snark_HM-3 .............................157
Introduction.......................................................................................157
Case Management.............................................................................157
Data Management .............................................................................159
Run Management ..............................................................................163
Analyzing the results.........................................................................163
Manipulating pictures .......................................................................174

vii ECLIPSE Office User Course

Contents

Discussion.........................................................................................182
Exercise 9 – Restarts and Prediction; Case Snark_ Pred_Base ............183
Introduction.......................................................................................183
Case Management.............................................................................183
Adding Restart data ..........................................................................185
Analyzing the results.........................................................................197
Discussion.........................................................................................208
Exercise 10 – Restarts and Prediction; Case Snark_ Pred_New ..........209
Introduction.......................................................................................209
Case Management.............................................................................209
Selecting the new well location ........................................................210
Creating the new well schedule ........................................................223
Using Multiple Sensitivities .............................................................235
Running the Cases ............................................................................239
Analyzing the Runs...........................................................................240
Converting a multiple sensitivity case to a regular case ...................246
Comparing to the Base prediction.....................................................248
Generating an Economics report.......................................................252
Discussion.........................................................................................254
Exercise 11 – Completing the Study ....................................................257
Introduction.......................................................................................257
Creating hardcopy in the 2D Viewer ................................................258
Creating hardcopy output of 2D results ............................................264
Creating hardcopy in the 3D Viewer ................................................267
Backing up the project ......................................................................273
Discussion.........................................................................................275
Exercise 12 – Using the Unstructured Gridder.....................................277
Introduction.......................................................................................277
Case Management.............................................................................277
Creating a PEBI grid from an existing Cartesian grid ......................279
Creating a PEBI grid from map data.................................................292
Exercise 13 – Advanced Run Management..........................................308
Introduction.......................................................................................308
Submitting runs using PVM .............................................................308
Submitting runs using Non-PVM remote .........................................314
Submitting runs to LSF queues.........................................................317
Submitting runs with the External Job option ..................................320

viii ECLIPSE Office User Course

 List of Procedures

Procedure: Start ECLIPSE Office using the GeoQuest Launcher.......... 1-18

Procedure: Start ECLIPSE Office using the Geonet .............................. 1-21

Procedure: Start ECLIPSE Office using a command prompt ................ 1-24

Procedure: Create a new ECLIPSE Office project................................... 3-5

Procedure: Rename a Case/Add Case Notes and Comments................... 3-7

Procedure: Importing an existing ECLIPSE dataset (complete) .............. 3-7

Procedure: Creating a restart case ............................................................ 3-9

Procedure: Converting unit system during import ................................. 3-20

Procedure: Inserting a keyword.............................................................. 3-26

Procedure: Using the Box Editor to create V2 = 0.1*V1....................... 3-32

Procedure: Using Rock Correlations........................................................ 4-5

Procedure: Using Oil Correlations ........................................................... 4-9

Procedure: Using Water Correlations..................................................... 4-11

Procedure: Using Gas Correlations (Explicit Critical Props.)................ 4-13

Procedure: Using Gas Correlations (Crit Props from Comp)................. 4-15

Procedure: Using Gas Correlations (Crit Props from Corr) ................... 4-17

Procedure: Using SCAL Correlations .................................................... 4-21

ECLIPSE Office User Course ix

Procedures

Procedure: Using the 2D Viewer to edit selected array data.................. 5-11

Procedure: Running a case using Non-PVM Local mode...................... 6-10

Procedure: Running a case using Non-PVM Remote mode .................. 6-12

Procedure: Running a case using PVM mode ........................................ 6-13

Procedure: Setting up Runtime Monitoring of Summary Vectors ......... 6-17

Procedure: Creating a mulit-graph picture ............................................. 7-12

Procedure: Creating a User-defined plot ................................................ 7-18

Procedure: Creating a Line Plot of Solution Data.................................. 7-21

Procedure: Generating an Economics (Peep) report .............................. 8-11

Procedure: Setting up multiple runs (WCONPROD example)................ 9-3

Procedure: Setting up sensitivities (WCONPROD example) .................. 9-5

x ECLIPSE Office User Course

 List of Figures

Figure 1-1 Course objectives................................................................. 1-3

Figure 1-2 Supported UNIX operating systems for ECLIPSE Office... 1-4

Figure 1-3 Supported PC operating systems for ECLIPSE Office........ 1-5

Figure 1-4 Minimum recommended hardware requirements................ 1-6

Figure 1-5 Methods of launching applications.................................... 1-18

Figure 1-6 Starting the GeoQuest Launcher........................................ 1-19

Figure 1-7 GeoQuest Simulation Software Launcher ......................... 1-20

Figure 1-8 Office Launcher panel ....................................................... 1-21

Figure 1-9 Launching Geonet.............................................................. 1-22

Figure 1-10 Office Launcher panels in Geonet ................................... 1-23

Figure 1-11 Starting ECLIPSE Office via a command prompt........... 1-24

Figure 2-1 What is ECLIPSE Office? ................................................... 2-2

Figure 2-2 Overview of Simulation Workflow ..................................... 2-3

Figure 2-3 The Simulation Desktop ...................................................... 2-7

Figure 2-4 Workflow in ECLIPSE Office............................................. 2-8

Figure 2-5 Main modules in ECLIPSE Office .................................... 2-10

Figure 3-1 The ECLIPSE Office main window .................................... 3-2

ECLIPSE Office User Course xi

Figures

Figure 3-2 Case Manager display........................................................ 3-11

Figure 3-3 Data Manager user interface .............................................. 3-12

Figure 3-4 Data Manager functionality ............................................... 3-13

Figure 3-5 Section Main Windows ..................................................... 3-19

Figure 3-6 Keyword Editor Panels ...................................................... 3-24

Figure 3-7 Box Editor panel................................................................ 3-30

Figure 3-8 Keyword Editor panel........................................................ 3-33

Figure 3-9 New Time panel................................................................. 3-35

Figure 3-10 New Event panel.............................................................. 3-36

Figure 3-11 Summary section main window....................................... 3-37

Figure 3-12 Selected List panel........................................................... 3-40

Figure 4-1 PVT Correlations panel ....................................................... 4-2

Figure 4-2 SCAL Correlations panel................................................... 4-18

Figure 5-1 Data Manager 2D Viewer main window ............................. 5-2

Figure 5-2 Edit View Options panel...................................................... 5-5

Figure 5-3 Selected Cells panel............................................................. 5-6

Figure 5-4 Simulation Property Editor panel ........................................ 5-7

Figure 6-1 Run Manager features.......................................................... 6-2

Figure 6-2 Run Manager main window ................................................ 6-3

Figure 6-3 The NON-PVM LOCAL Run Environment panel ............ 6-10

Figure 6-4 Run Environment panel for NON-PVM REMOTE .......... 6-11

Figure 6-5 PVM Run Environment panel ........................................... 6-13

Figure 6-6 EXTERNAL JOB Run Environment panel....................... 6-15

Figure 6-7 Run time monitoring of summary vectors ......................... 6-17

xii ECLIPSE Office User Course

List of Figures

Figure 6-8 Control the Simulations panel ........................................... 6-19

Figure 6-9 Kill All Runs panel ............................................................ 6-20

Figure 7-1 Results Viewer main window.............................................. 7-2

Figure 7-2 Results Viewer 2D functionality ......................................... 7-4

Figure 7-3 Extract/Load Summary Vectors panel................................. 7-6

Figure 7-4 Extract/Load Solutions panel............................................... 7-7

Figure 7-5 Import Properties panel........................................................ 7-8

Figure 7-6 User-defined Template panel............................................. 7-18

Figure 7-7 Create New Summary Vector panel .................................. 7-23

Figure 7-8 Create New Property panel ................................................ 7-24

Figure 7-9 3D Viewer main window................................................... 7-34

Figure 7-10 Cell Probe panel............................................................... 7-37

Figure 7-11 Simulation Property Editor panel .................................... 7-39

Figure 7-12 Object Appearance panel................................................. 7-49

Figure 8-1 Report Generator features.................................................... 8-2

Figure 8-2 Report Generator level of detail .......................................... 8-3

Figure 8-3 Report Generator Main Window ......................................... 8-4

Figure 8-4 Summary Report input panel ............................................... 8-8

Figure 8-5 Economics Report input panel........................................... 8-10

Figure 8-6 Print (PRT) Report input panel.......................................... 8-12

Figure 8-7 Errror Report input panel................................................... 8-13

Figure 9-1 Keyword Editor panel supporting Multiple Sensitivities .... 9-2

Figure 9-2 Multiple Runs panel (WCONPROD shown) ...................... 9-3

Figure 9-3 Multiple Sensitivities panel (WCONPROD shown) ........... 9-5

xiii ECLIPSE Office User Course

Figures

Figure 9-4 Multiple Sensitivities section main window........................ 9-6

Figure 10-1 Unstructured Gridder window ......................................... 10-2

Figure 10-2 Property Handling in PetraGrid ....................................... 10-3

Figure 10-3 PEBI Gridding Heirarchy ................................................ 10-5

Figure 10-4 PEBI Grid Generation...................................................... 10-7

Figure 10-5 Reservoir Data Tree......................................................... 10-8

Figure 10-6 PEBI Limitations in ECLIPSE Office ........................... 10-12

Figure EX- 1 Example of simulation project directory structure ...............2

Figure EX- 2 Exercise project structure .....................................................3

Figure EX- 3 Snark project - initial case....................................................5

Figure EX- 4 Snark case setup - General tab .............................................6

Figure EX- 5 Snark case setup - Reservoir tab...........................................7

Figure EX- 6 Snark case setup - PVT tab ..................................................8

Figure EX- 7 Grid section - imported geometry keywords ......................10

Figure EX- 8 Grid section - imported faults keywords ............................11

Figure EX- 9 Assigning constant Porosity using the Box Editor.............12

Figure EX- 10 Assigning X Permeability to specific layers using the box

editor.............................................................................13

Figure EX- 11 Copying PERMX to PERMY using the Box Editor ..........15

Figure EX- 12 Multiplying PERMZ by a constant using the Box Editor ..16

Figure EX- 13 2D view of Snark grid geometry ........................................19

Figure EX- 14 3D view of Snark grid geometry ........................................20

Figure EX- 15 Rock properties correlations panel .....................................23

Figure EX- 16 Correlation-generated ROCK keyword..............................24

xiv ECLIPSE Office User Course

List of Figures

Figure EX- 17 Water properties correlations panel....................................25

Figure EX- 18 Correlation-generated PVTW keyword..............................26

Figure EX- 19 Gas property (Critial Props by Corr) correlations panel.....27

Figure EX- 20 Oil properties correlation panel..........................................29

Figure EX- 21 PVT section Keyword Editor panel....................................30

Figure EX- 22 Graphical view of PVTO data ............................................31

Figure EX- 23 Graphical view of PVDG data............................................32

Figure EX- 24 SCAL correlations panel ....................................................34

Figure EX- 25 Graphical display of the SGOF keyword ...........................35

Figure EX- 26 Graphical display of SWOF keyword ................................36

Figure EX- 27 SCAL section Keyword Editor panel .................................37

Figure EX- 28 Initialisation section Keyword Editor panel showing

EQUIL data………………… ......................................41

Figure EX- 29 Initialisation section Keyword Editor panel showing RSVD

data………………. ......................................................42

Figure EX- 30 Regions section 2D Viewer panel ......................................45

Figure EX- 31 Edit View Options dialog box............................................46

Figure EX- 32 Regions section 2D Viewer showing FIPNUM .................47

Figure EX- 33 FIPNUM definitions for Snark study .................................48

Figure EX- 34 Regions section 2D Viewer showing selected cells

(FIPNUM = 2) ..............................................................49

Figure EX- 35 Selected Cells panel for FIPNUM = 2................................50

Figure EX- 36 Regions section 2D Viewer after editing FIPNUM = 2 .....51

Figure EX- 37 Regions section 2D Viewer showing selected cells

(FIPNUM = 4) ..............................................................52

xv ECLIPSE Office User Course

Figures

Figure EX- 38 Regions section 2D Viewer after editing FIPNUM = 4 .....53

Figure EX- 39 Regions section 2D Viewer showing selected cells

(FIPNUM = 3) ..............................................................54

Figure EX- 40 Regions section 2D Viewer after defining 4 FIPNUM

regions ..........................................................................55

Figure EX- 41 Summary section Selected List panel.................................62

Figure EX- 42 Run Manager main window ...............................................66

Figure EX- 43 Initial view of Summary Vector runtime monitoring panel68

Figure EX- 44 Run Time Monitoring of Field Production Rates...............69

Figure EX- 45 Axis Property Editing panel ...............................................70

Figure EX- 46 Summary Vector run time monitoring panel at end of run 71

Figure EX- 47 Report Generator Errors... report panel ..............................74

Figure EX- 48 Error and Warnings report for the Base case......................75

Figure EX- 49 Messages report for the Base case......................................76

Figure EX- 50 Initial material balance report.............................................78

Figure EX- 51 Material balance report at end of run for the Base case .....79

Figure EX- 52 Load/Extract Summary Vectors panel for the Base case ...80

Figure EX- 53 Load/Extract Solutions panel for the Base case .................81

Figure EX- 54 Default Line Plots used for base case.................................82

Figure EX- 55 Field Injection graph for Base case ....................................83

Figure EX- 56 Axis Property Editing panel for Field Injection graph .......84

Figure EX- 57 Field Injection graph with new Y-Axis range ....................85

Figure EX- 58 Data Style Editing panel for FOPR ....................................86

Figure EX- 59 Data Style Editing panel for FOPRH .................................87

Figure EX- 60 Results Viewer main window after customization.............87

xvi ECLIPSE Office User Course

List of Figures

Figure EX- 61 User Templates panel for Pressure plot..............................88

Figure EX- 62 User-defined Pressure Match plot ......................................89

Figure EX- 63 Main Graph display with two plots ....................................91

Figure EX- 64 Main Graph display with four plots ...................................92

Figure EX- 65 Column Format User Data panel........................................93

Figure EX- 66 Observed Vectors selection panel ......................................94

Figure EX- 67 Pressure Match plots with Observed values overlaid.........95

Figure EX- 68 3D Viewer after applying a DEPTH threshold...................97

Figure EX- 69 3D Viewer after applying DEPTH and SWAT thresholds.98

Figure EX- 70 3D view showing coning around well PRODUCER..........99

Figure EX- 71 Case Information Window for case Snark_HM-1............103

Figure EX- 72 SCAL section Keyword Editor panel after entering initial
table ............................................................................106

Figure EX- 73 SCAL section Keyword Editor panel after importing SWFN
data .............................................................................107

Figure EX- 74 Text Editor panel showing the base case Graphics Run
File..............................................................................115

Figure EX- 75 Import Properties panel ....................................................117

Figure EX- 76 User Templates panel with multiple cases loaded............119

Figure EX- 77 Graph Legend Configuration panel ..................................120

Figure EX- 78 Results Viewer main window after adjusting Legend

Style............................................................................121

Figure EX- 79 Legend Text Editor panel .................................................123

Figure EX- 80 Main Display after cleanup of Legend .............................124

Figure EX- 81 Axis Property Editing panel .............................................125

xvii ECLIPSE Office User Course

Figures

Figure EX- 82 Field Production Rate plot after editing Legend and
Y-Axes .......................................................................126

Figure EX- 83 Array Box Selection panel (MinValue)............................130

Figure EX- 84 Array Box Editor panel (MaxValue)................................131

Figure EX- 85 Rubberband Zoom in a line plot.......................................139

Figure EX- 86 Display after Rubberband Zoom operation ......................140

Figure EX- 87 2D Solution plot of SOIL .................................................141

Figure EX- 88 Property Selector dialog box ............................................142

Figure EX- 89 2D Solution Plot with Cross Section display ...................143

Figure EX- 90 Depth vs. Solution plot at T=0 .........................................144

Figure EX- 91 Depth vs. Solution plot at last timestep............................145

Figure EX- 92 Cell Probe panel ...............................................................147

Figure EX- 93 Rubberband Zoom in a cross section display...................148

Figure EX- 94 3D Viewer showing Rubber Band Zoom .........................150

Figure EX- 95 Wells panel in the 3D Viewer ..........................................153

Figure EX- 96 3D View with Transparency and IJK limits .....................155

Figure EX- 97 Grid section 2D Viewer showing MULTNUM................161

Figure EX- 98 Grid section Keyword Editor panel showing

MULTREGT ..............................................................162

Figure EX- 99 Tabular view of graph data...............................................166

Figure EX- 100 Export table panel (Clipboard option).........................167

Figure EX- 101 Table data pasted into Excel........................................168

Figure EX- 102 Export table panel (File option) ..................................169

Figure EX- 103 Exported data in the Text Editor .................................170

Figure EX- 104 Calculated Field Production Total graph.....................171

xviii ECLIPSE Office User Course

List of Figures

Figure EX- 105 Plot of FOPR vs. TIME with Selected range ..............173

Figure EX- 106 Totals dialog box for first 3000 days...........................173

Figure EX- 107 Totals dialog box for full simulation...........................174

Figure EX- 108 Field Production Total plot (from default LinePlot
template).....................................................................175

Figure EX- 109 Untitled FOPR vs. TIME plot .....................................176

Figure EX- 110 Slave Viewer Controls dialog box ..............................177

Figure EX- 111 3D Slave Viewer showing Ternary display.................179

Figure EX- 112 Master Viewer showing zoom around well

PRODUCER ..............................................................180

Figure EX- 113 ECLIPSE Office main window after history matching181

Figure EX- 114 Main Window showing first prediction (restart) case .185

Figure EX- 115 Initialisation Keyword Editor panel for the first restart
case .............................................................................186

Figure EX- 116 New Event panel .........................................................187

Figure EX- 117 WCONPROD keyword for first restart case ...............189

Figure EX- 118 New Time panel for prediction case............................194

Figure EX- 119 Schedule section main panel with report times added 195

Figure EX- 120 MESSAGES report for the first restart case................198

Figure EX- 121 Summary report input panel in Report Generator .......199

Figure EX- 122 Calculator panel showing drawdown script ................201

Figure EX- 123 Interpolation report setup ............................................203

Figure EX- 124 Interpolation report output...........................................204

Figure EX- 125 Graphical view of interpolated data ............................205

Figure EX- 126 Line plots for first restart case.....................................208

xix ECLIPSE Office User Course

Figures

Figure EX- 127 ECLIPSE Office main window showing second restart
case .............................................................................211

Figure EX- 128 Create New Solutions panel for Oil Index ..................213

Figure EX- 129 2D Viewer showing contour map of FOI with grid
lines ............................................................................215

Figure EX- 130 Create New Property panel for FOI3D........................216

Figure EX- 131 3D Viewer showing areal boundary editing................219

Figure EX- 132 3D Viewer showing digitized XZ boundary ...............220

Figure EX- 133 Schedule section for second restart case after import .225

Figure EX- 134 Well Specification for well PROD4............................226

Figure EX- 135 Well Specification and completion data for well
PROD4 .......................................................................228

Figure EX- 136 Schedule section showing ACTIONW blocks ............234

Figure EX- 137 Schedule section showing ACTIONW block for well
PROD4 .......................................................................237

Figure EX- 138 Sensitivities panel for the WCONPROD keyword .....237

Figure EX- 139 Multiple Sensitivities section main window ...............239

Figure EX- 140 Report Generator output for multiple sensitivity case.241

Figure EX- 141 Field Production Rate plot for multiple sensitivity
case .............................................................................244

Figure EX- 142 Show/Change/Plot Default Templates panel...............245

Figure EX- 143 Field Production Rate plot after editing ......................246

Figure EX- 144 ECLIPSE Office main window showing the converted
multiple sensitivity case .............................................248

Figure EX- 145 Show/Change/Plot User Template panel.....................250

Figure EX- 146 Line Plot with filled vector..........................................252

xx ECLIPSE Office User Course

List of Figures

Figure EX- 147 Report Generator Economics report panel ..................253

Figure EX- 148 Results Viewer main window with Legend and Caption
boxes ..........................................................................260

Figure EX- 149 2D Viewer with floating legend ..................................261

Figure EX- 150 Annotations shown on the main display......................262

Figure EX- 151 Floating caption in the main display ...........................263

Figure EX- 152 Areal and Cross sectional view ...................................264

Figure EX- 153 Print Preview panel in the 2D Viewer.........................266

Figure EX- 154 3D Viewer with Perspective and Axis Labels.............269

Figure EX- 155 3D Viewer showing multiple titles..............................271

Figure EX- 156 Write Image dialog box...............................................273

Figure EX- 157 Backup dialog box.......................................................274

Figure EX- 158 Case Manager after adding two PEBI cases................278

Figure EX- 159 Schedule section showing expanded COMPDATs for

PRODUCER ..............................................................281

Figure EX- 160 COMPDAT table for PRODUCER after deleting

completions ................................................................282

Figure EX- 161 COMPDAT table for PROD1 after deleting

completions ................................................................283

Figure EX- 162 COMPDAT table for INJECTOR after deleting

completions ................................................................284

Figure EX- 163 Unstructured Gridder window after grid import .........286

Figure EX- 164 Unstructured Gridder showing color fill and scatter
data .............................................................................287

Figure EX- 165 Unstructured Gridder window showing digitized

fault.............................................................................290

xxi ECLIPSE Office User Course

Figures

Figure EX- 166 Unstructured Gridder window showing PEBI grid with
property fill.................................................................291

Figure EX- 167 Unstructured Gridder panel after clearing grid ...........293

Figure EX- 168 Edit Property Data panel after creating five layers......295

Figure EX- 169 Unstructured Gridder window after creating five

layers ..........................................................................296

Figure EX- 170 Unstructured Gridder window showing maps for Layer
1..................................................................................298

Figure EX- 171 Unstructured Gridder window showing PEBI grid with
property fill.................................................................303

Figure EX- 172 Unstructured Gridder showing SATNUM regions .....305

Figure EX- 173 ECLIPSE Office main window showing cases for PVM
exercise.......................................................................312

Figure EX- 174 LSF Environment panel...............................................319

xxii ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Chapter 1 About this Course

Overview

This course teaches how to manage and analyze reservoir simulation projects
using ECLIPSE Office. ECLIPSE Office is a GeoQuest application that
provides an integrated desktop for creating and importing simulation datasets,
controlling simulation runs and managing cases, and analyzing simulation
output in both text and graphical form. ECLIPSE Office can be used either
as a standalone simulation manager or as an integration platform for other
applications in the GeoQuest Simulation Software suite such as FloGrid,
SCAL and Schedule.

The course is designed for experienced reservoir simulation engineers who are
using ECLIPSE Office for the first time as well as those seeking training in
many of the special features of ECLIPSE Office. The course teaches how to
build and manage simulation datasets, create dependent cases, manage and
control simulation runs, analyze simulation results, and prepare reports and
graphs for presentation.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-1

About this Course

Course Objectives

The objective of this course is to familiarize the user with the capabilities of
ECLIPSE Office. Upon completion, then user will understand the purpose of
ECLIPSE Office in the simulation workflow and the workflow within
ECLIPSE Office itself.

This is based on a series of exercises designed to instruct the user in the

fundamentals of ECLIPSE Office. After completing this course you will be
able to:

• Understand the terminology and concepts used within the program

• Build an ECLIPSE dataset using the Data Manager
• Understand the history matching workflow
• Use the Results Viewer and Report Generator to analyze simulation
results
• Generating predictive cases using restarts of a history match
• Perform common practical tasks including import/export of data,
plotting and customization of plots, use of graphics run files and
documenting cases
• Create PVT & SCAL data using correlations
• Assign grid and region values using keywords and by 2D and 3D
graphical editing techniques
• Interact with data from other applications and sources
• Manage simulation cases and files

Chapter 1-2 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 About this Course

Course Objectives
• ECLIPSE Office in the workflow
• Overview of ECLIPSE Office

• Workflow in ECLIPSE Office

– Building the Dataset
– History Matching (Analysis)
– Restarts and Prediction
– Common Practical Tasks
– Interaction with other Programs
– Case Management
3 ECLIPSE Office User Course
17 July 2001

Figure 1-1 Course objectives

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-3

About this Course

Hardware and Software Requirements

ECLIPSE Office is compatible with Windows 98 and Windows NT/2000 on

Intel-based personal computers. ECLIPSE Office is also compatible with
Solaris 2.6 (Sun), IRIX 6.5 (SGI) and AIX 4.3 (IBM) operating systems. In
addition, for 3D viewing the OpenGL libraries must be installed and the
graphics card must support OpenGL commands either by hardware or
software rendering. The best quality 3D graphics is obtained with a hardware-
supported OpenGL graphics card.

NOTE: ECLIPSE Office is no longer supported on Windows 95. Windows

ME is not supported.

Hardware and Software

Requirements
• Supported Operating Systems
– SUN Microsystems
• Solaris 2.6, 7, 8
– OpenGL 1.1.2 for 3D viewer

– Silicon Graphics (SGI)

• IRIX 6.5.3
– Variants up to 6.5.7 have been certified

– IBM RS/6000
• AIX 4.3
– Tested up to 4.3.3
– Fortran 3.2.5 (rte) or higher
– OpenGL (included with 4.3.3, optional with prior versions)
4 ECLIPSE Office User Course
17 July 2001

Figure 1-2 Supported UNIX operating systems for ECLIPSE Office

Chapter 1-4 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 About this Course

Hardware and Software

Requirements
• Supported Operating Systems
– PC
• Windows 98
• Windows NT 4.0
– Service Pack 5 or higher
• Windows 2000
• Red Hat Linux 6.2 (ECLIPSE simulators only)
• Note: Windows 95 is NO LONGER SUPPORTED!
• Note: Windows ME is not supported!

5 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 1-3 Supported PC operating systems for ECLIPSE Office

The minimum hardware requirements for ECLIPSE Office are largely

dependent on the size of the model. It is impossible to specify a “minimum”
machine that will work in all cases. Hardware selection must also consider the
number of applications or simulation runs that could be running
simultaneously. This is especially true when using ECLIPSE Office, as it is
still running at the same time that other applications launched from within
ECLIPSE Office are being used. In addition, any local simulation runs
launched from ECLIPSE Office must be considered as in addition to the
ECLIPSE Office requirements.

Therefore, GeoQuest recommends using the following “Rules of Thumb”

when selecting hardware:

• Select the fastest processor within your price range

• System RAM and cache size is more important than processor speed
• Video RAM (on PCs) is very important for 3D performance.
• Hardware supported OpenGL improves 3D performance

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-5

About this Course

• A large hard drive is useful for storing multiple projects and their
associated simulation output.

TIP: Avoid the temptation to purchase a “cheap” (e.g. under $500)

graphics card claiming OpenGL compatibility. Many of these have
substandard OpenGL drivers and will not provide adequate
performance. For best 3D performance, select a graphics card that
supports native OpenGL in hardware mode.

NOTE: GeoQuest recommends a minimum swap space equal to 1.5 times

the amount of physical RAM in the system.

Hardware and Software

Requirements
• Minimum Recommended Hardware Requirements
– There is no “minimum” system!
• Specifications depend on model and options used
– Rules of Thumb
• Get the fastest processor within your price range
• RAM is VERY important - the more the merrier!
– At least as much as the O/S requires…
• OpenGL capable graphics card
– Beware of the “cheap” cards (e.g. Matrox G400 on PC)
– Less than 64MB video RAM could be very slow w/large models
• Large Hard Drive

6 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 1-4 Minimum recommended hardware requirements

Chapter 1-6 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 About this Course

Application Interface and Operatives

All interactive applications in the GeoQuest Simulation Software suite are

designed to operate using a standard 2-button mouse.

Standard Buttons

Dialog box buttons inform the system that an action or command is complete.
All dialog boxes contain one or more of the following buttons:

• OK – Applies the current settings and closes the dialog box

• Apply – Applies the current settings; dialog box remains open
• Reset – Clears any changes or entries in the dialog box without saving
any information
• Default – Restores the settings/information in the dialog box to the
system default
• Cancel – Cancels any unsaved changes and closes the dialog box
• Close – Closes dialog box
• Help – Display help on the currently-active dialog box

3D Viewer Controls

Many applications in the GeoQuest Simulation Software suite provide 3D

views of information. The 3D viewer has many unique controls and its
operation is somewhat different than that of typical interactive panels.

The 3D viewer assumes a 3-button mouse on all UNIX systems; for PCs, the
system metrics are queried to find how many buttons are on the mouse. In the
event that the system cannot properly set the number of mouse buttons, there
is an option to set the mouse controls manually in the configuration file.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-7

About this Course

In addition, the user can also select whether to use GeoFrame or RTView
mouse actions. The following tables illustrate the mouse actions for each of
these settings:

Function or Task 2-button mouse 3-button mouse

Select (Picking) <Shift> + LEFT <Shift> + RIGHT
Rotate <Shift> + RIGHT MIDDLE
Translate RIGHT RIGHT
Zoom LEFT LEFT
Z-Translate <Ctrl> + RIGHT <Shift> + RIGHT

Table 1-1 GeoFrame mouse settings for 3D viewer

TIP: To Zoom an object (make it appear bigger) using GeoFrame

settings, keep the appropriate button depressed and move the mouse
downwards. Moving the mouse to the left or right has no effect.
Moving the mouse upwards will un-zoom the object (make it appear
smaller).

Function or Task 2-button mouse 3-button mouse

Select (Picking) LEFT LEFT
Rotate RIGHT MIDDLE
Translate <Shift> + LEFT RIGHT
Zoom <Shift> + RIGHT <Shift> + MIDDLE
Z-Translate <Ctrl> + LEFT <Shift> + RIGHT

Table 1-2 RTView mouse settings for 3D viewer

TIP: To Zoom an object (make it appear bigger) using RTView settings,

keep the appropriate button depressed and move the mouse upwards
or to the right. Moving the mouse downwards will un-zoom the
object (make it appear smaller).

Chapter 1-8 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 About this Course

NOTE: Z-Translate moves the object towards or away from the viewer, and
only has an effect when perspective is active. To move an object
away from the viewer, keep the appropriate button depressed and
move the mouse upwards or to the right. Moving the mouse
downwards or to the left will move the object towards the viewer.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-9

About this Course

How to Use the Training Guide

This training manual contains certain conventions to make the manual easier
to use. The following sections describe the standards you will encounter
throughout the training guide.

Common Commands

The following table describes the most common commands you will
encounter throughout the training and exercise guide.

Command Generally Refers to Action Required Example

Click Buttons or objects in a Position the cursor over Click Start.
window or dialog box the button or object and
click the left mouse
button once.
Right click Right Mouse Button Position the mouse Right click the
cursor over a button or Field icon to open
other area of a window, the Insert
and click the right Structure dialog
mouse button. box.
Double-click Items in a window or Position the cursor over Double-click the
dialog box the item and click the location name to
left mouse button twice open the Location
rapidly. Editor.
Drag Cursor 1. Position the mouse Drag the cursor
cursor over a from 7000 to 7500
specified area of a feet.
window.
2. Press and hold the
left mouse button.
3. Drag the cursor to
another area of the
window.

Chapter 1-10 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 About this Course

Command Generally Refers to Action Required Example

Enter Text fields 1. Position the cursor Enter the item
over the text field. number.
2. Click the left mouse
button once to
activate the field.
3. Type the desired
text.
Open Windows and dialog Select the appropriate Open the Print
boxes menu option or click the window.
appropriate button or
object to display the
designated window.
Press Keys on the physical Press the designated Press F9.
keyboard key.
Select Menus and menu 1. Position the cursor Select File>New.
items in a window over the menu.
2. Click the left mouse
button once. A drop
list appears.
3. Move the cursor to
the desired menu
item.
4. Click the left mouse
button once.
Select Drop lists 1. Position the cursor Select a location
over the arrow to from the drop list.
the left of the drop
list field.
2. Click the left mouse
button once on the
arrow to display the
drop list items.
3. Move the cursor
over the item to be
selected. Click the
left mouse button
once to select the
item.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-11

About this Course

Command Generally Refers to Action Required Example

Type Text fields 1. Position the cursor Type the path and
Entries over the text field. file name in the
(An entry to be typed
Database field.
appears in bold 2. Click the left mouse
courier font). button once to Enter MARG for
activate the field. Formation top.
3. Type the desired Type SECTION 1
text. in the Name field.

Table 1-3 Common Commands

Typographic Conventions

The following table lists the special formatting you will encounter throughout
the training and exercise guides.

Item Shown As Description Example

Important Italic text Highlights Always enter the
Information important date in the format
information within MM-DD-YY.
the text
Typed Entries Bold text, courier font Indicates the Type 112298 in
specific the Date field.
information you
must type into a
field or command
line
Buttons, menu Bold text Highlights items Click Ok.
and menu item on the window or
names, keyboard buttons on the Select File>New.
keys keyboard with Press Tab.
which you must
interact
Mouse command Keyboard key name(s) Indicates the Press <Alt><F4>.
and/or key and/or mouse combination of
combinations command separated keyboard keys or Control-click
by a hyphen mouse action and WELL-O and
keyboard key you WELL-K.
must perform

Chapter 1-12 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 About this Course

Item Shown As Description Example

Menus and Menu Menu names and Indicates the Select
Items menu item name(s) sequence of Xsection>Create
separated by an arrow menu names and in the Prospect
(>) menu item(s) the window.
user must select
File names, Bold text, Courier font Highlights system If you receive the
System Messages messages or text error Database
and Screen Text that appears in a not found,
window contact the
system
administrator.
Exported files are
stored in a user
specified directory
with a user
specified name
and a .pbf
extension
(PowerPlan
Backup File).
System Bold text, Courier font Highlights system If you receive the
Messages/ messages or text error Database
Screen Text that appears on a not found,
window contact the
system
administrator.
Caution Text displayed in a A statement to
highlighted box proceed
•••••
preceded by the word cautiously and CAUTION: Take
Caution. avoid conditions care in applying
that, if unheeded, spatially varying
may adversely static misties
affect a procedure because they can
function or data. cause false
Less severe than structures to
Warning appear in the
seismic section.
Warning Text displayed in a A statement of
highlighted box information to
•••••
preceded by the word avoid conditions WARNING: You
Warning. that, if unheeded, must enter an end
will adversely date that is later
affect a than the start date
procedure, to correctly
function, or data. calculate the
More severe than duration.
Caution

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-13

About this Course

Item Shown As Description Example

Note Italic font, preceded by Provides ••••••
the Illustrated graphic supplemental
symbol and the word information NOTE: Clicking
Note List Summary
displays only the
item names.
Tip Italic font, preceded by Provides helpful ••••••
the Illustrated graphic suggestions.
symbol and the word Often used in TIP: If the user
Tip Exercises. can’t tell the
difference
between shading
on or off, zoom in
to see the seismic
more clearly.
Best Practice Italic font, preceded by Provides guide to ••••• •
the Illustrated graphic efficient work flow.
symbol and the words BEST
Best Practice PRACTICE: The
basemap will look
less cluttered if
only one zone per
layer is posted.
Buttons, Dialog Noted in bold type. Highlights specific Click OK.
box and Window window and field
titles, Field names Open the Create
Names, and menu dialog box.
options. Select the Edit
option.

Table 1-4 Typographic conventions used in this manual

Chapter 1-14 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 About this Course

Procedures and Exercises

The training guide contains high-level procedures for various tasks. The
exercise guide contains exercises that list specific steps for you to perform and
specific data to enter.

Procedures

Procedures appear in a procedure table as shown below. Notice that

procedures contain general steps and do not contain data to select or enter.

Procedure: Create a Cross Section

1. Create a new cross-section in the Prospect window.
2. Assign a descriptive name.
3. Save the data.

Exercises

Exercises are introduced by a description of the steps to follow. The steps

appear in a numbered list of specific actions to take and data for you to select
or enter.

Create a cross section:

1. Select XSection>Create in the Prospect window.

2. Type SECTION 1 in the Name field.

3. Click OK to confirm the entry and close the XSection Create dialog box.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-15

About this Course

Course Agenda

The following is a general outline for the course. Break time will be available
while the exercise simulations are running.

• Day 1
Morning Chapter 1 About this Course
Chapter 2 Overview of ECLIPSE Office
Chapter 3 Understanding Data Entry
Exercise Problem Overview
Exercise 1 Building a Base Case – Part 1
Chapter 4 Using Correlations
Exercise 2 Building a Base Case – Part 2
Chapter 5 Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer
Exercise 3 Building a Base Case – Part 3
Chapter 6 Controlling Runs
Exercise 4 Running the Base Case

Afternoon Chapter 7 Using the Results Viewer

Chapter 8 Generating Printed Reports
Exercise 5 Analyzing the Base Case
Exercise 6 History Matching case 1
Exercise 7 History Matching case 2

• Day 2
Morning Exercise 8 History Matching case 3
Chapter 9 Performing Sensitivity Studies
Exercise 9 Restarts and Prediction case 1
Exercise 10 Restarts and Prediction case 2

Afternoon Exercise 11 Completing the Study

Chapter 10 Understanding the Unstructured
Gridder
Exercise 12 Using the Unstructured Gridder
Exercise 13 Advanced Run Management

Chapter 1-16 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 About this Course

Getting Started

ECLIPSE Office can be started in two ways on both the UNIX and PC
platforms:

1. GeoQuest Program Launcher

Users on the Windows NT/2000 and Windows 98 platforms can launch

applications using the GeoQuest Simulation Software Launcher. After
successful installation, a program icon/short-cut will be installed on the
machine. The launcher can be started from the Windows desktop or from the
Start button.

UNIX users can launch applications in a similar manner using Geonet.

2. Command Prompt

Applications may also be launched using a Command (MS-DOS) Prompt on

PC or an Xterm on UNIX.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-17

About this Course

Getting Started
• Two methods to start
– Use one of the GeoQuest Launcher Applications
• PC (Windows 98/NT/2000)
– GeoQuest Simulation Software Launcher
• UNIX (Solaris 2.6/AIX 4.3/IRIX 6.5)
– Geonet

– Command Prompt
• DOS Prompt
• Xterm

7 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 1-5 Methods of launching applications

Procedure: Start ECLIPSE Office using the GeoQuest Launcher

1. Double click on the GeoQuest Launcher icon (Figure 1-6) or Select
Start>Programs>Eclipse>GeoQuest Launcher
2. Click on the Office button to start Office (Figure 1-7)
3. Select the working directory and version in the window that follows (Figure 1-8)
and then click Run

Chapter 1-18 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 About this Course

GeoQuest Launcher
• GeoQuest Launcher
– Click on the desktop Icon

– Start > Programs > Eclipse

> GeoQuest Launcher

8 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 1-6 Starting the GeoQuest Launcher

NOTE: You must have a valid license to use ECLIPSE Office. The launcher
will display active buttons for all installed programs, not just those
with current licenses. In addition, the license manager (FLEXlm)
must be running. On stand-alone PCs running Windows 98, you
should first press the FLEXlm button before trying to start
ECLIPSE Office. If a license error message is displayed, check to
see if FLEXlm is running. Windows NT users and those with
networked computers should consult their network administrator
about the setup and use of the license manager.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-19

About this Course

GeoQuest Simulation Software

Launcher
• Click on the Office button to start ECLIPSE Office

9 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 1-7 GeoQuest Simulation Software Launcher

After clicking on the Office icon the Office Launcher window will appear.
This window is used to select the program version and working directory. The
working directory is where ECLIPSE Office will write any scratch files. It is
also normally where the input data, project files and simulator interface files
will be stored. After selecting the working directory and version, press the
Run button.

BEST PRACTICE: Set up subdirectories under the project directory for

each application used (e.g. Office, FloGrid,
Schedule, etc.). Place the input files for each
application in each subdirectory, and then use that
subdirectory as the working directory when
launching the application.

Chapter 1-20 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 About this Course

Office Launcher
• Select the working
directory
– Location where you
want output and
project files to be
written
• Select the version if
more than one present
• Press Run

10 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 1-8 Office Launcher panel

UNIX users can start ECLIPSE Office using Geonet. You can open Geonet
from the background or from an Xterm.

Procedure: Start ECLIPSE Office using the Geonet

1. Click anywhere in the desktop area with the left mouse button and select
Geonet from the drop down menu.
- OR -
2. Type Geonet from an Xterm and press Enter.
3. Press the ECLIPSE Office pushbutton (Figure 1-9).
4. Select the working directory and press OK (Figure 1-10).
5. Type the version desired and press OK (Figure 1-10).

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-21

About this Course

Geonet
• Geonet startup
– From background (if
using standard Geonet
environment)
• Right-click and select
Geonet
– From an Xterm
• Geonet

11 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 1-9 Launching Geonet

NOTE: The ECLIPSE Office pushbutton will only be present if it is present

in the current Geonet profile. To update Geonet with GeoQuest
Simulation Software products, make sure that Geonet will start as
described above, and that ECLIPSE Office and the other simulation
software products can be launched from the macros as described
below. Then run the macro @geonet_setup to update the
Geonet profile with the available simulation products. Geonet
should be restarted after performing an update.

Chapter 1-22 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 About this Course

Geonet Office Launcher

• Select the working directory
– Do not select a filename!
• Select the version
– must be typed exactly!

12 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 1-10 Office Launcher panels in Geonet

WARNING: Do not select a file as this will cause an error during

startup.

CAUTION: To change versions, type the version exactly as it is listed in

the dialog prompt.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-23

About this Course

Command Prompt Launch

• PC
– Start > Programs > MS-DOS Prompt (Command Prompt)
– use “cd” to change to the working directory
– $office
• UNIX
– Open an Xterm
– use “cd” to change to the working directory
– @office
13 ECLIPSE Office User Course
17 July 2001

Figure 1-11 Starting ECLIPSE Office via a command prompt

Procedure: Start ECLIPSE Office using a command prompt

1. On a PC, open a command prompt by selecting Start>Programs>Command
(MS-DOS) prompt
- OR -
2. On UNIX, open an Xterm by clicking with the left mouse button and selecting
New Window
- OR -
3. On UNIX, type xterm from a terminal or console window.
4. Use the cd command to change to the working directory.
5. Type $office (on PC) or @office (on UNIX) at the command prompt and
press Enter to launch the application.

Chapter 1-24 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 About this Course

NOTE: If ECLIPSE Office does not start properly using the Launcher or
Geonet, using the macro may give a better indication of the
problem. If the program starts using the macro, then the problem is
with the Launcher or Geonet. If the program does not start using the
macro, then note any messages that appear and contact GeoQuest
Customer Support for assistance.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 1-25

About this Course

Chapter 1-26 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Chapter 2 Overview of ECLIPSE Office

What is ECLIPSE Office?

ECLIPSE Office is a tool to help manage reservoir simulations. It will:

• launch and manage any of the ECLIPSE applications,

• allow you check your results during simulation runs,
• edit and review simulation results and generate reports, and
• run a rapid quick-look simulation from start to finish.

ECLIPSE Office offers an integrated desktop for the launching of all the
applications in the GeoQuest Simulation Software product line that includes
the pre and post processing applications and the ECLIPSE simulators.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 2-1

Overview of ECLIPSE Office

ECLIPSE Office Overview

• What is it ?
– An interactive
environment for the
preparation and
analysis of reservoir
simulation data
– Pre-processing, data
preparation, run
management and post-
processing is done
within one simulation
desktop

14 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 2-1 What is ECLIPSE Office?

Overview of the Simulation Workflow

The simulation workflow begins with the design of the reservoir grid. This
usually differs from the grid used in geological and property modeling both in
the size and scope of the grid description. In most cases the simulation grid is
coarser than the fine scale geological model. It is also common for the
simulation grid to consist of non-rectangular cells for more accurate modeling
of geological features such as faults, and other features such as aquifers that
are generally not included in the geological model.

Reservoir Grid Design

The simulation grid is constructed using either maps of the structure and
thickness (gross and net) of the reservoir or a 3D property model. The grid
also includes information regarding well locations and completed intervals.

Chapter 2-2 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Overview of ECLIPSE Office

In the GeoQuest simulation workflow this task can be performed using maps
generated by CPS-3 or Grid and a simulation gridding package such as Grid
or FloGrid. Property3D can also be used as a source for the structural model
used to build the simulation grid when using FloGrid. ECLIPSE Office has
only a very basic capability for building traditional rectangular and corner
point grids, however it does contain extensive powerful unstructured gridding
capabilities. No matter which path is taken to develop the simulation grid, the
output of the gridding process is a set of ECLIPSE keywords (arrays) that
describe the model.

Overview of Simulation Workflow

Design reservoir structure (seismic, logs)
Grid, CPS3, FloGrid gross and net thickness (logs)
reservoir grid well locations and perforated intervals

Grid, FloGrid, FloGeo

ECLIPSE Office

Describe porosity, permeability (logs, cores)

PVTi, SCAL, VFPi fluid analyses (lab data)
reservoir pressure and contacts (logs, well tests, etc.)
Schedule

Select simulator black oil or compositional

ECLIPSE fractured, condensate, etc.
100/200/300/400/500 model horizontal wells, EOR, thermal, streamtube,
FrontSIM etc.

Solve for
ECLIPSE History
pressures and historical production data
SIMOPT match
saturations
FloViz
PlanOpt Predict and investigate different scenarios
NWM optimise future visualize results
Peep production economic calculations

15 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 2-2 Overview of Simulation Workflow

Reservoir Description

After the simulation grid has been designed, it is necessary to assign rock and
fluid properties to each cell in the grid. Permeability and porosity are generally
obtained from well log and core data, sometimes coupled with geostatistical
analysis to estimate the properties between wells.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 2-3

Overview of ECLIPSE Office

Rock properties such as porosity and permeability, active cell, and other
regional definitions are assigned using GeoQuest products such as Grid,
FloGrid, FloGeo and SCAL.

In addition to rock properties, the reservoir description must also contain

descriptions of each of the fluids present in the model. For Black Oil modeling
this consists of a set of tables relating the various fluid properties (e.g. oil,
water, gas) as a function of pressure. Compositional models describe the fluid
in terms of an Equation of State or gas/oil equilibrium values (K-values)
which describe the liquid and gas properties at any pressure and temperature.
Black Oil properties can be determined using PVTi or the built-in correlations
in ECLIPSE Office. Compositional and thermal PVT can be generated using
PVTi.

In addition to PVT data, the rock-fluid interactions (relative permeability and

capillary pressure) must be defined. This consists of a set of tables defining
the interactions as a function of the saturation of a particular fluid. Generally
the source of this information is laboratory special core analysis (SCAL) data,
although correlations are often used in cases where there is no lab data.

The GeoQuest product SCAL is specifically designed to deal with preparing

laboratory data for use in a simulator. Both ECLIPSE Office and SCAL offer
correlations in lieu of laboratory data.

Well logs and pressure transient tests are common sources of the initial
reservoir pressure and fluid saturation data. Saturation distribution is often
modeled by defining the fluid contacts (e.g. GOC, WOC, WGC) and allowing
the reservoir conditions to be solved using capillary pressure data to help
ensure a stable equilibrium at the start of the simulation. Maps of saturation
values are then used as QC tools in this case.

PVT, SCAL and initialization data can be applied regionally within the
simulation grid using Grid, FloGrid, FloGeo and/or SCAL. ECLIPSE
Office also offers a simple method assigning regions to simulation grids.

Vertical Flow Performance (VFP) tables are commonly used to define the
relationship of well bottom hole pressure to some pressure up the hole. These
tables relate the bottom hole pressure and tubing head pressure using flow
rate, fluid properties and fractions, and casing/tubing descriptions. VFP tables

Chapter 2-4 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Overview of ECLIPSE Office

are used to control wells by tubing head or other non-bottom hole pressure
during the simulation.

VFP tables can be entered manually in ECLIPSE Office using the keyword
editor, or generated using VFPi.

Well location, production, event and time step data are also required for a
reservoir simulation model description. This data is transformed to simulation
keywords using the Schedule product. In addition, time dependent data can
also be entered manually in ECLIPSE Office.

Select Simulation Model

The next step in the simulation workflow is to select the proper simulation
model to use. Simulation models are classed as Black Oil or Compositional.
The decision of what type of model to use depends largely on the type of
fluids involved and their properties. For example, Black Oil models do not
generally give accurate results for highly wet gases, condensates, and volatile
oils.

Also important in the decision are the features of the reservoir and wells such
as natural fracture and hydraulic fractures, types of well construction (e.g.
vertical, horizontal, deviated), and what special features are needed for the
model (e.g. thermal processes, EOR processes, streamline simulation, etc.).

GeoQuest offers a complete line of Black Oil, Compositional, Thermal and

Streamline models that are completely compatible with ECLIPSE Office.

Solve for Pressures and Saturations – History Matching

Reservoir simulators are simply devices for solving for the fluid saturation and
pressure of a simulation grid over time. When a known production schedule of
wells is provided, the simulation can be tuned such that the well
production/injection rates and pressures predicted by the simulation
reasonably agree with measured data from the field. This is an iterative
process called “history matching” and is one of the keys to performing a good
simulation. The history matching process usually involves changing the least

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 2-5

Overview of ECLIPSE Office

confident values in the simulation, such as porosity, permeability, relative

permeability, etc. and comparing the results to known production and pressure
data. Experience and experimentation have historically been used to determine
the sensitivity of the solution with respect to various reservoir and fluid
parameters, although modern products such as SimOpt can be used to speed
the process by identifying the parameters that will most influence the result.

In cases where no wells yet exist then the history matching step usually
consists of running a large number of cases with different reservoir properties
and producing a statistical distribution of the results from which the most
likely model is selected.

ECLIPSE Office is used extensively in this process by virtue of its case

management and analysis tools (results viewing and report generation).

Predict and Optimize Future Production

Once the simulation model is tuned, the future wells and anticipated
constraints are added and the model is run out to the depletion of the reservoir.
This may simply be a continuation of current operations or implementation of
an enhanced recovery process such as infill drilling or various displacement
and pressure maintenance processes. Usually a number of cases are run to
determine the “best” plan for development of the reservoir.

ECLIPSE Office also includes tools to build and analyze the optimization of
the reservoir development options. These include the Results Viewer, Report
Generator, the ability to perform multiple sensitivities, investigate well
locations (using PlanOpt), and create single well or sector models from Full
Field model data (using NWM).

ECLIPSE Office in the Simulation Workflow

ECLIPSE Office is the simulation “desktop” facilitating every aspect of the

simulation project. Models can be built, run, and analyzed completely within
the ECLIPSE Office environment. ECLIPSE Office also integrates the
output from all GeoQuest simulation applications so the power of these
accessory products can be fully utilized.

Chapter 2-6 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Overview of ECLIPSE Office

Simulation Desktop

16 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 2-3 The Simulation Desktop

NOTE: Accessory application such as FloGrid, SCAL and PVTi, as well as

the simulators themselves (e.g. ECLIPSE 100, ECLIPSE 300,
FrontSim), are NOT included in the standard license for ECLIPSE
Office and must be purchased separately.

Workflow in ECLIPSE Office

The workflow in ECLIPSE Office mirrors the workflow of the reservoir

simulation modeling project. The workflow begins with the design of the grid
and reservoir description. Next, simulator options are considered and the best
simulator for the task is selected. Then the simulation is performed and the
results are analyzed. In the likely event that the first simulation does not
match the actual data, the history matching process is used. Simulation
parameters are adjusted in an iterative manner until a “good” match is
obtained.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 2-7

Overview of ECLIPSE Office

After the history match process, ECLIPSE Office is used to set up predictive
cases and investigate various production strategies.

Workflow in ECLIPSE Office

Reservoir
Description and grid
design:
Data Manager
Production Strategy:
PlanOpt

Simulator Options:
History Matching : Blackoil, Thermal,
Case Manager Compositional,
Streamline

Prediction:
NWM
Reservoir Simulation:
Local, Remote,
Parallel, Multiple runs

17 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 2-4 Workflow in ECLIPSE Office

Main Modules in ECLIPSE Office

ECLIPSE Office features five modules that greatly improve the user’s control
of the simulation workflow: Case Manager, Data Manager, Run Manager,
Result Viewer and Report Generator.

Data Manager

The Data Manager provides user-friendly access to the keywords for all the
simulators and some basic features of FloGrid, Schedule, SCAL and PVTi.

Chapter 2-8 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Overview of ECLIPSE Office

Case Manager

The Case Manager helps to capture the relationship between runs and
graphically display them. Runs are shown as children to cases from which they
were derived by simply modifying some data.

Run Manager

The Run Manager offers an environment for launching, monitoring and

controlling simulation runs. Runs may be started locally or over the network
on a server. Multiple realizations generated using various well control options
and multiple cases may be run simultaneously. With the Run Manager, it is
possible to monitor the progress of runs on line plots and solution displays,
and if they are not delivering the required results, the runs can be stopped.

Result Viewer

The Result Viewer can display simulation results in both 2 and 3 dimensions.
It can also be used to create and view solution displays and line plots of
production data as a replacement for Graf. Results from multiple runs can
also be displayed simultaneously for comparative purposes and as an aid to
quick decision making.

Report Generator

The Report Generator is used to create reports from the extraction of

relevant information from the summary files or from the .PRT file and put
them in a form required for the creation of written reports.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 2-9

Overview of ECLIPSE Office

Main Modules in Eclipse OFFICE

• Modular Simulation
Desktop:
– Data Manager
– Case Manager
– Run Manager
– Results Viewer
– Report Generator

18 ECLIPSE Office User Course

17 July 2001

Figure 2-5 Main modules in ECLIPSE Office

Chapter 2-10 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Chapter 3 Understanding Data Entry

Overview

The ECLIPSE Office user interface consists of a main window with an

integrated case manager and a number of modules accessed via the main
window. Each module’s user interface has specific functions, but most
functions are presented in such a way as to be consistent throughout the
application.

This chapter discusses the main window of the user interface, some of the
more important module windows and the most commonly used menu items.

Main Window

The main window is divided into the following areas:

• Application buttons
• Office Module buttons
• Case Relationship Tree (Case Manager)
• Case Data List (Case Manager)
• Command bar
• Status bar
Below the main window is the Log Window. This is a very important part of
ECLIPSE Office, since all errors, warnings and other useful information is
printed here.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-1

Understanding Data Entry

The ECLIPSE Office Main Window

19 ECLIPSE Office User Course

21 July 2001

Figure 3-1 The ECLIPSE Office main window

Application Launch Buttons

The pre and post processing programs can be launched from the main window
of ECLIPSE Office using the Application Launch buttons. The programs
that can be launched by clicking on a button include FloGrid, Grid, SCAL,
PVTi, Schedule, VFPi, SimOpt, Weltest and Peep. Graf and FloViz can be
launched using a menu item, Pre/Post...

NOTE: The buttons will only be active if the program is installed and there
is a license available.

Chapter 3-2 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

Status Bar

The Status Bar displays context-sensitive help as well as system settings such
as the status of the NUMLOCK key and the read-only status of text boxes in
the main display.

Module Launch Buttons

The Module Launch buttons provide an alternative means of entering the

various modules. The behavior of the Module Launch buttons is the same as
the items listed under the Module menu on the Command Bar.

Log Window

The Log Window displays pertinent information regarding the operations

performed by the program. This information is also written to the
OFFICE.LOG file in the working directory. The Log Window may be hidden
from view by de-selecting Window>Message Area in the Main Window.

BEST PRACTICE: Always check the log file whenever the program
gives an error message. The log file often contains
more detailed information about the error than is
provided in the pop-up error messages.

Case Information Area

The Case Information area is located on the right side of the Main Window
whenever a case is selected. The Case Information area displays any notes
added to the project by the user as well as the include files currently associated
with the selected case.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-3

Understanding Data Entry

Data Tree

The Data Tree is located in the center of the Main Window. The Data Tree
shows the relationship between each case in an intuitive, graphical manner.

Commonly used menu items

The command bar is typical of most Windows-style programs. Typically, all

of the commands and buttons found on the window are also accessible from
the command bar menus. Listed below are the functions associated with some
of the more commonly used menu items.

File Menu
NEW PROJECT
This option displays a file browser that you can use to specify the filename for
a new ECLIPSE Office project.

The file names for ECLIPSE Office project files have the extension .OFF. If
you try to give your new project the same filename as an existing file, you will
be given the option of overwriting the existing file or canceling the request.

The project file is not actually created until you save the project using:

• Main: File>Save Project

- OR -
• Main: File>Save Project As.

NOTE: This option is disabled if you are already working on an ECLIPSE

Office project. To enable it again, close your current project by
selecting Main: File> Close Project.

Chapter 3-4 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

Procedure: Create a new ECLIPSE Office project

1. From the main ECLIPSE Office window select File>New Project
2. Select the directory in which to save the file (This should be the currently
displayed directory if Office was started in the correct working directory)
3. Enter a name for the project.
4. Press the Open button (OK button on UNIX systems)

OPEN PROJECT
Selecting this option displays a file browser that you can use to open an
existing ECLIPSE Office project. The file names for ECLIPSE Office
project files have the extension .OFF.

NOTE: This option is disabled if you are already working on an ECLIPSE

Office project. To enable it again, close your current project by
selecting Main: File> Close Project.

SAVE PROJECT
Selecting this option saves the current ECLIPSE Office project. This option
is disabled if you do not have a project open.

SAVE PROJECT AS
This option displays a file browser that you can use to specify a new filename
under which to save your current ECLIPSE Office project.

The file names for ECLIPSE Office project files have the extension .OFF. If
you try to give your new project the same filename as an existing file, you will
be given the option of overwriting the existing file or canceling the request.
This option is disabled if you do not have a project open.

CLOSE PROJECT
Selecting this option closes the current ECLIPSE Office project. Before the
project is closed, ECLIPSE Office will ask you if you want to save the
current project. This option is disabled if you do not have a project open.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-5

Understanding Data Entry

EXIT
Select this option to exit completely from ECLIPSE Office. If you have a
project open when you select this option, ECLIPSE Office will ask you if you
want to save the project.

View menu
KEYWORD VIEWED BY DESCRIPTION
This option controls the application default for displaying keywords, that is,
whether they are displayed using their descriptions or names. This affects the
Keyword Editor Panel windows and the Explore Keywords window. The
default is to use descriptions, but if it is un-checked the keyword name is used.
The default for this setting can be controlled in the configuration file
(ECL.CFG) as follows:
SECTION OFFICE
SUBSECT DATAMANAGER
KEYWORDVIEWBY DESCRIPTION
--KEYWORDVIEWBY NAME

Case menu
SHOW
Opens the Case Information panel for the currently selected case.

The Case Information panel gives you a view of some basic information
concerning the currently selected case. You can also use this panel to add a
comment and a full description of the case. This information is saved in the
ECLIPSE Office project file. This option is disabled if you do not have a
project open.

Chapter 3-6 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

Procedure: Rename a Case/Add Case Notes and Comments

1. Click on a case node in the data tree to select a case.
2. From the main ECLIPSE Office window select Case>Show
3. To change the case name, enter the desired name of the case in the Case
Name field.
4. To add notes to the case, click in the Notes window and type the desired
notes.
5. To add a comment to the case, type the desired comment in the Comment
field.
6. Press the Apply (or OK) button.

IMPORT
Selecting this option allows you to import an existing ECLIPSE data deck
into ECLIPSE Office. This option is disabled if you do not have a project
open.

Procedure: Importing an existing ECLIPSE dataset (complete)

1. In the Case Manager window, create or select an empty case, or one that you
want to overwrite.
2. Select Case>Import
3. Select the file to import.
4. Press the Open button (OK button on UNIX systems)

NOTE: The imported dataset is read and new Office format include files are
created for the case. The data assumes the name of the case. The
original dataset is no longer used and can safely be moved or
deleted as desired.

TIP: If you do not currently have a project open, you can also import an
existing dataset using File>New Project. If a dataset is imported in
this manner a new case is created using the root name of the
dataset.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-7

Understanding Data Entry

TIP: If you want to work in a different unit system than the data set being
imported, import each section independently through that section’s
Data Manager main window using the Convert Units option.

ADD CASE
A new case is created and displayed in the data tree area of the main window.
This option is disabled if you do not have a project open. The type of case to
be created is selected from among the following options:

New
Selecting this option adds a new child case to the currently selected case. The
default properties for this new case are inherited from the parent case,
however you can change any of these properties. The case inherits no datafiles
from the parent case, so new files must be either created in the keyword
editors or imported.

Clone
Clone cases make use of the parent case datafiles, however, the user can edit
and save cloned datafiles under a new name to create multiple realizations.

WARNING: Changes made to parent cases involving the addition and

subtraction of tables and arrays (i.e. changes in dimensions
of the project) are not passed to child cases and may cause
child cases to become corrupted.

Restart
By selecting this option, you will be prompted for a report step to restart from.
Restart cases make use of the parent case datafiles, with the exception of the
Initialisation and Schedule include files. The new Initialisation file will
have the RESTART keyword added, and the Schedule file has the timesteps
preceding the restart date removed.

Chapter 3-8 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

Procedure: Creating a restart case

1. In the Case Manager window, select the case that is to be used as the base
case for the restart.
2. Select Case>Add Case…>Restart
3. Select the time step at which to begin the restart.
4. Press the OK button.

TIP: If you want to create a restart run of a non-ECLIPSE Office run,

import the run as a new case first, then either re-run the case or
rename the output file to Office-compliant format. Then select this
caseand add the restart case.

DELETE
Selecting this option deletes the currently selected case from the project.
ECLIPSE Office does not let you delete the root case. This option is disabled
if you do not have a project open.

CAUTION: All child cases are removed at the same time as a parent
case.

List menu
INCLUDE FILES...
This displays a panel showing the data files included in the ECLIPSE Office
file for all the sections in the Data Manager. The table displays the names
and the full path names of the include files. The include files must be defined
here before they can be switched in and out of cases, using the File>Open file
option in the various sections of the Data Manager.
New
This option opens a panel where you can specify details of a new include file
to be added to the list.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-9

Understanding Data Entry

Edit
This option opens a panel where you can change the path and filename of the
selected include file.

Delete
This option deletes the selected include file from all cases. Confirmation is
requested.

BEST PRACTICE: Use the Edit option to change the paths to include
files when moving a project to a different directory
structure or to rebuild a project from include files
in the event the original project file is lost.

Util menu
DIRECTORIES
Selecting this option displays the Directories panel. This indicates the path
names that ECLIPSE Office is using. These have been read from the
configuration file (ECL.CFG) or set during program operation. The path
names cannot be edited in this panel.

CALCULATOR
Selecting this option launches the Calculator, a general-purpose interpretive
programming language.

TEXT EDITOR
Selecting this option launches a simple text editor.

LICENSE CHECKING
Selecting this option displays the Program License panel. You can use this
panel to view the status of each of the licenses in the current license file.

Help menu
ABOUT ECLIPSE OFFICE
Displays version and installation information.

Chapter 3-10 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

Case Manager

The Case Manager allows the user to create cases with properties inherited
from other cases. Changes made to the current case can be saved to a new file
and used only for that case and any child cases.

The graphical interface allows the user to visually see the relationship between
cases and to keep a record of the changes made to each case.

Case Manager
• Allows the engineer to
create new cases with
properties inherited from
previous cases.
– Helps the engineer to view
the relationships between
simulation runs graphically
– Helps the engineer to keep
record of the changes
made to each model

20 ECLIPSE Office User Course

21 July 2001

Figure 3-2 Case Manager display

Data Manager

The Data Manager allows you to create, edit, insert, delete and review all the
data corresponding to the selected case. The sections of the Data Manager
are Case Definition, Grid, PVT, SCAL, Initialization, Regions, Schedule
and Summary. The Data Manager provides easy interaction with the desktop
environment and other applications.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-11

Understanding Data Entry

On entry into the Data Manager, an areal view of the model with positions of
wells and faults can be displayed if View>Display model in DM has been
selected in the ECLIPSE Office main window.

The Data Manager also allows users to enter many values in whatever units
are available. When these units differ from the unit system of the case, values
are automatically converted to the proper unit system.

Data Manager
• Modularly sectioned
– GRID: Geological properties
– PVT: reservoir properties
– SCAL: relative permeability
and capillary pressure data
– Initialization: Initial reservoir
conditions
– Schedule: Production
operations
– Summary: Output data
– Multiple Sensitivities: Multiple
• Easy interaction with desktop environment and other
realization of production software packages
constraints.
• Unit conversion utilities

21 ECLIPSE Office User Course

21 July 2001

Figure 3-3 Data Manager user interface

The Data Manager offers a complete set of tools for generating, editing and
viewing the data for ECLIPSE and FrontSim simulation datasets, including:

• Pre-processor applications such as the 2D and 3D editor/viewer and

unstructured gridder.
• Base level tools including correlations for PVT and SCAL properties,
interactive Keyword Editor panels for each keyword, and simple grid
building options.

Chapter 3-12 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

• Calculator, a programming language that allows the user to access any

data currently loaded into memory and perform tasks such as calculating
the average pore volume of a field.

The Data Manager also allows multiple sensitivity runs to be quickly and
easily defined. For example, a group of sensitivities can be created to
investigate the field performance under N different target flow rates.
ECLIPSE Office can automatically generate the N files and run ECLIPSE N
times.

Data Manager
• Complete set of data generation/editing/viewing tools for ECLIPSE and
FrontSim:
– Pre-processor applications
– Base level tools:
• Use of correlations for rapid data generation
• Interactive data input, Keyword panels
• Simple grid building options
– Calculator (e.g, calculate average pore volume of field)

• Multiple Sensitivities option

– E.g, N different field target rates can be set up automatically or manually
– Eclipse is then run N-times
22 ECLIPSE Office User Course
21 July 2001

Figure 3-4 Data Manager functionality

Data Manager Sections

Case Definition

The Case Definition section allows you to define the global case dimensions
and select the major options for this case. It is similar to the RUNSPEC section
of the simulator file but does not require input of table dimensions, as
ECLIPSE Office calculates these.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-13

Understanding Data Entry

File output types normally specified in the RUNSPEC section are set in the
Run Manager.

The Simulator field allows you to select the Blackoil, Compositional,

Thermal or FrontSim simulator. The panel contains up to eight folders. The
contents of these folders are dependent on the simulator chosen. If certain
options are chosen then others will be disabled to prevent you selecting an
invalid combination of keywords (for example the miscible gas flood option
may not be used with the vertical equilibrium option).

Grid

The Grid section gives you access to the keywords used in the GRID and
EDIT sections of the simulator file, which define the geometry of the
computational grid and various rock properties, and also instructions for
modifying ECLIPSE calculated data. The module is made up of several
sections ranging from simple keyword editors to an unstructured gridding
facility.

Simple grids can be made completely within the ECLIPSE Office

environment. More complex geological models can be imported from
“include” files generated by FloGrid, GRID, and many third-party gridding
applications.

REGIONS section keywords relating to the Grid section are also accessed
here, that is Fluid-in-Place (FIPNUM), and others such as FLUXNUM,
FIPXXX, MULTNUM, ISOLNUM and PINCHNUM.

The keyword import and editing facilities are designed to minimize errors in
the simulator data sets. Many parameters that are set in the RUNSPEC section
and depend on GRID and EDIT keywords are now set automatically, thereby
much reducing the work involved in creating data sets.

The Grid section also offers you the capability of viewing grid block
properties on the simulation grid in either 2D or, optionally, 3D. Properties
can also be edited in the 2D viewer. The simulation grid geometry data used
by the 2D and 3D viewers can be generated either by reading an existing
GRID file, running the simulator, or creating the GRID file by interpreting the
keywords.

Chapter 3-14 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

If the simulator is run at this stage then properties are read from the INIT file.
This implies that transmissibilites can also be displayed.

NOTE: Transmissibilites are not calculated by ECLIPSE Office.

The Grid section also has an optional Unstructured Gridder where a PEBI
grid can be generated. This allows the user to quickly construct a grid from a
series of contour maps, well positions, etc. An option to create the reservoir
description from a structured grid is also available.

NOTE: Unstructured grids may only be viewed by reading the .PGRID or

.EGRID file, as the keywords alone do not contain enough information to
visualize the geometry.

An areal view of the grid structure will be displayed in the main window if the
Display model in GRID section menu item is selected (via the View menu on
the ECLIPSE Office main window).

PVT

The PVT section gives you access to the PVT keywords of the simulator
PROPS section. Options relating to the PVT section can be selected at this
stage, as well as in the Case Definition section. Keywords can be generated
through Black Oil correlations. Data can also be imported from include files
generated by PVTi, or by manually entering the table data in the PVT
Keyword Editor panel. REGIONS keywords relating to the PVT section are
also accessed here, such as PVTNUM and ROCKNUM. PVT table data can be
plotted in the PVT Keyword Editor panel.

NOTE: Graphical editing of the data is not possible in this version.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-15

Understanding Data Entry

Region data can be displayed on a simulation grid in either 2D or 3D. In the

2D Viewer the data can be edited.

SCAL

The SCAL section of the Data Manager handles all relative permeability and
capillary pressure related data. SCAL data may be provided in tabular form or
generated from built-in correlations. The SCAL section is also the place
where SCAL related region definitions, such as SATNUM and IMBNUM, can be
created.

Options relating to the SCAL section can be selected at this stage as well as in
the Case Definition section. Data can be imported from include files
generated by the SCAL program. Tables can be plotted in the SCAL
Keyword Editor.

NOTE: Graphical editing of the data is not possible in this version.

Region data and grid block properties can be displayed on a simulation grid in
either 2D or 3D. Data can be edited in the 2D Viewer.

Initialisation

The Initialisation section gives you access to the SOLUTION keywords of the
simulator. These include keywords defining the initial equilibration of the
reservoir, the declaration of certain PVT properties at initial time, and explicit
enumeration of the fluid saturation values for each grid block. Region
keywords relating to the Initialisation section, or Equilibration regions, for
example EQLNUM, are also accessed here. REGIONS data and grid block
properties can be displayed on a simulation grid in either 2D or 3D. Data can
be edited in the 2D Viewer.

The simulator can also be used to initialize the model. This option is only
available in the Initialisation section if the simulator is installed and there is a
license for it. When the simulation run is finished the initial solutions are
available in the 2D and 3D Viewers.

Chapter 3-16 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

Regions

The Regions section gives you access to the REGIONS keywords of the
simulator. Region data and grid block properties can be displayed on a
simulation grid in either 2D or 3D. The simulation grid can be generated by
either reading an existing GRID file, or by running the simulator.

Many REGIONS section keywords may have been created in previous sections
of the Data Manager, this section allows the user to access these keywords as
well as other keywords that are unique to this section.

Schedule

The Schedule section gives you access to the SCHEDULE keywords of the
simulator. This contains all time dependent data including well and production
data, time stepping and reporting controls, and optional controls such as group
controls and surface networks.

Data can be imported from include files generated by the Schedule program.
Time steps and keywords can be viewed, edited, inserted and deleted. Some
keywords allow you to insert multiple values of an argument. This facility
enables multiple sensitivities to be run from a single case. These keywords are
the well and group production/injection rates, economic limits and well
completions, that is WCONPROD, WCONINJE, GCONPROD, GCONINJE,
GRUPPROD, GRUPINJE, WECON, GECON, COMPDAT.

Summary

The Summary section is a pre-processor tool to help you to view and change
the summary keywords. The module is made up of several sections, each
containing panels. The panels are set up to help you to select the required
keywords as easily as possible. The keywords are grouped in sections or
folders.

The available keywords depend on the current case options defined in the
RUNSPEC section of the data, like tracers, API tracking, brine, polymer, etc.,
so unwanted keywords are eliminated from the lists.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-17

Understanding Data Entry

Multiple Sensitivities

It is possible to define a set of runs from a single dataset. The runs may be
submitted on a number of different machines. These runs could be launched
using different environments; for example, PVM. The Multiple Sensitivities
section of the Data Manager allows the user to manipulate previously
specified sensitivity runs.

The sensitivity runs are actually defined in the Schedule section, using the
Multiple Runs or Sensitivities option buttons associated with certain
keywords that allow this function.

NOTE: Sensitivity cases are defined in the Schedule section. The Multiple
Sensitivity section only allows the user to easily review any
previously defined sensitivity cases.

NOTE: It is not possible to have two Data Manager panels open

simultaneously - only one instance can be open at any time.

Section Main Windows

Each section of the Data Manager has its own unique main window. The
main window is the place to manage the entire section, such as clearing the
data or importing a new file. Listed below by menu item are some of the
common tasks that can be performed from any section main window. For
graphical-related commands relating to the Data Manager section main
windows, see Chapter 7.

Chapter 3-18 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

Section Main Windows

23 ECLIPSE Office User Course

21 July 2001

Figure 3-5 Section Main Windows

Commonly used menu items

File menu

NEW
Creates a new include file for the section. If there is unsaved data, a save
option will first be displayed. The user may also be prompted to clear related
data from other sections.

OPEN FILE
Opens an existing ECLIPSE Office format include file. This will override the
current data so if it is not saved, a save option will first be displayed. The file
must have been specified in the list of grid include files which can be set from
the List menu option off the main window.

IMPORT FILE
This menu item displays a sub-menu with the following items:

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-19

Understanding Data Entry

New
Imports a new keyword file into the data set. If the current data is not saved, a
prompt is displayed.

Append
Appends a keyword file to the existing data set. If duplicate keywords are
encountered, a warning is displayed. For Schedule section data, the data is
appended to the end of the Schedule section. If any DATES keywords are
encountered that are earlier than those already present in the section, these
keywords and their associated data will be ignored.

Convert Units
This option causes the user to be prompted to provide a unit system for the
imported data. Upon import, the data will be converted to the unit system
specified in the Case Definition section.

Procedure: Converting unit system during import

1. From any Data Manager section main window (e.g. Grid, PVT, Schedule)
select File>Import>Convert Units
2. Select File>Import>New or File>Import>Append as appropriate.
3. Select the Unit System of the file to be imported.
4. Press OK.
5. Select the file to be imported.
6. Press the Open button (OK button on UNIX systems)

CLEAR
This removes all data from the current data set. A prompt is displayed first.

SAVE
This saves the ECLIPSE Office include file(s) using the current file name.

SAVE AS
This saves the current data to user selected ECLIPSE Office Grid Geometry
and Regions include file names.

Chapter 3-20 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

BEST PRACTICE: Always use this option when editing child cases.
This prevents inadvertent alteration of the parent
and any other child cases.

Section menu (PVT and SCAL sections only)

KEYWORDS
Opens the Keyword Editor panel allowing the user to insert, edit and delete
keyword.

CORRELATIONS
Opens the Correlations panel allowing the user to automatically generate
keywords.

Subsection menu (Grid section only)

GRID KEYWORDS…
This opens the Grid section Keyword Editor panel which allows editing of
all GRID keywords. This subsection is discussed in more detail later in this
chapter.

EDIT KEYWORDS…
This opens the Edit section Keyword Editor panel that allows editing of all
EDIT keywords. This subsection is discussed in more detail later in this
chapter.

UNSTRUCTURED GRIDDER…
This opens the optional Unstructured Gridder module, as discussed in
Understanding the Unstructured Gridderof this training guide. This option is
greyed out if there is not a valid petragrid license.

If ECLIPSE keywords are present in the Grid section, a panel appears

prompting you for the level of keyword import into the Unstructured
Gridder.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-21

Understanding Data Entry

Initialize Model menu (Initialization section only)

RUN SIMULATION
Allows you to run the data to the first timestep (t=0) and produce the GRID
and INIT files. If the GRID file exists a message is displayed asking whether
or not to overwrite it. The files will be read and the simulation grid for the
2D/3D Viewer will be prepared. A suffix “_INIT” will be added to the file
names produced.

2D…
Displays the 2D Viewer. Initial solutions can be viewed in this window.

NOTE: You cannot edit properties via this option. Use GridView>2D… to
edit saturation regions and arrays.

3D…
Displays the 3D Viewer. Initial solutions can be viewed in this window.

GridView menu

RUN SIMULATION
In the case of a structured grid, this menu option allows you to run the data
and produce the GRID and INIT file. If the GRID file exists, then it will be
overwritten. In the case of an unstructured grid, the data is run to produce the
INIT file but the GRID file must have already been produced by the
Unstructured Gridder (PGRID or EGRID) or another application for this
option to be valid. In both cases, the files will be read and the simulation grid
for the 2D/3D Viewer will be prepared.

FROM CURRENT GRID FILE (GRID SECTION ONLY)

This item will read the existing GRID and INIT files from this or previous
runs. The simulation grid for the 2D/3D Viewer will be prepared from these
files.

FROM KEYWORDS (GRID SECTION ONLY)

In the case of a structured grid, this menu option creates a GRID file from the
Grid and Regions keyword data. You are given the option to create a GRID
file. If the GRID file exists, then you are given the option of overwriting it. In
the case of an unstructured grid, the GRID file must have already been
produced by the Unstructured Gridder or another application for this option

Chapter 3-22 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

to be valid. The GRID file is then read to produce the simulation grid but
properties are prepared from the keyword data.

TIP: The 2D Viewer can be used as a graphical property editor only if

this option is used to prepare the grid and property data for the
viewer.

NOTE: In the case of an unstructured grid only region properties will be

available for viewing and these will only become available after the
Regions include file has been re-imported following re-gridding via
the Unstructured Gridder.

2D…
This option displays the grid in a two-dimensional viewer. Properties can be
graphically edited. The 2D Viewer is discussed in more detail later in Chapter
7. This option is greyed out until a GRID file is selected or created using one
of the above menu items.

3D…
This option then displays the grid in a three-dimensional viewer. The 3D
viewer is discussed in more detail in Chapter 6. This option is greyed out until
a GRID file is selected or created using one of the above menu items.

Keyword Editor Panels

The Data Manager is designed around Keyword Editor Panels (KEP) that are
specific to each section. These keyword panels are developed to provide
interactive input for ECLIPSE and FrontSim keywords.

Online help is available for each keyword when the online manual is installed.
Pressing the Help button will automatically open the keyword Reference
Manual to the appropriate keyword.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-23

Understanding Data Entry

The Data Manager also provides an intelligent transfer of keywords when

converting Black Oil datasets to Compositional. The user then need only to
provide any additional information required in the Compositional model.

“Smart” panels allow the user to display, for example, all the keywords
associated with certain wells or groups or on a specific date.

There are two types of KEPs, depending on the number of columns of data.
The simplest KEP has two columns, with the column on the left disploaying
the keyword and the column on the right displaying the data for the keyword.
This type of KEP is used in the REGIONS section. The other KEP design has
three columns, where the first column represents some type of grouping of
keywords, such as by type of grid data, of set of PVT tables. In the Schedule
section the grouping is by report time.

Comments can be added to any keyword by entering the comment in the text
box located at the top of each Keyword Editor panel.

Keyword Editor Panel

• Interactive input of Eclipse
keywords
– All E100-500 keywords are
supported
– Online Help explains all
information associated with a
particular keyword
– Intelligent transfer of keywords
when converting from E100 to
E300

• “Smart” infrastructure allows the

display of, eg
– all keywords for well B12
– all keywords from Nov 17.

23 ECLIPSE Office User Course

21 July 2001

Figure 3-6 Keyword Editor Panels

Chapter 3-24 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

Commonly used menu items

Edit menu

SET LGR/GLOBAL DOMAIN…

If LGRs are present, then this option opens a panel where you can select an
LGR domain for keyword insert. This means that if you want to insert a
keyword for a particular LGR then you must select the LGR first using this
panel and then insert the keyword using the Edit>Insert Keyword menu
option. If the keyword is to be global then the global domain must be selected
from this list. By default the current insert domain is the same as that of the
currently displayed keyword.

INSERT TABLES BEFORE…

Prompts for the name of a new table and inserts it immediately before the
currently selected table.

INSERT TABLES AFTER…

Prompts for the name of a new table and inserts it immediately after the
currently selected table.

RENAME TABLES…
Prompts for the new name of the currently selected table.

DELETE TABLE
Deletes the currently selected table.

COPY TABLES…
Copies keywords from one table to another.

INSERT KEYWORD…
If there are valid keywords of the current Keyword Type that are not currently
used, this option opens a panel where the user can select an unused keyword to
insert.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-25

Understanding Data Entry

Procedure: Inserting a keyword

1. From any Keyword Editor panel select Edit>Insert Keyword
2. Select the keyword to be added (note that pressing Close does not import any
keyword). The panel automatically closes when a keyword is selected.
3. Enter the data for the keyword in the right had side of the Keyword Editor
panel.
4. Press the Apply button.

DELETE KEYWORD
Removes the selected keyword from the list.

CAUTION: If an LGR definition keyword (i.e. CARFIN, RADFIN,

RADFIN4) is deleted, then all Grid, Edit and Regions
section keywords associated with that LGR will be deleted
automatically. The user must visit other sections which
have keywords associated with that LGR and save the files,
otherwise errors will occur.

EXPLORE KEYWORDS…
Opens the Explore Keywords panel as discussed later in this chapter.

TIP: Experienced ECLIPSE users often find this option to be a faster

method for building a dataset than the Insert Keyword option.

BOX…
If an array keyword is currently displayed, this option opens a panel where
arithmetic functions can be applied to a selected area of the array box, as will
be discussed later in this chapter.

View menu

PLOT (PVT AND SCAL SECTIONS ONLY)

Plots all the keywords in the list that have a tabular form, for example PVTO,
PVDG and PVDO.

Chapter 3-26 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

NOTE: The menu item in plot window that appears are similar to those of
the 2D Viewer, however, the data cannot be edited.

KEYWORDS, DESCRIPTIONS
These options are mutually exclusive and display the list of keywords as
keyword names, or text descriptions, respectively.

GRID ORDER | XY/XZ/YX/YZ/ZX/ZY PLANE

If the keyword currently displayed is an array keyword, these options control
which dimensions are used in the keyword table to view the three dimensional
data. These options are disabled if the current keyword is not an array
keyword.

XY/XZ/YZ (SCHEDULE SECTION ONLY)

If the keyword currently displayed is an array keyword, these options control
which dimensions are used in the keyword table to view the three-dimensional
data in a two dimensional table.

NEXT, PREVIOUS
If the keyword currently displayed is an array keyword or has more than one
page of data, these options cycle through the different planes or pages for the
keyword data. These options are disabled if the current keyword is not an array
keyword and has only one page.

LGR NAMES (SCHEDULE SECTION ONLY)

Displays a list of LGR names from the Grid section.

TRACER NAMES (SCHEDULE SECTION ONLY)

Displays a list of tracer names from the PVT section.

COMPONENT NAMES (SCHEDULE SECTION ONLY)

Displays a list of component names from the PVT section.

Time menu (Schedule section only)

EDIT...
Allows you to edit existing time step values.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-27

Understanding Data Entry

INSERT...
A New Time panel is displayed. The user can create a new report time by
defining a date, a time step, or cumulative time since the start of the
simulation.

DELETE...
An option to leave or change subsequent dates/time steps is displayed. This
operation can also be canceled.

VIEW
This option controls the way that the Time list is displayed. The user may
select from either of the following options:
• Time Steps
• Cumulative Time
• Dates

Keyword Types menu

The Keyword Types menu is present only in the PVT, SCAL, Regions and
Initialization sections. The items under their menu vary by section, but each
menu item will cause a different set of keywords to be displayed.

Event menu (Schedule section only)

NEW...
A panel displaying all the keywords in the Schedule section is displayed. This
panel is configured according to the simulator selected. A toggle is provided
for descriptors or actual keyword names.

DELETE
Deletes the current highlighted keyword/event.

COPY
A list of steps is displayed and the keyword is copied to the selected time.

MOVE
This option allows the user to move a currently defined event. The user can
select from the following move options:

Chapter 3-28 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

Up/Down
Moves the event up or down one place in the list of keywords.

Top/Bottom
Moves the event to the top or bottom of the list of keywords for the currently
selected time.
Time
Moves the event to another time. A list of times is displayed using the current
Time list view method. A time must be defined before events can be moved to
it.

VIEW
This option controls the way that the Event list is displayed. The user may
select from either of the following options:
All
Displays all keywords associated with the current time.
Well
Displays only those keywords associated with the selected well or wells.
Group
Displays only those keywords associated with the selected group or groups.

Event
Displays all instances of the selected event or events only.

TIP: As asterisk (*) next to any time in the Time list indicates that the
Events list for that time contains events pertinent to the selected
Event view mode (e.g. Well, Group, Event).

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-29

Understanding Data Entry

Data Manager - Box Editor

25 ECLIPSE Office User Course

21 July 2001

Figure 3-7 Box Editor panel

Box Editor

The Box Editor provides an easy way to perform a number of simple

operations on array data. The topmost part of the panel shows the current
range for the operation. The minimum I, J, and K are shown in the first row
and the maximum I, J, and K are shown in the second row.

Using the Box Editor

An Operation from the drop-down list should be selected first.

Box operations
The following operations appear for all array keywords. The operations are
applied to the box section of the array specified the table. The first row in each
column specifies the beginning of the range for the operation and the second
row specifies the end of the range for the operation.

Chapter 3-30 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

• Equals
Sets each cell in the specified array range to the value in the Data Value field.
• Multiply
Multiply each cell in the specified array range by the value in the Multiplier
field.
• Copy
Copies the values from the specified array range of the Array Keyword to the
specified array range of the current keyword.
• Add
Adds the value in the Data Value field to each cell in the specified array range.
• MinValue
For each cell in the specified array range, if it is less than the value of the Data
Value field then it is set to the value of the Data Value field.
• MaxValue
For each cell in the specified array range, if it is greater than the value of the
Data Value field then it is set to the value of the Data Value field.
Flux region operations
The following operations only appear if the keyword FLUXNUM is present in
the Grid section. The operations are applied to the sections of the array in
which FLUXNUM has cell value equal to the specified Flux Region number.
• Equals in flux region
• Multiply in flux region
• Copy in flux region
• Add in flux region

The Equals, Multiply, Copy and Add operations are all applied in the same
way as the corresponding operations in the Box operations section above.

NOTE: ECLIPSE Office does not actually write the EQUALS, MULTIPLY,
etc. keywords to the dataset. Instead, the box operation is
preformed directly on the array and the modified array is saved to
the keyword.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-31

Understanding Data Entry

TIP: All Box operations are recorded in the Project Notes section visible
in the main window. To “undo” box operations, simply perform the
inverse of the box operations, working from the bottom up of the
Project Notes.

Procedure: Using the Box Editor to create V2 = 0.1*V1

1. In the Keyword Editor panel, make sure that both V2 and V1 are defined (V2
and V1 represent any two array keywords present in the current section).
2. Select V2 in the Keyword Editor panel.
3. Select Edit > Box…
4. In the Box Editor panel, set the range of IJK for the edit. The default is the
entire grid.
5. Set the Operation field to Copy.
6. Set the Copy From field to V1
7. Press the Apply button.
8. Set the Operation field to Multiply.
9. Enter 0.1 in the Multiplier field.
10. Press the Apply button.

Chapter 3-32 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

Data Manager - Keyword Explorer

26 ECLIPSE Office User Course

21 July 2001

Figure 3-8 Keyword Editor panel

Keyword Explorer

This panel offers different options to create keywords or view the help pages
for each keyword. The Keyword Explorer is available in all section of the
Data Manager and shows only the keywords that are appropriate for the
current Data Manager section.

Panel fields and buttons

Keyword’s Name
Type the name of the desired keyword here. It is possible to use wild cards to
get various combinations.

Valid Keywords Only

Use this option to filter out all disallowed keywords for the current case.
Black Oil
This displays Black Oil keywords for the current Data Manager section.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-33

Understanding Data Entry

Compositional
This displays Compositional keywords (no thermal keywords).

Thermal
This displays Thermal keywords and Compositional keywords that are also
valid for use with the Thermal simulator.
FrontSim
This displays valid keywords for the FrontSim simulator.
Action
This option allows you to choose between creating a keyword or viewing the
help pages.

NOTE: It is not possible to create a keyword that is not relevant for the
current project, but it is always possible to view the help pages for a
keyword.

Clicking on any keyword from the list will provide the selected action.

NOTE: Keywords already inserted into the project are marked by having a
“*” at the beginning of the keyword. Clicking on these keywords
will not create them again. The exception to this behavior is the
Schedule section, where keywords may be inserted more than once.

Toggle Desc/Keys
Switches between description and the name of the keyword.

Apply
Creates a list of the keywords based on the above criteria.

Help
Displays the help pages for the Explore Keywords panel.

Chapter 3-34 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

Reporting Times and Events

The simulator determines its own time step size, subject to user constraints.
Therefore the times entered into the Schedule section of the Data Manager
represent only those times at which data is changed or a report is to be written.
The report type and data can be specified using keywords such as RPTSCHED,
RPTRST, and OUTSOL.

These report times can be defined and edited using the Time>Insert… and
Time>Edit… menu items of the Schedule section main window.

The New Time panel is shown in Figure 3-9. This panel allows the user to
enter times as time steps, cumulative time or by specific date. Times must be
defined before Events can be added.

Data Manager - Schedule Section

New Time Panel

27 ECLIPSE Office User Course

22 July 2001

Figure 3-9 New Time panel

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-35

Understanding Data Entry

Events are defined as actions that occur immediately after the current report
time and continue at least until the next report time, or until changed, in the
Schedule section of the simulation. These include adding wells, completing
wells, producing wells, etc.

Events are entered from the main window of the Schedule section using the
Event>New menu option. The New Event panel, shown in Figure 3-10,
divides all the possible events into groups by their event type. The associated
events for the selected event type are shown on the right.

Data Manager - Schedule Section

New Event Panel

28 ECLIPSE Office User Course

22 July 2001

Figure 3-10 New Event panel

Selecting Summary vectors

ECLIPSE does not provide much useful output by default. However, a wealth
of output data is available to be selected by the user. Array type data is
specified using the RPT* keywords, but vector data, such as rate versus time,
are selected in the Summary section. Two panels are displayed when the
Summary section of the Data Manager is opened:

Chapter 3-36 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

• The main module contains the lists of keywords, as shown in Figure

3-11, which contains a series of tabbed dialog boxes allowing the user to
select from among the various Summary section keywords.
• The Keyword List panel, as shown in Figure 3-12, which contains a list
of the summary keywords that are currently included in the case.

Data Manager - Summary Section

29 ECLIPSE Office User Course

22 July 2001

Figure 3-11 Summary section main window

The main window consists of a series of nested, tabbed, dialog boxes that
organize the various Summary section keywords into a more logical order.
The main window contains two main sections or folders:

Mnemonics1

This folder contains several pages, most of which contain several fields. It
includes:

• Radio buttons to select the phases and options.

• A list of keywords that correspond to the radio buttons.
• Other lists like tracers, wells, LGRs, etc., depending on the keywords
and options.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-37

Understanding Data Entry

• Sliders to select cell numbers and, if applicable, components.

• A description of the selected keyword.

The basic pages are:

General
This tab lists the general summary keywords, including performance keywords
(e.g. TCPU, NEWTONS, RUNSUM, etc.).

Blocks
This tab lists time dependent keywords that are relevant to grid blocks,
including fluid saturations and pressures (e.g. BOSAT, BPR, etc.)

Completion
This tab lists keywords that are available for completion level information
such as completion flow rates (e.g. COFR, COPT, etc.).

Field
This tab lists keywords that are available for field level information such as
field production and injection rates and pressures (e.g. FOPR, FPR, etc.)

Group
This tab lists keywords that are available for group level information such as
group production and injection rates and pressures (e.g. GOPR, GPR, etc.).

Well
This tab lists keywords that are available for well level information such as
well production and injection rates and pressures (e.g. WOPR, WPR, etc.)

Mnemonics2

This folder generally contains the same features and functions as

Mnemonics1, except that it contains pages which might not be displayed,
depending on the dataset.

Aquifer
List of Aquifer related keywords. If there are no aquifer options, this page will
not be displayed.
Region
List of Region related keywords.

Chapter 3-38 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding Data Entry

Region flow
List of Inter-region flow keywords. If there are no region flows, this page will
not be displayed.

LBlock
List of LGR Block keywords. If there are no LGRs, this page will not be
displayed.

NOTE: The values shown on the Cell Selection slider correspond to the
current LGR domain rather than the global domain.

LCompletion
List of LGR Completion keywords. If there are no LGRs, this page will not be
displayed.

NOTE: The values shown on the Cell Selection slider bar and Well List
correspond to the current LGR domain rather than the global
domain.

LWell
List of LGR Well keywords. If there are no LGRs this page will not be
displayed.

NOTE: The well list corresponds to the LGR names.

Segment
List of Segment keywords available with the Multi-Segment Well option. If
the MSW option is not used in the dataset this page will not be displayed.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 3-39

Understanding Data Entry

Data Manager - Summary Section

Selected List Panel

30 ECLIPSE Office User Course

22 July 2001

Figure 3-12 Selected List panel

Selected List Panel

This panel, shown in Figure 3-12, contains a list of the Summary section
keywords currently selected for this case. It include any SUMMARY keywords
read from the ECLIPSE Office Summary section include file. You can add
or remove keywords as required. The list can be cleared and a new list added
instead.

A counter is set at the top of the panel containing the number of selected
vectors in the list. Also, a filter is provided so that users can easily sort
through the list to find keywords of interest. The filter is initially set to “*” so
that all the selected keywords are shown.

Chapter 3-40 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Chapter 4 Using Correlations

Overview

ECLIPSE Office offers a wide range of PVT and SCAL correlations that can
be used to automatically generate properties for the simulation study when
actual PVT and SCAL data is not available.

This chapter describes the user interfaces for the PVT and SCAL correlations
panels and provides background and usability information for many of the
correlations availble in ECLIPSE Office.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 4-1

Using Correlations

Data Manager - PVT Section

Correlations Panel

34 ECLIPSE Office User Course

10 August, 2000

Figure 4-1 PVT Correlations panel

PVT Correlations Panel

The PVT Correlations panel allows the user to generate a set of PVT table
keywords using correlations. A variety of correlations are available and the
user is able to control which keywords are generated.

Command Bar menu options

File menu
UPDATE
Inserts the generated keywords into the project. It also allows you to create
new keywords if they do not exist in the project. You can also substitute
existing keywords with the new ones generated with correlations.

CLOSE
Closes and exits the PVT Correlations panel.

Chapter 4-2 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using Correlations

Edit menu
STD. CONDS.
Allows you to enter standard temperature and pressure values.

ROCK PROPS.
Displays the panel for rock properties calculations.

OIL PROPS
Displays the panel for oil properties correlations.

WATER PROPS
Displays the panel for oil properties correlations.

GAS PROPS
Displays a panel for gas properties correlations. The actual panel that is
displayed depends on the method selected for determining the critical
properties of the gas.

Explicit Crit. Props…

Displays the panel for gas correlations in which you can manually enter the
critical properties.
Crit. Props from Comp…
Displays the panel for gas correlations where critical properties are calculated
from the composition of the gas mixture.

NOTE: Only the components shown in the table are supported by the
correlations. It is not possible to add additional components.

Crit. Props from Corr…

Displays the panel for gas correlations where critical properties are calculated
by means of correlations.

View menu
PLOT
Plots all available tables.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 4-3

Using Correlations

OIL TABLE
Displays all calculated oil parameters in a tabular form.

GAS TABLE
Displays all calculated gas parameters in a tabular form.

WATER TABLE
Displays all calculated water parameters in a tabular form.

The rest of the menu items are a list of the possible keywords that have been
generated in the current session. Selecting any item displays the corresponding
keyword.

Help menu
HELP
Displays the help pages for the PVT Correlations panel.

Rock Properties fields

Correlation type
Four correlation methods are provided:
• Newman
Correlations are provided for consolidated and unconsolidated sandstone and
consolidated limestone.
• Hall
Correlations are provided for consolidated sandstone and limestone.
• Knaap
Correlations are provided for consolidated sandstone and limestone.
• Explicit
This option generates the ROCK keyword using user-supplied values for rock
reference pressure and compressibility. This is equivalent to manually
entering the ROCK keyword in the PVT Keyword Editor panel.

Chapter 4-4 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using Correlations

Procedure: Using Rock Correlations

1. In the PVT section Correlations panel, select Edit>Rock Props…
2. Select the desired correlation from the Correlation type drop down list.
3. Select the appropriate Rock Type from the drop down list.
4. The remainder of the fields are optional, and depending on the correlation
used. Non-applicable fields are greyed out and cannot be edited. The rock
reference pressure is the pressure at which the porosity value is measured.
5. Press the Apply button.
6. View the resulting ROCK keyword by selecting View>ROCK.
7. Write the keyword to the PVT keyword section by selecting File>Update. Note
that this does not have to be done until you are finished with all correlations.
8. Select File>Close to return to the PVT section main window.

Oil Properties fields

Input Rs or Pb
Choose which parameter will be explicitly provided to the calculation.
Rs/Pb Correlation
The following methods are available for bubble point pressure calculations:
• Standing
The following ranges are used to develop this method:
Parameter Units Minimum Maximum
Bubble point pressure psia 130 7000
Reservoir Temperature Fahrenheit 100 258
Stock-tank oil gravity API 16.5 63.8
Solution GOR scf/STB 20 1425
Gas gravity air=1.0 0.59 0.95

Table 4-1 Data parameters and range for Standing bubble point
correlation

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 4-5

Using Correlations

• Lasater
The following ranges are used to develop this method:
Parameter Units Minimum Maximum
Bubble point pressure psia 48 5780
Reservoir Temperature Fahrenheit 82 272
Stock-tank oil gravity API 17.9 51.1
Solution GOR scf/STB 3 2.905
gas gravity air=1.0 0.574 1.223

Table 4-2 Data parameters and range for Lasater bubble point correlation

• Vasquez
The following ranges are used to develop this method:
Parameter Units Minimum Maximum
Bubble point pressure psia 50 5250
Reservoir Temperature Fahrenheit 70 295
Stock-tank oil gravity API 16.0 58.0
Solution GOR scf/STB 20 2070
gas gravity air=1.0 0.56 1.18

Table 4-3 Data parameters and range for Vasquez bubble point correlation

• GlasO
The following ranges are used to develop this method:
Parameter Units Minimum Maximum
Bubble point pressure psia 150 7127
Reservoir Temperature Fahrenheit 80 260
Stock-tank oil gravity API 28.1 47.7
Solution GOR scf/STB 90 2637
gas gravity air=1.0 0.72 1.269

Table 4-4 Data parameters and ranges for GlasO bubble point correlation

• GlasO (Volatile)
• Marhoun
• Petrosky and Farshad (1993)

Chapter 4-6 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using Correlations

GOR calculations
The following methods are available for GOR calculations:
• Standing
• Lasater
• Vasquez & Beggs
• GlasO
• Marhoun
• Petrosky and Farshad (1993)

Oil viscosity correlations

The following methods are available for Viscosity calculations:
• Beggs
• Standing
• Khan
• GlasO
• Ng and Egbogah
FVF correlation
The following methods are available for FVF calculations:
• Standing
• Vasquez and Beggs
• GlasO
• Petrosky

Undersaturated oil compress. correlation

The following methods are available for compressibility calculations
(undersaturated oil only):
• Vasquez
• Petrosky
Saturated oil compress. correlation
McCain’s correlation is currently the only method available for the
compressibility calculation for saturated oil, so this item is greyed out.

Pressure nodes
Defines the length of the table to be produced.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 4-7

Using Correlations

Minimum/Maximum pressure
Defines the pressure range. The interpolation is carried out between the
defined minimum and maximum pressure values.

Reference pressure
Defines the pressure for which the oil parameters will be calculated and
displayed on the panel.
Total GOR (Rs)
Defines the gas-oil ratio.

NOTE: This field is greyed out if bubble point (Pb) is selected as the input
variable.

Bubble point (Pb)

Defines the bubble point pressure.

NOTE: This field is greyed out if the total GOR (Rs) is selected as the input
variable.

Temperature
Defines the reservoir temperature.

Density
Defines the density of the oil.
Corrected gas gravity
This value can be entered manually or it can be calculated in the gas
correlation section.

Viscosity
The calculated viscosity for the reference pressure is displayed in this field.

Compressibility
The calculated compressibility for the reference pressure is displayed in this
field.

Chapter 4-8 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using Correlations

FVF
The calculated formation volume factor for the reference pressure is displayed
here.

Calculated gradient
The calculated gradient is displayed here.
Fraction of H2S,CO2,N2
Defines the mole fractions of the non-hydrocarbon components

NOTE: These fields are only active if GLASO is the selected correlation
method.

Procedure: Using Oil Correlations

1. In the PVT section Correlations panel, select Edit>Oil Props…
2. Select whether to input Rs or Pb from the drop down list.
3. Select the desired correlations from the appropriate drop down lists.
4. The remainder of the fields are optional, and depending on the correlations
used. Non-applicable fields are greyed out and cannot be edited. The
reference pressure is the pressure at which the correlation values are
reported.
5. Press the Apply button.
6. View the resulting correlation table by selecting View>Oil Table….
7. Write the keyword to the PVT keyword section by selecting File>Update. Note
that this does not have to be done until you are finished with all correlations.
8. Select File>Close to return to the PVT section main window.

Water properties fields

Viscosity correlation
The following methods are available for water viscosity calculations:
• Meehan
• Van Wingen
Compressibility correlation
The following methods are available for water compressibility correlations:

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 4-9

Using Correlations

• Meehan
• Row and Chou

Pressure nodes
Defines the length of the table to be produced.
Minimum/Maximum pressure
Defines the pressure range. The interpolation is carried out between the
defined minimum and maximum pressure values.

Salinity
Defines the salinity of water.

Bubble point pressure

Defines the bubble point pressure of water.
Temperature
Defines the reservoir temperature.

Reference pressure
This is the pressure for which the water parameters will be calculated and
displayed on the panel.
Viscosibility
The calculated viscosibility of water at the reference pressure.

Viscosity
The calculated viscosity at the reference pressure is displayed in this field.
Compressibility
The calculated water compressibility at the reference pressure is displayed in
this field.

FVF
The calculated formation volume factor for the reference pressure is displayed
here.
Reservoir density
The calculated water density for the reference pressure in reservoir.

Calculated gradient
The calculated gradient is displayed here.

Chapter 4-10 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using Correlations

Surface density
The calculated water density on the surface.

Procedure: Using Water Correlations

1. In the PVT section Correlations panel, select Edit>Water Props…
2. Select the Viscosity correlation from the drop down list.
3. Select the Compressibility correlation from the drop down list.
4. Enter values for all fields on the left side of the panel. The reference pressure
is the pressure at which values are reported and is the value used for the PVTW
keyword.
5. Press the Apply button.
6. View the resulting correlation table by selecting View>Water Table….
7. Write the keyword to the PVT keyword section by selecting File>Update. Note
that this does not have to be done until you are finished with all correlations.
8. Select File>Close to return to the PVT section main window.

Gas properties fields

Explicit critical properties

The following methods can be used if the critical properties are known.
Z factor correlation
The following methods are available
• Hall-Yarborough
• Dranchuk
Gas viscosity correlation
The following methods are available:
• Lee
• Carr

Pressure nodes
Defines the length of the table to be produced.

Minimum/Maximum pressure
Defines the pressure range. The interpolation is carried out between the
defined minimum and maximum pressure values.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 4-11

Using Correlations

Temperature
Defines the reservoir temperature (required).

Reference pressure
This is the pressure for which the gas parameters will be calculated and
displayed on the panel.
Calculated gradient
The calculated gradient of gas.
Vaporized oil concentration
Enter the vaporized oil concentration in this field if applicable.

Dew point pressure

Enter the dew point pressure in this field if applicable.
Fraction H2S,CO2,N2
The default is 0. These values are used in the following correlation methods:
• Dranchuk Z factor correlation (H2S and CO2 only).
• Carr viscosity correlation
Gas gravity
Enter the gas gravity in this field (required).

Critical temperature and pressure

Enter critical temperature and pressure here (required)
Condensate gas ratio and condensate density
You can enter a condensate gas ratio and condensate density if applicable.
Corrected gas gravity
The calculated gas gravity (including condensate correction) is displayed.

Surface density
The calculated water density at surface conditions is displayed.

Chapter 4-12 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using Correlations

Procedure: Using Gas Correlations (Explicit Critical Props.)

1. In the PVT section Correlations panel, select Edit>Gas Props…>Explicit
Crit Props...
2. Select the Z-factor correlation from the drop down list.
3. Select the Gas Viscosity correlation from the drop down list.
4. Enter values for the Gas Gravity, Critical Pressure and Critical
Temperature.
5. All other fields are optional or disabled. If you have information on condensate
it may be entered to calculate the condensate-corrected gas gravity. The
reference pressure is the pressure for which the correlation is displayed.
6. Press the Apply button.
7. View the resulting correlation table by selecting View>Gas Table….
8. Write the keyword to the PVT keyword section by selecting File>Update. Note
that this does not have to be done until you are finished with all correlations.
9. Select File>Close to return to the PVT section main window.

Critical properties from composition

The following methods can be used if the composition is known.
Z factor correlation
The following methods are available
• Hall-Yarborough
• Dranchuk
Gas viscosity correlation
The following methods are available:
• Lee
• Carr

Pressure nodes
Defines the length of the table to be produced.
Minimum/Maximum pressure
Defines the pressure range. The interpolation is carried out between the
defined minimum and maximum pressure values.

Temperature
Defines the reservoir temperature (required).

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 4-13

Using Correlations

Reference pressure
This is the pressure for which the gas parameters will be calculated and
displayed on the panel.

Calculated gradient
The calculated gradient of gas is displayed.
Gas gravity
You can enter gas gravity in this field.
Critical temperature and pressure
You can enter critical temperature and pressure here.

Vaporized oil concentration

Enter the vaporized oil concentration in this field if applicable.
Dew point pressure
Enter the dew point pressure in this field if applicable.
Composition Table
Enter the composition of the gas. Only the components shown can be used.
The user can edit the molecular weight, mole fraction, critical pressure and
critical temperature (required).

Tolerance for fraction sum

Enter the tolerance to which the composition mole fractions must sum to 1.0.
Condensate gas ratio and condensate density
You can enter a condensate gas ratio and condensate density if applicable.
Corrected gas gravity
The calculated gas gravity (including condensate correction) is displayed.

Surface density
The calculated water density at surface conditions is displayed.

Chapter 4-14 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using Correlations

Procedure: Using Gas Correlations (Crit Props from Comp)

1. In the PVT section Correlations panel, select Edit>Gas Props…>Crit Props
from Comp…
2. Select the Z-factor correlation from the drop down list.
3. Select the Gas Viscosity correlation from the drop down list.
4. Enter values for the mole fraction of each component (Fract) and make any
changes to the molecular weight (Mol Mass), critical temperature (Tcrit) and
critical pressure (Pcrit).
5. All other fields are optional or disabled. If you have information on condensate
it may be entered to calculate the condensate-corrected gas gravity. The
reference pressure is the pressure for which the correlation is displayed.
6. Press the Apply button.
7. View the resulting correlation table by selecting View>Gas Table….
8. Write the keyword to the PVT keyword section by selecting File>Update. Note
that this does not have to be done until you are finished with all correlations.
9. Select File>Close to return to the PVT section main window.

Critical properties from correlation

The following methods can be used if neither the composition nor critcal
properties are known.
Z factor correlation
The following methods are available
• Hall-Yarborough
• Dranchuk
Gas viscosity correlation
The following methods are available:
• Lee
• Carr

Critical properties correlation

The following methods are available:
• California gas
• Condensate
• Thomas et al.
• Sutton

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 4-15

Using Correlations

Pressure nodes
Defines the length of the table to be produced.

Minimum/Maximum pressure
Defines the pressure range. The interpolation is carried out between the
defined minimum and maximum pressure values.
Temperature
Defines the reservoir temperature (required).
Reference pressure
This is the pressure for which the gas parameters will be calculated and
displayed on the panel.

Calculated gradient
The calculated gradient of gas is displayed.
Vaporized oil concentration
Enter the vaporized oil concentration in this field if applicable.
Dew point pressure
Enter the dew point pressure in this field if applicable.
Fraction H2S,CO2,N2
The default is 0. These values are used in the following correlation methods:
• Dranchuk Z factor correlation (H2S and CO2 only).
• Carr viscosity correlation
Gas gravity
Enter the gas gravity in this field (required).

Critical temperature and pressure

Enter critical temperature and pressure here (required)

Condensate gas ratio and condensate density

You can enter a condensate gas ratio and condensate density if applicable.
Corrected gas gravity
The calculated gas gravity (including condensate correction) is displayed.

Surface density
The calculated water density at surface conditions is displayed.

Chapter 4-16 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using Correlations

Procedure: Using Gas Correlations (Crit Props from Corr)

1. In the PVT section Correlations panel, select Edit>Gas Props…>Crit Props
from Corr…
2. Select the Z-factor correlation from the drop down list.
3. Select the Gas Viscosity correlation from the drop down list.
4. Select the Critical properties correlation from the drop down list.
5. Enter the Gas Gravity.
6. All other fields are optional or disabled. If you have information on condensate
it may be entered to calculate the condensate-corrected gas gravity. The
reference pressure is the pressure for which the correlation is displayed.
7. Press the Apply button.
8. View the resulting correlation table by selecting View>Gas Table….
9. Write the keyword to the PVT keyword section by selecting File>Update. Note
that this does not have to be done until you are finished with all correlations.
10. Select File>Close to return to the PVT section main window.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 4-17

Using Correlations

SCAL Correlations Panel

The SCAL Correlations panel allows the user to generate a set of relative
permeability table keywords using the Corey correlation.

Data Manager - SCAL Section

Correlations Panel

37 ECLIPSE Office User Course

14 August, 2000

Figure 4-2 SCAL Correlations panel

Command Bar menu options

File menu
UPDATE
Inserts the generated keywords into the project. It also allows you to create
new keywords if they do not exist in the project. You can also substitute
existing keywords with the new ones generated with correlations.

CLOSE
Closes and exits the SCAL Correlations panel.

Chapter 4-18 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using Correlations

Edit menu
EDIT…
If the correlation data panel is not visible, this option restores the data panel so
the data can be edited.

View menu
PLOT
Plots all available tables.

The rest of the menu items are a list of the possible keywords that have been
generated in the current session. Alternate sets of keywords my generated by
selecting a different SCAL keyword family from the main panel. Selecting any
item displays the corresponding keyword.

Help menu
HELP
Displays the help pages for the SCAL Correlations panel.

Panel fields
Table Entries
Sets the desired number of rows per table (e.g. the number of lines of tabular
SCAL data generated for each keyword).
Corey Water
Sets the Corey exponent for water correlations. A larger exponent implies
greater curvature to the relative permeability curve.
Swmin
Sets the minimum water saturation value in the table. This value is the value
that should be assigned by ECLIPSE to initialize the oil zone above the
transition zone as well as the gas cap above the transition zone.

Swcr
Sets the critical water saturation in the table (e.g. the highest water saturation
where krw=0).

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 4-19

Using Correlations

Swi
Sets the initial water saturation in the oil and gas zones. This should generally
be the same value as Swcr and represents the lower bound in the Corey
equation.

Swmax
Sets the maximum water saturation. This value is the value that ECLIPSE will
assign to cells below the Oil-Water contact and represents the upper bound in
the Corey calculation.
Krw(Sorw)
Sets the water relative permeability (water oil system) at Sw=1-Sorw.

Krw(Swmax)
Sets the water relative permeability at maximum water saturation.

Corey Gas
Sets the Corey exponent for gas correlations. A larger exponent implies
greater curvature to the relative permeability curve.
Sgmin
Sets the minimum gas saturation value in the table. This value is the value that
should be assigned by ECLIPSE to initialize the oil and water zones below the
transition zone.

Sgcr
Sets the critical gas saturation (e.g. the highest gas saturation where krg=0).
Sgi
Sets the initial gas saturation in the oil and water zones. This should generally
be the same value as Sgcr and represents the lower bound in the Corey
equation.
Sgmax
Sets the maximum gas saturation. This is the value that ECLIPSE will assign
to cells above the Gas-Oil or Gas-Water contacts and represents the upper
bound in the Corey calculation.
Krg(Sorg)
Sets the gas relative permeability (oil gas system) at Sg=1-Sorg.

Krg(Sgmax)
Sets the gas relative permeability at maximum gas saturation.

Chapter 4-20 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using Correlations

Corey Oil/Water
Sets the Corey exponent for oil water correlations. A larger exponent implies
greater curvature to the relative permeability curve.

Corey Oil/Gas
Sets the Corey exponent for oil gas correlations. A larger exponent implies
greater curvature to the relative permeability curve.
Sorg
Sets the residual oil saturation in oil-gas system.

Sorw
Sets the residual oil saturation at water-oil system.

Kro(Swmin)
Sets the relative permeability to oil at minimum water saturation.
Kro(Sgmin)
Sets the relative permeability to oil at minimum gas saturation.

Procedure: Using SCAL Correlations

1. From the SCAL section main window, select Section>Correlations…
2. If there is more than one saturation table defined, select the table you want to
edit.
3. In the Water column, set the values for Swmin, Swcr and Swi. Swmin is the
connate water saturation and Swcr is the highest water saturation where
Krw=0. In addition, the vertical endpoints Krw(Sorw) and Krw(Swmax) and
the curvature (Corey Water) can be changed.
4. In the Gas column, set the values for Sgmin, Sgcr, and Sgi. Sgmin is the
minimum gas saturation and must be geater than or equal to 1-Swmin. Sgcr is
the highest gas saturation where Krg=0. In addition, the vertical endpoints
Krg(Sorg) and Krg(Sgmax) and the curvature (Corey Gas) can be changed.
5. In the Oil column, set the values for Sorg and Sorw. In addition, the vertical
endpoints Krow(Swmin) and Krog(Sgmin) and the curvature (Corey Oil/Gas
and Corey Oil/Water) can be changed
6. Press the Apply button.
7. View the resulting correlation table by selecting View and the table you wish to
view.
8. Write the keyword to the SCAL keyword section by selecting File>Update.
Note that this does not have to be done until you are finished with all
correlations.
9. Select File>Close to return to the SCAL section main window.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 4-21

Using Correlations

Chapter 4-22 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Chapter 5 Graphical Editing in the 2D
Viewer

Overview

This section gives a description of the use of the 2D Viewer found in the Data
Manager as an editor. The 2D Viewer is a window that contains an areal and
cross section view of the current grid. Initial and recurrent properties, regions
and other array-based data can be displayed as color-filled cells and contours,
and input maps as contours only.

Main Window

The 2D Viewer panel is divided into 2 main areas as shown in Figure 5-1. The
most important is the Active Graph. The Active Graph is contained in the
frame at the left hand side of the window and has a yellow border. Cell
picking and editing are only supported in this frame. When the panel initially
opens, the Active Graph contains an areal view of the grid along the top layer.
To the left of the Active Graph is the secondary graph. The secondary graph
contains a cross-sectional view of the grid along the cross-section line shown
in the areal view. The areal and cross section view can be swapped by double-
clicking on the right hand frame, thus allowing editing from the cross-
sectional view. The user interface is very similar to the 2D features of the
Results Viewer window, discussed in Chapter 7, except that this window
provides the ability to edit many arrays and post the edited data back to the
Data Manager.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 5-1

Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer

Data Manager - 2D Viewer

33 ECLIPSE Office User Course

31 July 2001

Figure 5-1 Data Manager 2D Viewer main window

Limitations
• Grid coarsening is not displayed.
• Cell picking and editing are only supported for LGR parent cells.

Commonly used menu items

File menu
SAVE TO KEYWORDS
Saves the current cell values back to the keywords. This option is only active
if the data was prepared using GridView>From Keywords in the Grid
section of the Data Manager or using GridView>Run Simulation in other
sections of the Data Manager.

Chapter 5-2 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer

PRINT PREVIEW...
This brings up a preview window showing approximately the final appearance
of the printer output using the current settings. Like the printing, it has two
modes, one where just the main workspace is printed, and one where the entire
window is printed.

PRINT SETUP... (PC ONLY)

This is the standard Windows setup dialog, allowing selection of the default
printer and also paper orientation.

PRINT LAYOUT...
This opens the Print Layout panel, which is used to specify various aspects of
the print output, especially the datestamp appearance. There are also controls
for aspect ratio and font settings.

PRINT TYPE
This opens the Printer Drivers panel, which allows selection of the format in
which to store the graphics image. The various output options are specified in
the ECL.CFG file.

PRINT
There is a submenu associated with this option:
Print Window
This option prints all the contents of the plot window, which is the main graph
plus all the information windows and small graphs.
Print Graph
This option prints only the contents of the main plot window.
Print Pictures
This option prints all pictures to the specified printer.

SAVE TO BITMAP...
This will save the graph to a bitmap (.BMP) file. This type of file is suitable
for reading into many packages, and conversion into other image types, but
since it is only a bitmap, can be quite coarse and therefore produces a lower
quality image than saving a plot via printing to a file in PostScript, CGM or
other format.

Graph…
Saves only the main graph.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 5-3

Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer

Whole Picture...
Saves both graphs to a single bitmap (.BMP) file. Note the discussion of the
bitmap format above.

Edit menu

COPY TO CLIPBOARD… (PC ONLY)

This option allows you to copy and paste graphs from ECLIPSE Office into
many other Windows programs. This option has two menu items:

Main Graph
This option copies only the main graph to the clipboard. The Main Graph is
the shown with a yellow border, always on the left in this case.
Whole Picture
This option copies both the Main Graph and the secondary graph to the
clipboard.

The editing functions in the 2D Viewer found in the Data Manager are more
limited than in the Results Viewer. In this case, they can only be used to move
the cross-section line.

EDIT POINT
Move a point around the current graph area, unconstrained in the X-Y plane.
On mouse down (when you press the mouse button) the nearest point on the
active plot will be selected. It will be moved to the position of mouse up
(where the mouse is released). To cancel the edit drag the mouse outside of the
plot area before releasing the button.

X EDIT
Move a point around the current graph area in the X direction only. If data is
monotonic then it cannot be edited to a point that would remove the
monotonicity.

Y EDIT
Move a point around the current graph area in the Y direction only.

Chapter 5-4 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer

View menu
OPTIONS…
Displays the Edit View Options panel allowing the display settings to be
altered. The first page is similar to that shown on the left side of Figure 5-2.

Checkboxes on the panel allow the display of the grid, cell centers, wells and
text labels to be toggled. The K-Slice slider bar allows the simulation layers to
be scrolled through in the areal view.

An option is available to display the cross section as an arbitrary slice defined

by the cross section line on the areal view, or as a slice defined by a constant I
or J value. If the second option is chosen then the Show Cross Section Cells
option fills in black on the areal view those cells which are displayed on the
cross section view.

2D Viewer - Edit View Panel

34 ECLIPSE Office User Course

31 July 2001

Figure 5-2 Edit View Options panel

The second page (as shown in the right side of Figure 5-2) controls the
property shown and color fill of cells.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 5-5

Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer

Except in the Initialisation section only initial properties are available in the
2D Viewer in the Data Manager. An option is available to display the
properties as either color-filled cells or contours. If the contour option is
chosen, then a further choice is available to display the contours as color-
filled, lines only, or both.

NOTE: Contours are only valid for the areal grid. When the Contour option
is selected, the Cross Section display is not contoured.

The Edit Properties button opens the Selected Cells panel where the
currently selected cell or cells can be edited. Options exist to allow the edits to
be applied to the current layer only, or layers above and below. The Selected
Cells panel is shown in Figure 5-3.

2D Viewer – Selected Cells Panel

35 ECLIPSE Office User Course

31 July 2001

Figure 5-3 Selected Cells panel

The Create Properties button displays the more robust Simulation Property
Editor panel that allows new properties to be added by manipulating existing

Chapter 5-6 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer

properties by operation or by Calculator script. This panel is identical to that

in the 3D Viewer, except that the 3D Selected Cells option has no effect (all
operation are performed on the entire grid unless controlled via a Calculator
script or Advanced Expression. The Simulation Property Editor panel is
shown in Figure 5-4.

2D Viewer – Simulation Property

Editor Panel

36 ECLIPSE Office User Course

31 July 2001

Figure 5-4 Simulation Property Editor panel

TIP: Certain initial properties such as PORO and PERMX may give the
message “Initial property xxxx is not an editable property – try
editing a copy” in the Status bar area of the Simulation Property
Editor panel. If you are trying to edit one of these properties, first
delete the property using the Delete key on this panel, then recreate
it by checking the New Property box and entering the expression or
Calculator script name.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 5-7

Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer

HIGHLIGHT ACTIVE
If this option is checked, the currently selected object will be displayed with
visible handles at the location of the nodes of the object. This is useful for
editing boundaries and faults, as only nodes can be moved.

REFRESH X-SECTION
Forces a regeneration of the cross section display.

ZOOM IN
Zooms in one step into the center of the plot area. The size of the zoom
depends on the settings in the Zoom Preferences panel. Plots may also be
zoomed and panned using the zoom box on the navigation graph.

ZOOM OUT
Unzoom the complete plot area into a rectangular portion of the plot. The
zoom goes out one step for each time the button is pressed, or the menu item
selected, the size of the step being adjustable through the Zoom Preferences
panel.

RUBBERBAND ZOOM IN
Zoom into the current plot using a dragged box. To use this, after selecting the
menu option, place the cursor (which will change into a magnifying glass
symbol) over the grid. Click on one corner of your desired zoomed area, and
drag the mouse with the button held down to the opposite corner of the area.

UNZOOM COMPLETELY
Completely unzoom the plot. This displays the complete data range on the
main graph.

ZOOM PREFERENCES…
Opens a panel where zoom settings such as scope and step size can be set.

INVERT
Inverts the color scheme of the graph window so that, for example, dark
foreground graph colors on a light background become light on a dark
background.

Chapter 5-8 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer

Settings menu
CROSS SECTION…
Displays a panel that allows you to control the location of the cross-section
line either by specifying end points or by snapping to a well. This item is only
active when the areal display is the main display (e.g. areal display on the left).

TIP: It is generally easier to move the cross-section graphically. Use the

Edit>Edit Point, Edit>X Edit and Edit>Y Edit menu items to move
the ends pf the corss-section line. The ends are moved by clicking on
the small boxes on each end of the line.

Grid menu
PICK
Enters cell selection mode. If the Show Cell Probe option is also selected then
the Cell Probe panel will be displayed. This panel allows a list of initial and
recurrent properties to be selected and observed as different cells are selected
by clicking on them with the mouse. Options are available to inspect all layers
of the simulation grid and all timesteps of a recurrent property.

Individual cells can be selected using the left mouse button. To select more
than one cell hold down the Shift button while picking. In this mode the right
mouse button will de-select cells. The last cell selected will have its cell ID
and i, j, k value displayed in fields on the panel, and in the status bar at the
bottom left of the window. If the Cell Probe panel is visible then the selected
properties of the last cell selected are displayed in the window at the bottom of
the panel. If not then the value of the current cell selected is displayed in the
status bar.

MEASURE
This selects the Measure mode in which the x, y, slope, and distance between
the drag start position and the current mouse position are reported.

SHOW CELL PROBE

If this option is checked then selecting Pick will display the Cell Probe panel.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 5-9

Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer

SELECT CELLS…
Rectangle
Digitise
Multiple cells may be selected by dragging out a rectangle over an area of the
grid or by digitizing a boundary (finishing with a double-click or pressing
Enter). The current selection is first cleared then cells selected if their centers
lie within the area indicated.

Options menu
ADD/REMOVE COMPONENTS...
This invokes the Graph Configuration panel. From this, you can add or
remove components, such as toolbars and small plots from the window.

MAIN TITLE SETTINGS…

Opens a panel where the properties of the title of the main or active graph can
be changed, such as fonts and colors.

SMALL TITLE SETTINGS…

Opens a panel where the properties of the title of the small graphs (if present)
can be changed, such as fonts and colors.

MODIFY GRAPH TITLE...

This brings up a simple panel in which you can edit the title of the main graph
active at the time.

GRAPH LEGEND STYLE...

This opens the Graph Legend Configuration panel, which can be used to
control the appearance of the legend at the top of the active graph, or even
whether it is present.

PLOT STYLE SETTINGS...

This invokes the Data Style panel for the currently active plot. Various style
settings for the appearance of the data (line, marker style and color) are
modified through this panel.

X/Y AXIS SETTINGS...

This invokes the Axis Style panel for the axis displaying the current active
data, either X or Y, depending on menu option chosen. The many axis style
attributes are modified from this panel.

Chapter 5-10 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer

GRID SETTINGS...
The Grid Properties panel can be opened using this menu option. The grid
has a small number of settings, mostly related to the visibility of the grid itself,
and the current point, if defined.

Help menu

HELP

Displays help pages for the 2D Viewer section.

Procedure: Using the 2D Viewer to edit selected array data

1. First, in the appropriate Keyword Editor panel, create the array to be edited
by inserting the keyword and intializing the arry to some dummy value. See the
proceudres Inserting a keyword on page 3-26 and Using the Box Editor to
create V2 = 0.1*V1 on page 3-32.
2. From the main section window, select GridView>Run Simulation (use From
Keywords in the Grid section).
3. Select GridView>2D… (wait until it becomes active).
4. In the 2D Viewer panel, select View>Options…
5. Press the Colour Fill tab and select the property for editing from the Initial
Properties list.
6. In the 2D Viewer window, use the 2D>Pick or 2D>Select cells… options to
select a cell or cells to edit.
7. In the Edit View Options panel, press the Edit Properties button.
8. Edit the property of the selected cells as needed in the Selected Cells panel.
9. Press OK to perfom the edit and close the panel.
10. From the main 2D Viewer window, select File>Save to Keywords to update
keywords with the new edits.
11. Select File>Close to close the 2D Viewer window.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 5-11

Graphical Editing in the 2D Viewer

Chapter 5-12 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Chapter 6 Controlling Runs

Overview

The Run Manager acts as an interface to the simulator. The module provides
an interactive method of setting up a simulation run, monitoring and
controlling its progress, and examining the results.

The Run Manager is a set of panels that allow you to interact with the
simulator and display graphical results.

The Run Manager also provides a limited data validation facility. While this
does not ensure a successful simulation run, it does ensure that all basic files
are available.

When multiple realizations are being run, a set of runs is defined from a single
dataset. Submission may start runs on a number of different machines. These
runs may be launched using different environments; for example, PVM.

Communication between the module and the simulator is performed using

PVM or by reading result files produced during the run. This allows runs to be
monitored in progress. Line plots and solutions can be displayed. Both the 2D
and 3D solution plots are available.

Runs can also be controlled using the Run Manager. It is possible in many
cases to KILL, STOP, and CONTINUE runs.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 6-1

Controlling Runs

Run Manager
• Limited data validation • Control run
– Are all basic input sections – Stop process
available? – Kill process
• Submit run • View results
– PVM or direct submission – Line and distribution plots
• Launch Office on the PC and – Performance plots
start Eclipse on a Unix
machine from within Office! • Analyse results
– Multiple realisations – Calculate sensitivities
• Monitor run – Change input data manually
– Runtime visualisation (2D & – Use gradients and optimise
3D) automatically (SimOpt)

48 ECLIPSE Office User Course

16 August, 2000

Figure 6-1 Run Manager features

Run Manager Main Window

The Run Manager module is associated with the currently selected case.
Therefore it is possible to open several Run Manager modules and control
multiple cases at the same time.

The main window of the Run Manager has a set of fields to be defined before
submitting the run, including the environment, and whether to run the
simulator on a local or remote machine.

Chapter 6-2 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Controlling Runs

Run Manager

49 ECLIPSE Office User Course

16 August, 2000

Figure 6-2 Run Manager main window

Panel Fields

Case Name
Displays the case associated with this instance of the Run Manager. This field
is not editable.
Host Name
Displays the host name of the machine where ECLIPSE will be run. This field
is not editable, but the value can be changed as discussed later in this chapter.

Executable
Displays the executable or macro to be used to for the run. This field is not
editable, but the value can be changed as discussed later in this chapter.

Parallel Options
Displays options set for parallel runs. This field is blank unless the Parallel
option is set in the Case Definition section of the Data Manager.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 6-3

Controlling Runs

Number of Simulations
Displays the number of simulations to be run. This is set to one unless the
Multiple Sensitivities option is used. This field is not editable.

Job Streams
This is the number of job streams to be used for the simulation runs. It must
not exceed the number of runs. See the discussion of Multiple Sensitivities in
the previous chapter for details on the use of job streams. This field is not
editable.
Job Streams to be added
The number of job streams to be added if multiple runs are required. The
default is 1.
Environment
This states the environment to be used for the runs. The various environment
settings are discussed below. For the purposes of this course we will use
NON-PVM LOCAL.
Polling Time
This field allows the user to change the polling time. The polling time is the
time increment used by ECLIPSE Office to check on the current status of the
simulations.
Maximum CPU Time
This field displays the current value for maximum CPU time set in the
macros. This field is not editable.

Maximum Elapsed Time

This field displays the current value for maximum Elapsed time set in the
macros. This field is not editable.

Run time monitoring

Tick the Summary box if you require monitoring of summary vectors. Tick the
Solution box if you require monitoring of solutions in either the 2D or 3D
Viewer.
Run Progress %
Gives the progress of the run in %. This is a simple calculation based only
upon the number of report steps in the run.

Chapter 6-4 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Controlling Runs

NOTE: If multiple runs have been submitted this field does not appear.
Instead you can monitor the progress of each run using the
Monitor>Runs menu item.

Input File Type/Format

These radiobuttons allow the user to set the file type and format of any input
files used in the simulation. These files are generally limited to the GRID file
and RESTART files.

TIP: Unformatted files are ASCII text files, while Formatted files are
binary files. Formatted files are usually much smaller and are
completely cross-platform compatible.

Output File Type/Format

These radiobuttons allow the user to set the file type and format of any output
(except the print file) files requested in the simulation. These files include the
GRID, INIT and RESTART files.

TIP: Use multiple files if you plan to use the Run Monitoring features of
the Run Manager.

Save File Type/Format

These radiobuttons allow the user to set the file type and format of the SAVE
file. The SAVE file is an alternate form of a RESTART file that does require
re-initialization of the grid.

Memory Required
This field allows the user to specify the amount of memory to be allocated.
Manual memory allocation is not necessary in most cases with the Black Oil
model, but is sometimes required for larger Compositional runs. Leave this set
to the default of zero unless an error is reported.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 6-5

Controlling Runs

Character Memory Required

This field allows the user to specify the amount of character memory to be
allocated. Character memory is the memory used to primarily to store the
vectors requested in the summary section. If a very large number of summary
vectors are requested in then an error may be reported. Leave this set to the
default of zero unless an error is reported.
Turn Off Simulation
Tick this box to perform a datacheck/validation run only. The simulator will
initialize the grid and then check the SCHEDULE keywords for syntax and
missing data.

Reset
This button restore the default Run Manager settings.

Command Bar menu options

File menu
WRITE DATA
Creates a new DATA file with the current settings for the case. The DATA file
is the main file submitted to ECLIPSE and contains the RUNSPEC data and
the paths and filenames of all the INCLUDE files.

CLOSE
Closes and exits the Run Manager.

Options menu
SELECT SUMMARY VECTORS…
Enables you to select the summary vectors before submitting the run. Only
selected vectors are available for monitoring.

RUN ENVIRONMENT…
Enables you to select the required settings before submitting, the host
machines or simulator version, for example. Different panels are displayed
depending on the Run Environment selected and the number of runs required.

PARALLEL OPTIONS…
Enables you to various options for parallel runs. This item is greyed out unless
the Parallel option is selected in the Case Definition section of the Data
Manager.

Chapter 6-6 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Controlling Runs

LICENSES…
This item is always greyed out in the current version.

Submit menu
RUNS
Executes the runs.

Monitor menu

All monitor menu options are greyed out at the beginning of the run. They
become active once ECLIPSE Office detects that the proper results files are
available.

SUMMARY VECTORS…
Opens a data line plot for the selected summary vectors. This option is
available as soon as the first summary report step is available (the first time
step in the PVM case). You can monitor the plotted vectors while the runs are
in progress at each report/time step.

Line Plots are discussed in more detail in CHAPTER!

NOTE: The Run Time Monitoring Summary check box must be checked in
order to monitor summary vectors. Summary vectors can be selected
for monitoring before the run is started using the Options>Select
Summary Vectors menu item.

2D VIEWER…
Opens the 2D Viewer for monitoring solution data. This option is available as
soon as the grid data is available. Solution data is displayed on the grid as
soon as the first restart report is available. You can monitor the solution data
at each report step.

The 2D Viewer is discussed in more detail in Chapter 4.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 6-7

Controlling Runs

NOTE: The Run Time Monitoring Solutions check box must be ticked for
the 2D and 3D Viewer options to be available.

3D VIEWER…
Opens the 3D Viewer for viewing solution data. This option is available as
soon as the grid data is available. Solution data is displayed on the grid as
soon as the first restart report is available. You can monitor the solution data
at each report step.

The 3D Viewer is discussed in more detail in Chapter 6.

NOTE: The 3D Viewer option is only available if a FloViz license is

available.

KILL ALL SIMULATIONS…

A panel is displayed with a list of case names. Tick the check box to kill all
the runs in the case. This option is available as soon as the run starts.

CONTROL SIMULATIONS…
Enables you to control the individual runs, using commands such as END,
HOLD, CONTINUE. The menu is available as soon as the run begins.

RUNS PROGRESS…
Displays a panel showing the progress of the runs in multiple run cases. This
item is greyed out unless the case contains multiple runs.

Help menu
ON MENUS…
Displays help on menubar options.

ON RUN MODULE…
Displays help on Run Manager window options.

ON PVM…
Displays help pages on PVM.

Chapter 6-8 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Controlling Runs

CONF THE SIMULATOR…

Gives help on how to configure the simulator and host machines related
issues.

Configuring a Simulator Run

The Run Manager provides a series of panels that allow the user to define:

• The environment in which the simulation will be run

• How the simulator is to be invoked
• On which platform (local or remote) the simulation is to be run.

There are five environments in which a simulator may be run:

• Non-PVM Local
• Non-PVM Remote
• External Job
• LSF
• PVM

NON-PVM LOCAL
This allows the simulator to be run on the local host without using PVM. This
is the default method for running on the local machine and support Run Time
Monitoring.

The NON-PVM LOCAL mode simply executes the supplied simulator (or
batch file/macro) name, with the optionally supplied simulation parameters,
on the local host. The Run Environment panel for the NON-PVM LOCAL
case looks like Figure 6-3.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 6-9

Controlling Runs

Run Manager – Non-PVM Local

• Runs on local machine only
• Default mode
• Allows run time monitoring

39 ECLIPSE Office User Course

31 July 2001

Figure 6-3 The NON-PVM LOCAL Run Environment panel

Procedure: Running a case using Non-PVM Local mode

1. Open a project and import a dataset if data is not already present
2. Open the Run Manager by pressing the Run button on the ECLIPSE Office
main display.
3. Select NON-PVM LOCAL as the Run Environment on the main window of the
Run Manager.
4. Select Options>Run Environment. Select the desired executable, simulator
parameters and version.
5. Press the OK button to close the Run Environment window.
6. Select Submit>Runs.

NON-PVM REMOTE
This option allows the simulator to be run on a remote host without using
PVM. Run-time monitoring is not available with this environment.

Chapter 6-10 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Controlling Runs

NON-PVM REMOTE mode executes the supplied simulator name (which must
be a macro) with the supplied parameters, but it does so on the remote host
specified. To do this, the system has to copy all relevant files for the
simulation to the remote machine (using rcp), launch the simulator and copy
the results files back to the local host for loading into the application.

The Run Environment panel for the NON-PVM REMOTE case looks like
Figure 6-4.

In this panel it is important to define the remote host correctly. In some cases
this will simply be the hostname (e.g. mymachine) while in other cases you
may have to define the fully qualified hostnamer (e.g.
mymachine.subnet.mydomain.com). Also, the host temporary path
must be defined. This is where the files will be copied to on the remote
machine, and where the simulator output will be written. This path should be
given relative to the remote machine.

Run Manager – Non-PVM Remote

• Allows simulator to run on
any remote host, UNIX or
PC.
• Requires rsh and rcp
communications between
the machines
• Run time monitoring is not
available.

40 ECLIPSE Office User Course

31 July 2001

Figure 6-4 Run Environment panel for NON-PVM REMOTE

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 6-11

Controlling Runs

Procedure: Running a case using Non-PVM Remote mode

1. Open a project and import a dataset if data is not already present
2. Open the Run Manager by pressing the Run button on the ECLIPSE Office
main display.
3. Select NON-PVM REMOTE as the Run Environment on the main window of
the Run Manager.
4. Select Options>Run Environment. Enter the hostname of the machine to be
used for the run.
5. Enter the desired executable (path on remote machine), simulator parameters
and version.
6. Press the OK button to close the Run Environment window.
7. Select Submit>Runs.

NOTE: Non-PVM Remote requires rsh and rcp access to the remote
machine. The user must have the same username and password on
both machines. Also, the SUFFIX and CASE settings in the
ECLIPSE configuration file (ECL.CFG) must be the same on both
machines.

PVM
PVM stands for Parallel Virtual Machine. PVM is a 3rd-party application
developed by Oak Ridge National Laboratory for controlling multi-computer
(distributed) applications. This is the most flexible way to run the simulator
and it provides direct communication between the application and the
simulator. With PVM you can graphically monitor runs on remote machines.
You also have better contol over the run, including the ability to HOLD and
CONTINUE a run.

Setup of the PVM method is discussed in Appendix D of the ECLIPSE

Office User Guide.

In order to use the PVM Run Environment, PVM must be running before
ECLIPSE Office is started. Once PVM is setup on all the required hosts, start
PVM from the GeoQuest launcher panel or by using the macro $pvm.bat.

Chapter 6-12 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Controlling Runs

Wait for the DOS window to display the pvm> prompt before starting
ECLIPSE Office.

Before submitting the run you must first set the Run Environment for the
remote machine in the Run Environment panel, as shown in Figure 6-5.

Run Manager – PVM

• Allows simulator to run on
any remote host, UNIX or
PC.
• Requires PVM
communications between
the machines
• Run time monitoring is
available.

41 ECLIPSE Office User Course

31 July 2001

Figure 6-5 PVM Run Environment panel

Procedure: Running a case using PVM mode

1. Add the list of host machines to the pvmhost.2001a (the extension is the
version of PVM you are using).
2. Start PVM on the machine running ECLIPSE Office by pressing the PVM
button on the GeoQuest Launcher for PC or by typing @pvm from a UNIX
prompt.
3. Start ECLIPSE Office using one of the methods given in Chapter 1.
4. Open the desired ECLIPSE Office project and select the desired case in the
Case Manager.
5. Open the Run Manager by pressing the Run button on the ECLIPSE Office
main display.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 6-13

Controlling Runs

Procedure: Running a case using PVM mode

6. Select PVM as the Run Environment on the main window of the Run
Manager.
7. Select Options>Run Environment. Select the hostname of the machine to be
used for the run. If the desired host is not listed, check pvmhost.2001a file to
make sure it is listed. If so, check the PVM setup on the remote machine.
8. Enter the desired executable (should be found along the path given in the
pvmhost.2001a file) and the host temporary path.
9. Press the OK button to close the Run Environment window.
10. Select Submit>Runs.

NOTE: The proper architecture and version of the simulator software and
PVM must be installed and operating properly on each host
machine. Also, the SUFFIX and CASE settings in the ECLIPSE
configuration file (ECL.CFG) must be the same on all machines.

WARNING: Always shut down PVM (after closing ECLIPSE Office) by

entering halt at the pvm> prompt in the terminal
window. On the PC, do not close the PVM window while
PVM is running. Failure to properly close PVM can result
in ECLIPSE Office and/or ECLIPSE being very slow to
start or giving unexpected errors. If this occurs, delete the
file named pvmd.username, where “username” is your
username. This file can be found in your home directory
(\ecl\home on the PC).

EXTERNAL JOB
The EXTERNAL JOB environment allows the user to specify custom scripts
catered to the specific needs of the computing environment. The user-supplied
script must handle all aspects of the submission, including copying of the
input files (if necessary), and starting the simulator. ECLIPSE Office will call
the specified script and append the –data and filename arguments to the call.

Chapter 6-14 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Controlling Runs

The user can use these arguments, as well as others they wish to define, in
their scripts.

The Run Environment panel for the EXTERNAL JOB option looks like
Figure 6-6.

Run Manager – External Job

• Allows simulator to run on
any remote host, UNIX or
PC.
• User provides custom script
suitable for the computing
environment
• Run time monitoring is not
available.

42 ECLIPSE Office User Course

31 July 2001

Figure 6-6 EXTERNAL JOB Run Environment panel

In general it is best if the data reside on a shared directory, with the path to the
directory being the same from both machines. However, if that is not practical
the user can un-check the Write data with fill path box. This will instruct
ECLIPSE Office to write the .DATA file with INCLUDE keywords
containing only the file name (without the path). This option requires that the
user handle the copying of the input data to the remote machine.

In addition, the Run Manager calls the desired executable (script file) with
the –data argument. This argument contains the path to the working
directory containing the files on the local machine. Often times the length of
this path, combined with the length of the simulator .DATA file exceeds the
256 character limit for DOS commands. In these cases it is possible to

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 6-15

Controlling Runs

suppress this argument by checking the box. The user must then ensure that
the script file changes to the proper working directory on the remote machine.

LSF
Load Sharing Facility (LSF) is another Run Environment available in the Run
Manager to submit jobs remotely using a network of heterogeneous
computers as a single system. You have to define the queues, simulator
version, etc. in the LSF.CONFIG file. Appendix F of the ECLIPSE Office
User Guide contains the details of this file. This file is read and the options are
displayed in the LSF environment panel to be used with the LSF batch 'bsub'
command to submit a simulation run.

Transferring files to/from the remote hosts are not supported using the LSF
option. Therefore monitoring simulation runs is not available.

User should be familiar with LSF and the ' bsub' command when using the
LSF option in the Run Manager. You should install LSF before using this
option.

Run time monitoring

Run time monitoring of summary vectors and solution data is available for
runs using NON-PVM LOCAL and PVM run environments. Tick the Summary
box if you require monitoring of summary vectors. Tick the Solution box if
you require monitoring of solutions in either the 2D or 3D Viewer.

The summary vectors, restart files for solution data, and report steps for
monitoring must be defined in the appropriate sections of the Data Manager.
Also, the user must choose Multiple output files in order to use run time
monitoring.

The Line Plot Viewer for run time monitoring of summary vectors is shown
in Figure 6-7. For a description of the Run Manager plot window menus see
Chapter 7.

Chapter 6-16 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Controlling Runs

Run Manager – Run Time Monitoring

43 ECLIPSE Office User Course

31 July 2001

Figure 6-7 Run time monitoring of summary vectors

Procedure: Setting up Runtime Monitoring of Summary Vectors

1. Open a project and import a dataset if data is not already present
2. Open the Run Manager by pressing the Run button on the ECLIPSE Office
main display.
3. Check the Summary checkbox under Run Time Monitoring in the Run
Manager main window.
4. Set the Output File Type option button to Multiple.
5. Select Options>Select Summary Vectors. Select the desired summary
vectors to be made available for monitoring, by selecting the vector name on
the left side of the panel and pressing the Add to List button.
6. Select File>Close to close the Select Summary Vectors panel.
7. Setup an environment that supports runtime monitoring
8. Select Submit>Runs
9. As soon as the first report step is written the option under Monitor on the main
panel are activated. When this occurs, select Monitor>Summary Vectors to
open the Data Line Plot display. Select the plots to construct as described
Chapter 7.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 6-17

Controlling Runs

Controlling the simulator

After the simulation run has been defined and properly configured, selecting
Submit > Runs starts the run or runs. Once the run has started, the user has a
number of options for controlling the run. These are listed under the Monitor
menu.

Controlling Runs

The control panel for a single run is shown in Figure 6-8. The panel displays
information about the case name, the host machine, status of the run, and a
drop-down list of control keywords: END, HOLD/CONTINUE.

NOTE: The END keyword works for all environments, but

HOLD/CONTINUE only works with PVM.

Chapter 6-18 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Controlling Runs

Run Manager – Controlling Runs

44 ECLIPSE Office User Course

31 July 2001

Figure 6-8 Control the Simulations panel

Kill all simulations

The panel to kill all simulations is shown in Figure 6-9. Tick the required case
to terminate that run.

NOTE: The simulator process is not actually stopped if the run environment
is EXTERNAL JOB. In this run environment, the process is only
monitored by the content of the simulator output files. If you want
such processes to be stopped, you have to kill them outside
ECLIPSE Office.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 6-19

Controlling Runs

Run Manager – Killing Runs

45 ECLIPSE Office User Course

31 July 2001

Figure 6-9 Kill All Runs panel

Chapter 6-20 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Chapter 7 Using the Results Viewer

Overview

The Results Viewer is a post-processor interactive tool to help you display

and analyze the results of simulator runs. The module reads the files produced
by the simulator during the run. The files may be generated by running the
simulator through ECLIPSE Office or separately. The files may be formatted
or unformatted, unified or multiple.

The module reads the summary SPEC files and the summary reports to display
the summary vector. More than one file can be read at time to compare the
results. Total rates calculations can be performed and displayed.

The module also reads the GRID, INIT, and Restart files to represent the grid
in 2D and 3D displays. RFT files may also be read and displayed.

TIP: You do not need to open a project or import a data set to access the
Results Viewer. The data loading options regarding the current case
will be greyed out, but the user can still use the more general data
loading options.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-1

Using the Results Viewer

Results Viewer

46 ECLIPSE Office User Course

5 August 2001

Figure 7-1 Results Viewer main window

Results Viewer Main Window

The Results Viewer main window is used to display 2D line plots and grid
displays, as shown in Figure 7-1. The functionality is a combination of the 2D
grid viewer discussed in Chapter 3 and the 2D line plot display discussed in
Chapter 6. The 3D Viewer is also launched from this panel, although it has
separate controls.

The window contains the main graph and six small graphs (displayed at the
top of the main graph). This gives the ability to display several plots at the
same time. The navigation graph and the caption are displayed to the right of
the main graph if they have been selected using User>Add/Remove
Components.

Chapter 7-2 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

Window Components

Main graph

A double click on the main graph will display the grid editing panel. To show
the legend, navigation graph and caption boxes select User>Add/Remove
Components.

Small graphs

A double click on the title of any of the small graphs will swap the plot with
the main graph.

Navigation graph

Displays the lines of the main graph. A double click on the navigation graph
will display a panel to change the color of its background. This graph is
hidden by default.

Legend

The legend appears on the main graph. It can be displayed as a separate

window using User>Add/Remove Components. Each line in the legend
represents a line graph displayed in the main graph. The highlighted line is the
active graph. You can drag and drop it in the dustbin at the top right hand side
of the window to remove it. If you double-click on it a panel is displayed to
edit it to change its line, marker or plot style.

NOTE: Any editing performed in the main graph will be performed on the
active line.

Caption

Calculations performed will be displayed in this part of the window.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-3

Using the Results Viewer

Graph Title

Double click on the main graph title to change it.

Axis

A double click on the X- or Y- axis will display the axis editing panel.

Results Viewer – 2D functionality

• Line Plots and tabular • 2 Dimensional grid solution
display of summary vectors displays
– Production rates and totals – Initial properties
• Field, Region, Group, Block, – Recurrent values
Connection, Well
– Injection rates and totals – Timesteps
– Pressures – Individual cell values
– Quantities • Common functions
– Aquifer influx – Graphics Run Files
– Volumes
– Templates
– Recovery efficiencies
– Derived quantities

47 ECLIPSE Office User Course

6 August 2001

Figure 7-2 Results Viewer 2D functionality

2D Viewer (line plots and solutions)

The summary vector (line plot) display is very similar to the one in the Run
Manager with the following additions:

Chapter 7-4 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

• more than one set of vectors can be loaded

• an unlimited number of plots can be handled
• an organizer for the plots is supplied, as only seven can be displayed on
the screen at one time (one main graph and six small graphs).

Summary vector data includes well flowrates and pressures, tracer production,
time dependent data for individual regions and grid blocks, aquifer influx,
fluid in place volumes, well controls, and recovery efficiencies.

The 2D-solution display can be used to display plan views and cross-sections
of the simulation solution. Initial and recurrent properties may be viewed and
animated over time.

Individual cell property values may be shown using the Cell Probe.

Graphics Run Files can be created and used to easily re-create the same set of
plot for different runs. These are largely the same as those used by Graf so
existing libraries of run files can be converted with relative ease. Templates
of plot layout can also be created.

Derived quantities can be created for both summary and solution data. These
vectors can be calculated using one of a number of different methods,
depending on the complexity of the calculation involved.

Command Bar menu items

File menu
OPEN CURRENT CASE…
Opens files from the current case. This option is greyed out if there is no
project open or no case selected in the ECLIPSE Office main window.

The submenus with this option are:

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-5

Using the Results Viewer

Summary…
Opens Summary SPEC files for the current case. The Extract/Load
Summary Vectors panel opens as shown in Figure 7-3. Here the user selects
the vectors to be loaded. The default is to load all the available summary data,
so in most cases all the user needs to do is press the Load button.

Results Viewer – Loading Summary

Vectors

47 ECLIPSE Office User Course

5 August 2001

Figure 7-3 Extract/Load Summary Vectors panel

GRID…
Opens the GRID file for the current case.
Solution…
Opens the GRID and Solution files for the current case. The Extract/Load
Solutions panel is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-4. Here the user can select
the solutions and/or report steps to be loaded. The defaults for the panel are to
load all the timesteps and solution data.

Chapter 7-6 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

Results Viewer – Loading Solution Data

48 ECLIPSE Office User Course

5 August 2001

Figure 7-4 Extract/Load Solutions panel

RFT…
Opens RFT files for the current case.

OPEN…
These menu items allow the user to import data from other cases or from
simulations performed outside of ECLIPSE Office. You can load any number
of simulation results and view them at the same time for comparison.

This menu item has five sub-menus:

Summary…
A multiple file open dialog box displaying a list of summary SPEC files
appears, with the extension (F)SMSPEC. You can select one or more files as
required.

Each selected file will be opened and the data will be read. A Load/Extract
Summary Vectors panel will be displayed for each run selected.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-7

Using the Results Viewer

GRID…
A file open dialog box displaying a list of GRID files appears, with the
extensions (F)GRID and (F)EGRID. You can select one file at a time. Each
selected file will be opened and the data will be read. The Import Properties
panel, as shown in Figure 7-5, will be displayed if INIT or restart files are
found to allow you to select the required solution and reports to be displayed
on the grid.

Solution...
Similar to the Open>Grid option, this displays the Import Properties panel,
allowing you to select the desired GRID, INIT and restart files to be loaded.

Results Viewer – Import Properties

49 ECLIPSE Office User Course

5 August 2001

Figure 7-5 Import Properties panel

RFT…
A file open dialog box displaying a list of RFT files appears, with the
extension (F)RFT. When a file is selected a module is displayed allowing you
to select which vectors you will be able to read from the file.

Chapter 7-8 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

Templates…
A file open dialog box displaying a list of Template files appears. Users can
create templates for commonly used graphs and use this option to load them
into the current session.

OPEN OBSERVED…
This option is used to import user data in order to plot alongside simulation
results. This menu has three choices, depending on the format of the user data
file.

Row Format
This option reads a Graf row format file. Refer to the ECLIPSE Office User
Guide for details on this format.
Column Format
This option reads a Graf column format file. Refer to the ECLIPSE Office
User Guide for details on this format.

RSM Simulation File

This option reads a file of the same format as the ECLIPSE RSM file, such as
that generated by the SEPARATE keyword.

OPEN GRF…
Opens and reads a graphics run file (GRF) file generated by Graf or
ECLIPSE Office.

WRITE GRF…
Write the displayed pictures to a graphics run file.

SAVE TEMPLATES
Write graph templates to a file.

PRINT PREVIEW...
This brings up a preview window showing approximately the final appearance
of the printer output using the current settings. Like the printing, it has two
modes, one where just the main workspace is printed, and one where all of the
window is printed.

PRINT SETUP (PC ONLY)

Allows selection of one of the default printers on the PC.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-9

Using the Results Viewer

PRINT LAYOUT...
This opens the Print Layout panel, which is used to specify various aspects of
the print output, especially the datestamp appearance. There are also controls
for aspect ratio and scaling of fonts.

PRINT TYPE…
This opens the Printer Drivers panel, which allows selection of the format in
which to store the graphics image. The various output options are specified in
the ECL.CFG file.

PRINT
There is a submenu associated with this option:
Print Window
This option prints all the contents of the plot window, which is the main graph
plus all the information windows and small graphs.
Print Graph
This option prints only the contents of the main plot window.
Print Pictures
This option prints all pictures to the specified printer.

SAVE TO BITMAP...
This will save the graph to a bitmap (.BMP) file. This type of file is suitable
for reading into many packages, and conversion into other image types, but
since it is only a bitmap, can be quite coarse and therefore produces a lower
quality image than saving a plot via printing to a file in PostScript, CGM or
other format.
Graph…
Saves only the main graph.

Active Graph…
If the main graph window contains more than one graph, only the active graph
(shown with a yellow border) is saved.

Whole Picture...
Saves both graphs to a single bitmap (.BMP) file. Note the discussion of the
bitmap format above.

CLOSE
Closes the window and any associated panels.

Chapter 7-10 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

Edit menu
REMOVE MAIN PLOT
Removes the main graph.

CLEAR…

These menu items allow you to clear data without closing the Results Viewer.

Clear Pictures
Removes all pictures from the list. The data is unaffected.

Clear Summary Data

Clears all the imported summary vector data.

Clear Observed Data

Clears all the imported observed data.
Clear Solution Data
Clears all the imported grid and solution data.

TEMPLATES

Templates are used to display graphically a group of summary vectors easily,

without going through the selection of each vector. These templates can be
edited and saved into a file. The saved file could be loaded into the Results
Viewer at the beginning of the session.

Default
Displays a panel listing the default templates created by ECLIPSE Office.
You can add/remove vectors from these templates. The first list displays the
templates names, the second list displays summary vectors that could be added
to the template list, the third list displays a list of the summary vectors for
each template. You can save the edited templates by clicking on Apply. Also
there is an option to plot the template if required.
User
Displays a panel listing your own templates. These templates are created using
LinePlot>User menu. You have a complete list of the loaded summary
vectors to add/remove vectors from the template, or even remove any template
from the list. You can save the edited templates by clicking on Apply. Also
there is an option to plot the template if required

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-11

Using the Results Viewer

ADD NEW GRAPH

This menu item creates a new graph in the main window. A picture can
contain up to four graphs. Initially the display is divided vertically, then
horizontally. The user cannot control the placement of the graphs after their
creation.

Procedure: Creating a mulit-graph picture

1. Create the first picture in a new display using one of the View or LinePlot
options.
2. Select Edit>Add New Graph
3. Create the second picture in the new (active) graph using one of the View or
Line Plot options.
4. Steps 2 and 3 can be repeated until there are up to four graphs in the picture.

COPY TO CLIPBOARD… (PC ONLY)

This option allows you to copy and paste graphs from ECLIPSE Office into
many other Windows programs. This option has three menu items:
Main Graph
This option copies only the main graph to the clipboard.

Active Graph
This option copies the Active Graph to the clipboard. The Active Graph is
shown with a yellow border.
Whole Picture
This option copies both the Main Graph and the secondary (small) graphs to
the clipboard.

RANGE…
Select
Selects a range along the x-axis of the active line plot. The selected part of the
line appears in a different color than the rest of the line. This is used to
calculate the selected area under the curve using menu item Tools>Calculate
Totals>Calculate Area. Clicking on the icon again will cancel the function.
Clear
Clears the selected range of the active line plot.

Chapter 7-12 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

View menu
2D…
Creates a new plot containing a 2D view of the grid. Initially the view is of the
top layer and the initial property is SOIL, if present. If an empty active graph
is present the grid is displayed in this active graph, otherwise it is displayed in
a new graph.

3D…
Opens the 3D Viewer. Solution data is displayed on the grid if restart files
have been read.

NOTE: The 3D option will only be available if a FloViz license is available.

X-AXIS AS
You can select the X-Axis Mode, TIME or YEARS or DATE. The default is
TIME.

ADD WELL/GROUP
This adds a well/group to the displayed plot.

JUMP TO WELL GROUP

Displays a panel where you can select a specific well or group to display.

NEXT WELL/GROUP
Displays the next well/group in the list.

PREVIOUS WELL/GROUP
Displays the previous well/group in the list.

NEXT PICTURE
Moves the next picture in the list to the main graph.

PREVIOUS PICTURE
Moves the previous picture in the list to the main graph.

GRAPH LAYOUT…
This Graph Manager controls the layout of the plots. As the number of small
graphs is restricted to six, the layout panel will enable you to control the plots

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-13

Using the Results Viewer

by removing, swapping, or not displaying them. Each row in the table

represents a picture.

Pictures
The first column displays the picture numbers.
Picture position
The second column displays the current position of each picture. Clicking on
the cell displays a drop down list to select the position of the picture, remove
or no display.

Clicking on the row displays the number of graphs for each picture and the
lines for the selected graph.

Graphs
List of graphs for the selected picture. Note that the name of the graph is the
graph title. If the graph has no title then a default name is given, for example
Graph 1.
Graph lines
Contains a list of lines for the selected graph.
Remove graphs
Removes the highlighted graphs from the picture.
Remove lines
Removes the highlighted lines from the graph.

ZOOM IN
Zooms in one step into the center of the plot area. The size of the zoom
depends on the settings in the Zoom Preferences panel. Plots may also be
zoomed and panned using the zoom box on the navigation graph.

ZOOM OUT
Unzoom the complete plot area into a rectangular portion of the plot. The
zoom goes out one step for each time the button is pressed, or the menu item
selected, the size of the step being adjustable through the Zoom Preferences
panel.

RUBBERBAND ZOOM IN
Zoom into the current plot using a dragged box. To use this, after selecting the
menu option, place the cursor (which will change into a magnifying glass

Chapter 7-14 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

symbol) over the grid. Click on one corner of your desired zoomed area, and
drag the mouse with the button held down to the opposite corner of the area.

UNZOOM COMPLETELY
Completely unzoom the plot. This displays the complete data range on the
main graph.

ZOOM PREFERENCES…
Opens a panel where zoom settings such as scope and step size can be set.

REFRESH
Redraws the main picture.

INVERT
Inverts the color scheme of the graph window so that, for example, dark
foreground graph colors on a light background become light on a dark
background.

LinePlot menu

This menu item contains selections for creating line plots.

FIELD
This item contains submenus, the Field Default templates. The submenu is
grayed out if the summary vectors are not selected.
Production rate
The Production Rate default template. It will plot the following Field
Production Rate summary vectors: FOPR, FGPR, FWPR, FOPRH, FGPRH,
FWPRH.
Production total
The Production Total default template. It will plot the following Field
Production Total summary vectors: FOPT, FGPT, FWPT, FOPTH, FGPTH,
FWPTH.
Injection rate
The Injection Rate default template. It will plot the following Field Injection
Rate summary vectors: FOIR, FGIR, FWIR, FOIRH, FGIRH, FWIRH.

Injection total
The Injection Total default template. It will plot the following Field Injection
Total summary vectors: FOIT, FGIT, FWIT, FOITH, FGITH, FWITH.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-15

Using the Results Viewer

GROUP
This item contains submenus, the Group Default templates. The submenu is
grayed out if the summary vectors are not selected.

Production rate
The Production Rate default template. It will plot the following Group
Production Rate summary vectors: GOPR, GGPR, GWPR, GOPRH, GGPRH,
GWPRH.
Production total
The Production Total default template. It will plot the following Group
Production Total summary vectors: GOPT, GGPT, GWPT, GOPTH, GGPTH,
GWPTH.
Injection rate
The Injection Rate default template. It will plot the following Group Injection
Rate summary vectors: GOIR, GGIR, GWIR, GOIRH, GGIRH, GWIRH.

Injection total
The Injection Total default template. It will plot the following Group Injection
Total summary vectors: GOIT, GGIT, GWIT, GOITH, GGITH, GWITH.

WELL
This menu item contains submenus, the Well default templates. The submenu
is grayed out if the summary vectors are not selected.
Production rate
The Production Rate default template. It will plot the following Well
Production Rate summary vectors: WOPR, WGPR, WWPR, WOPRH,
WGPRH, WWPRH.
Production total
The Production Total default template. It will plot the following Well
Production Total summary vectors: WOPT, WGPT, WWPT, WOPTH,
WGPTH, WWPTH.

Injection rate
The Injection Rate default template. It will plot the following well Injection
Rate summary vectors: WOIR, WGIR, WWIR, WOIRH, WGIRH, WWIRH.

Injection total
The Injection Total default template. It will plot the following Well Injection
Total summary vectors: WOIT, WGIT, WWIT, WOITH, WGITH, WWITH.

Chapter 7-16 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

USER
This menu item will open a panel displaying the selected summary vectors, to
plot any required vectors and save them as templates. The panel, shown in
displays the following:

X-Axis Vectors
A list of the summary vectors. The selected row will be plotted and saved as
the X-axis.
Y-Axis Vectors
A list of the summary vectors. The selected rows will be plotted and saved as
the Y- axis.
Vectors to plot/save
A list of vectors to be plotted and saved.

Remove rows
Removes selected rows from the selected list.
Clear selection
Clears the selected list. Options can be set for plotting or saving the templates.
Graph
Radio buttons select the following:
• New Display
Plots the selection as a new graph in the main graph.
• Add Lines to Display
Plots the selection and add them to the displayed main graph.
• No Display
Does not plot the selection. The purpose is to save the selection as a
template for later use (Save Template should be ticked).

Save template
Should be ticked if saving the selection as a template.
Template title
The template title should be given if saving the selection as a template.

Graph title
The main graph title should be given if a new display is required.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-17

Using the Results Viewer

Select the OK or Apply button to execute the option required.

Results Viewer – User-defined plots

51 ECLIPSE Office User Course

6 August 2001

Figure 7-6 User-defined Template panel

Procedure: Creating a User-defined plot

1. Select LinePlot>User.
2. If more than one case has been loaded, select the case to use from the first
column of the User Template dialog box.
3. Select the X-Axis vector to use. Note that if you select TIME you can change
this later to using View>X Axis As.
4. Select the Y-Axis variable to use.
5. Press Add to List.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for any additional data to be placed on the plot.
7. Set the Graph radiobutton to create a new display or add the data to the Active
Graph.
8. Enter a Graph Title if desired. Note that this can also be done later.
9. Press the Apply button.

Chapter 7-18 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

RFT
This option opens a panel displaying the selected RFT vectors. The panel
displays the following:

Data type
Radio buttons allow you to select the type of data. You can select from:
• RFT
• CONNECTION
• SEGMENT

Plot depth/length
Select this option to set an offset to the plot from the starting point. Note this
option is only available for CONNECTION and SEGMENT data types.
Branch number
Use this option to specify the branch number, if required. Note this option is
only available for CONNECTION and SEGMENT data types.
X-Axis vectors
A list of the RFT vectors. The selected row will be plotted and saved as the X-
Axis.

Y-Axis vectors
A list of the RFT vectors. The selected rows will be plotted and saved as the
Y-Axis.
Vectors to plot/save
A list of vectors to be plotted.
Remove rows
Removes selected rows from the selected list.

Clear selection
Clears the selected list.

Graph
Radio buttons select the following:
• New Display
Plots the selection as a new graph in the main graph.
• Add Lines to Display
Plots the selection and add them to the displayed main graph.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-19

Using the Results Viewer

Graph title
The main graph title.

Click on the OK or Apply button to plot the vectors.

OBSERVED
Performs the same function as the User menu item above; except that it
displays the summary vectors of the user observed data, which was imported
from the File menu. By default only markers appear. The observed data can be
displayed separately on a graph or with the data read from the summary file.

SOLUTION
These options are used in conjunction with the 2D Viewer to generate plots
based on a selection of cells in the 2D Viewer. The 2D Viewer with the
selected cells must be the Active Graph before these options will be active.

There are five templates available for solution plotting:

Solution vs. Time

This option produces a plot of the currently displayed property versus time for
the selected cell. If multiple cells are selected then a separate trace for each
cell will be shown.
Solution vs. I Cell
This option produces a plot of the currently displayed property versus the I
Cell number, for the J and K values of the selected cell. If multiple cells are
selected then a separate trace for each cell will be shown.

Solution vs. J Cell

This option produces a plot of the currently displayed property versus the J
Cell number, for the I and K values of the selected cell. If multiple cells are
selected then a separate trace for each cell will be shown.
Solution vs. K Cell
This option produces a plot of the currently displayed property versus the K
Cell number, for the I and J value of the selected cell. If multiple cells are
selected then a separate trace for each cell will be shown.

Depth vs. Solution

This option produces a plot of the cell center depth of the cells in the same K
column versus the currently displayed property, for the I and J value of the

Chapter 7-20 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

selected cell. If multiple cells are selected then a separate trace for each cell
will be shown.

Procedure: Creating a Line Plot of Solution Data

1. Select View>2D. A 2D plot of the grid is displayed with the default property
shown.
2. Select 2D>Property… and select the desired property.
3. Under the 2D menu, uncheck the Show Cell Probe option.
4. Select 2D>Pick.
5. Click on the cell or cells in the 2D Viewer. Multiple cells can be selected by
holding the SHIFT key while selecting cells. The view can be changed using
the 2D>Slice… and 2D>Cross Section… options.

Tools menu
CALCULATOR…
Opens the Calculator program for summary vectors manipulations. The
Calculator is a highly flexible programming language designed to allow the
user complete control of the calculation of new vectors based on the loaded
data. The Calculator is discussed in more detail in the ECLIPSE Office User
Guide.

CALCULATE TOTALS
This menu provides quick access to method of calculating totals based on rate
data. The appropriate rate data must have been specified in the simulation run
and loaded into the Results Viewer before these will become active.

Field Production
Calculates and plots totals from the Field Production Rates (FOPR, FGPR and
FWPR).

Field Injection
Calculates and plots totals from the Field Injection Rates (FOIR, FGIR and
FWIR).

Group Production
Calculates and plots totals from the Group Production Rates (GOPR, GGPR
and GWPR). The user is prompted to select the desired group or groups. If
multiple groups are selected they will all be plotted on the same graph. To

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-21

Using the Results Viewer

view each group individually, select the first group and then use the View
options to switch between groups.

Group Injection
Calculates and plots totals from the Group Injection Rates (GOIR, GGIR and
GWIR). The user is prompted to select the desired group or groups. If multiple
groups are selected they will all be plotted on the same graph. To view each
group individually, select the first group and then use the View options to
switch between groups.

Well Production
Calculates and plots totals from the Well Production Rates (WOPR, WGPR and
WWPR). The user is prompted to select the desired well or wells. If multiple
wells are selected they will all be plotted on the same graph. To view each
well individually, select the first well and then use the View options to switch
between wells.
Well Injection
Calculates and plots totals from the Well Injection Rates (WOIR, WGIR and
WWIR). The user is prompted to select the desired well or wells. If multiple
wells are selected they will all be plotted on the same graph. To view each
well individually, select the first well and then use the View options to switch
between wells.
Summary Vectors…
Calculates and plots totals from any user-selected keywords.

Calculate area
Calculates the area under the curve for plotted data. The sum appears in the
caption, if shown. The user can select only a range of one curve to total by
using the Edit>Range>Select option.

CREATE NEW
Provides panels to create new summary vectors and solutions. You are able
enter the new vector name and a algebraic expression to be evaluated. The
Parse Expression button parses the expression and gives back the identifiers to
be associated with the names of variables, origin names, etc.

Chapter 7-22 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

Results Viewer – Creating new vectors

52 ECLIPSE Office User Course

6 August 2001

Figure 7-7 Create New Summary Vector panel

Example:

The water cut (WCT) from a field may be evaluated as:

A/(A+B)

After parsing the expression A is associated with the vector FWPR, and B is
associated with FOPR. Note that all vectors should have the same length.

If the unit is not provided or the quantity is not defined then the
vector/property is dimensionless.

The CREATE VECTOR and SOLUTION commands are written to the GRF
file.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-23

Using the Results Viewer

Summary Vector...
Displays a panel for creating new summary vectors as shown in Figure 7-7.
The new summary vector appears in the Line Plot > User menu list.
Solution...
Displays a panel for creating new solution as shown in Figure 7-8. This panel
is similar to the Create New Summary Vector panel but allows the user to
control whether the property is an intial property, a property that exists only
for the current time step, or a property that exists in all time steps.

Results Viewer – Creating new solutions

53 ECLIPSE Office User Course

6 August 2001

Figure 7-8 Create New Property panel

TIMESTEP...
Opens the Timestep Selector panel, allowing the current timestep to be
selected. The panel also contains icons allowing the display to be animated.

The timesteps are listed chronologically, the panel showing all valid timesteps
loaded for the active grid. If multiple grids are loaded then the panel may
update if a different grid is made active, as the list of valid timesteps may
differ. This panel is only available if a 2D solution graph is the Active Graph.

Chapter 7-24 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

ANIMATE
These options control the animation through time of 2D solution displays.
These options are only active if a 2D solution graph is the Active Graph.

First
Move to the first timestep.
Previous
Move to the previous timestep.

Next
Move to the next timestep.

Last
Move to the last timestep.
Run
Start animating the display by moving though the timesteps, as defined in the
Animation Options panel.
Stop
Stop any animation in progress.
Loop
If checked, any animation repeats endlessly until the Stop option is selected.

Options...
Opens the Animation Options panel, allowing specification of the minimum
and maximum timesteps of the animation, together with a step value (the
default increment is one, so all timesteps are shown in the animation) and the
delay between timesteps.

2D menu
PICK
Enters Pick mode, allowing cells displayed on a 2D grid display to be selected
By default, the Cell Probe panel opens on entering Pick mode. Clicking on
the icon again (or closing the Cell Probe panel) cancels this mode.

Individual cells can be selected using the left mouse button. To select more
than one cell hold down the Ctrl button while picking. Cell I, J, K values are
displayed in the status bar at the bottom left of the window when moving the

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-25

Using the Results Viewer

mouse over a cell (if the left mouse button is held down the value of the
currently selected property in this cell is also shown)

Cells selected when in Pick mode are highlighted in black. It is necessary to

select cells in this way for use in the Cell Probe panel, and in order to
generate line plots of properties.

SHOW CELL PROBE

If this option is checked then the Cell Probe panel is displayed on entering
Pick mode. Closing the panel cancels this mode.

The panel allows you to determine the initial and recurrent properties (if
loaded) in picked cells. It is linked to the Timestep Selector panel, and so
updates as a new timestep is selected.

PROPERTY...
Opens the Property Selector panel, allowing the selection of the initial or
recurrent property to be displayed on a 2D solution display.

DISPLAY CONTROL...
Opens the Display Control panel, allowing control of the display of objects
on a 2D solution display.

By default the grid is displayed with cells color filled to represent the value of
the currently selected property (a key is shown at the bottom of the graph). It is
possible to switch off either the cell outlines or the color fill by selecting the
appropriate render mode.

A contoured map of the currently selected property is hidden by default. The

can be made visible by changing the visibility setting. Contour lines or a color
filled contour map may be displayed by changing the appropriate render mode.

TIP: It is possible to display both color filled grid cells and a color filled
contour map simultaneously, but this is not recommended!

If wells are present, these are shown by default.

Chapter 7-26 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

The panel also allows the level of detail of each object to be changed, which
changes the resolution with which the object is displayed.

COLOR LEGEND
Color Legend Editor...
Opens the Color Map Editor, allowing modifications to be made to the color
map used to represent the currently selected property.

CAUTION: Modifications made to a colormap affect both the 3D

Viewer and 2D displays within the Results Viewer.

SLICE...
Opens the Slice Selector panel, controlling the 2D display in the currently
active graph.

Slices of the grid can be shown in three directions: I slices (perpendicular to

the X axis); J slices (perpendicular to the Y axis); and K slices (perpendicular
to the Z axis). For each direction a number of slices are available, dependent
on the dimensions of the grid.

For each view it is possible to specify whether the cell geometry is calculated
at the front, middle, or back of the cell (as viewed in the direction of
increasing slice number).

CROSS SECTION
Options under this menu generate and control an arbitrary vertical cross
section through the selected grid.

The cross section shows the intersection of the grid with a vertical plane. The
depths of the intersections are shown on the Y axis, the X axis showing the
distance of these intersections from the start of the line defining this plane.
Intersected cells are color-coded with the selected property, as in the normal I,
J, or K slice views. The property displayed on the cross section view can be
changed using the Property Selector dialog in the normal way.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-27

Using the Results Viewer

In the present release no contour map can be shown on the arbitrary cross
section.

The line defining the vertical section is shown on a K slice view of the grid.
This line may be repositioned by dragging the line with the mouse cursor, or
by specifying a position using a dialog. The line may also be anchored, in
which case dragging the line with the mouse has the effect of spinning the line
around the anchor point.

Generate
If the current graph shows an areal view (K slice) of a grid, this option
generates a cross section though the grid, displaying the section in another
graph within the picture. The section is only generated if there are no more
than three graphs in the picture (as no more than four graphs can be shown in
one picture).

If the graph already displays a line defining the cross section plane, the new
section is generated from this intersection of the grid with the vertical plane
defined by this line.

If no line is present then the section defaults to a constant Y value (the

midpoint of the Y axis), and a line is added to the graph to allow the new cross
section to be updated.

Several cross sections of the same geometry can then be displayed

simultaneously, each showing a different property.

CAUTION: If the graph containing the line defining the section(s) is

deleted, it is no longer be possible to update the section
display(s). However, the section(s) remain until deleted.

The line defining the cross section plane is only visible when the graph is
showing a K slice. If the current view is changed using the Slice Selector
panel then the line is hidden, to reappear whenever the view is changed back
to a K slice view.

Chapter 7-28 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

Set Position...
Opens the Cross Section Coordinates panel, allowing the position of the
cross section to be explicitly specified. On this panel you may also set the line
extensions flag.
Anchor
Options under this menu allow the removal (if present) or the setting of an
anchor on the line defining the cross section plane. When anchored, dragging
the line moves the line around the anchor point. The anchor can be set on the
start of a well by selecting the To Well option, which opens the Select
Anchor Well panel.

TIP: When dragging the line, if the mouse cursor passes close to the start
of a well the line will seem to “stick” to the well. If the line is
already anchored on a well, releasing the mouse at this time should
result in the section being defined as running between the two wells.

The line can be anchored at any point by moving the line to pass though the
point and then right clicking the mouse to bring up the context sensitive pop-
up menu. From this menu select the option Anchor>At Cursor.

Centre
The options under this menu reposition the line to have either a constant Y or
X value (so that the line runs, as viewed on the display, either horizontally or
vertically). If the line is anchored then the anchor point is preserved, otherwise
the line is moved to the midpoint of the axis.

Extend
By default this option is checked, and so the line defining the cross section is
extended to the axes, intersecting the whole grid. If not checked then the
section runs from the start to the end of the line (shown as red squares).

OPTIONS
Show cell centres
If checked, a marker is placed in the center of each displayed cell in all graphs
shown within the main picture.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-29

Using the Results Viewer

Show color fill

If checked, each cell in all graphs shown within the main picture is color filled
according to the value of the currently selected property for that graph (a key
to the colors used is found at the bottom of each graph). The Display Control
panel offers greater control over the display of the grid.
Show outlines
If checked, cell outlines for each cell in all graphs shown within the main
picture are shown. The Display Control panel offers greater control over the
display of the grid.

Inactive Cells
Options under this menu control whether inactive cells are displayed on
graphs within the main picture. The color of inactive cells can also be
changed.
Well Display
The option under this menu controls whether all wells are shown (subject to
visibility options in the Display Control dialog) or just those wells completed
in the current slice.

Options menu
WRITE CAPTION
Allows you to write text and add it to the caption. To show the caption, select
Add/Remove Components.

CLEAR CAPTION
Removes all the entries displayed in the caption.

CREATE RESTART INDEX FILE

An option to generate a restart index file (*.(F/RSSPEC) from the report
RESTART files.

The file could be formatted or unformatted depending on the extension of the

report files. Normally this file is generated at the end of the eclipse run. Old
ECLIPSE runs do not have this file and it should be generated before reading
the RESTART files in ECLIPSE Office. This file is useful for the property
selections.

ADD/REMOVE COMPONENTS...
This panel controls the overall look of the graph window, and which layout
and behavior components it contains. It may not appear in some applications if

Chapter 7-30 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

user control over the window behavior is inappropriate. Layout components

are frames such as the main graph, small graphs, legends and navigation
graphs. Behavior components mostly control whether the menu and tool bar
options appear, but also more fundamental parts of the window, such as the
status bar.

There are two tabs to this panel, one for the layout (Layout Components) and
one for the behavior (Window Components).

Layout components
Small graphs, legends, navigation graphs etc. can be displayed or hidden using
this tab. Simply select the item that is going to be changed, and click on the
appropriate Show or Hide button. Note that multiple selection by Shift or
Ctrl clicking is possible in the standard manner. Changes are immediately
reflected in the window layout without the need for applying the changes.
Window components
Again a simple selection and Show / Hide mechanism is used to adjust the
properties of the window. The majority of the options control the tool bar and
menu options. Others include Cursors, which switches on the cursor changing
shape behavior, Resize Bars, which switches on the bars between frames,
which can be adjusted by dragging, and also Status Bar and Tool Bars, which
can be used to switch these features on and off.

MAIN AND SMALL TITLE SETTINGS...

These panels control the appearance of the frame titles, both for the main
graph and for any small graphs, legends, etc. that may be part of the graph
window layout. There is one set of styles for the main graph, the Main Graph
Title Settings panel, and one for all the others, the Small Graph Title
Settings panel. Both look the same apart from their title.
There are four main settings for titles.

Text Position
The title text can appear at the left, right or in the middle of the title bar. A
radio button selection gives you control over this setting.

Font Selection
The standard sets of fonts are listed, and you may select any of them by a
single click. The currently selected font is highlighted in inverted text.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-31

Using the Results Viewer

Colors
There are two colors to select: the foreground and the background for the text.
Also you may choose to have no background using the check box, the default
for the main graph.

Clicking on the foreground or background buttons will bring up a separate

Color Selection panel, which must be closed before continuing.

Font Size
There are five possible sizes to select for the title. Four of them are fixed in
size, but relate to the settings in the ECL.CFG file. The other setting is
automatic. In this setting, the size will be chosen appropriately to the overall
size of the frame it is labeling.

MODIFY GRAPH TITLE...

This brings up a simple panel in which you can edit the title of the main graph
active at the time.

GRAPH LEGEND STYLE...

This opens the Graph Legend Configuration panel, which can be used to
control the appearance of the legend at the top of the active graph, or even
whether it is present.

PLOT STYLE SETTINGS...

This invokes the Data Style panel for the currently active plot. Various style
settings for the appearance of the data (line, marker style and color) are
modified through this panel.

X/Y AXIS SETTINGS...

This invokes the Axis Style panel for the axis displaying the current active
data, either X or Y, depending on menu option chosen. The many axis style
attributes are modified from this panel.

GRID SETTINGS...
The Grid Properties panel can be opened using this menu option. The grid
has a small number of settings, mostly related to the visibility of the grid itself,
and the current point, if defined.

MEASURE
Allows the user to measure the straight-line distance in the plot area. To use
this feature, select this menu item then click on the starting point on the graph

Chapter 7-32 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

and drag the mouse to the end of the desired area. The distance in X, Y and
total is shown in the Status bar at the bottom of the window.

FILLED Y VAL
This can be used to choose the zero level for filling graphs. For a plot that is
being displayed in filled mode, for example from selection through the Data
Style panel, the filled area goes from a certain Y value up (or down) to the
data curve. By selecting this option, and clicking the mouse at the desired
point, the Y val for this operation can be adjusted.

ANNOTATE
Provides a means of annotating plots. Select Graph>Annotate from the
menu, then perform a single mouse click at the point where you wish the text
to be associated. Type into the edit field displayed and press Enter to accept
the text, press Escape to cancel. All annotations resize appropriately on a
window resize. Each annotation can individually be resized, repositioned, and
deleted by dragging onto the dustbin.

CURRENT
Choose the current point - it is marked by a circle. Often used in conjunction
with a table and the grid setting of showing the current point. If a table is
displayed at the same time then the current point corresponds to the table row
with focus. This is a useful way of quickly scrolling a table to a particular data
item.

3D Viewer

The 3D Viewer is the same viewer as the standalone product FloViz and is an
optional component of ECLIPSE Office. The 3D Viewer in ECLISPE
Office, though, allows for easier importing of the current case.

The 3D Viewer allows the user to view any grid-based solutions in 3

dimensions and allows the user to rotate, zoom and slice the view even while
animating through time.

The 3D Viewer main panel is shown in Figure 7-9. The 3D Viewer is

accessed through the ECLIPSE Office Results Viewer by selecting
View>3D. Note that this option will only be active if a Grid or Solution data
has been loaded into the Results Viewer.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-33

Using the Results Viewer

Results Viewer – 3D Viewer

54 ECLIPSE Office User Course

6 August 2001

Figure 7-9 3D Viewer main window

Commonly Used menu items

File menu
IMPORT STREAMLINES…
This opens a file selector where the user can select the streamline file
(*.Bnnn).

SLAVE VIEWER…
Opens a secondary 3D Viewer showing the same case. The user has the option
when the slave view is created to control which objects are dependent and
independent in the two 3D Viewer windows. The user can also choose to link
the rotation, translation and zooming of the two views.

SAVE AS…
Saves the current view to a file. The options are:

Chapter 7-34 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

PostScript
Creates a vector PostScript file of the current image. The user has control over
the orientation, color and size of the plot

The Width and Height may only be entered for encapsulated PostScript. For
the other sizes, these sliders are disabled and are used to show the page size
selected.

VRML
Provides an option for creating a VRML file for viewing of the 3D model with
an Internet Web browser.
Image
This menu item allows the 3D image to be saved in one of the following file
formats.
• JPEG (JPG is also accepted)
• TIFF (TIF is also accepted)
• PBM

TIP: JPEG format provides the most compact size, however

overcompression can cause the image to be “softer” and in extreme
cases, blurry. TIFF creates a larger file but is the highest quality
image.

HARDCOPY COLOURS
There is no dialog panel associated with this option.

This menu item allows colors to be switched between black and white for
various objects, and is primarily intended for switching between screen colors
and hard copy.

If the menu option is selected (that is, hardcopy colors are requested), then the
background color is set to white and the foreground color is set to black. If the
option is not selected (or screen colors are selected) then the background color
is set to black and the foreground color is set to white.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-35

Using the Results Viewer

The various objects changed are as follows:-

• The background of the 3D window changes to the background color.

• Cell outlines change to the foreground color.
• Text used for Wells, Axes, Titles, Colour Legend and 3D Text changes
to the foreground color.

CLOSE
Select this option to close the 3D Viewer window.

Grid menu
PROPERTY
Display
This panel is used to select the simulation property to color the cells of the
active grid. Only Initial or Recurrent properties will be shown in the list at a
time. If both property types are available, selection may be toggled from one
to the other by use of the radio buttons.

If water, oil and gas saturations are available, a Ternary property will be
created. This property will exist at all timesteps where the three saturations are
available. The Ternary property will be found in the list of Recurrent
properties and is available for display just like any other property.

Cell probe
The Cell Probe allows you to investigate a cell’s properties. The cell is
selected by clicking on it in the 3D Viewer with the left mouse button. If the
Paint Cell option is on, the cell will be painted white. By default the cell’s I,
J, K location and grid it belongs to will be reported.

To examine the cell’s property values select a property from the All
Properties list and transfer it to the Probe Properties list by either double
clicking the property or by selecting the property and clicking the [>] button.
The property name and the corresponding cell value will then be shown in the
Cell Properties box. More properties may be selected in the same way.

To remove a property from the Probe Properties list either double-click on

the property name in the list or select it and click the [<] button.

Chapter 7-36 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

The cell values will update as you animate the simulation through time. Also
note that the probe can be used in sweep mode by holding the left mouse
button down and moving the pointer over the grid. The effect is to get a
continuous trail of property values for the cells that have been swept by the
mouse cursor.

The Report Cell Geometry option displays the coordinates of the corners and
the center of the currently selected cell. The nodes are listed in an anti-
clockwise direction, top face first followed by the bottom face. For Cartesian
cells we list from the top back left node, for radials from the min. r min. theta
node.

Results Viewer – Cell Probe

55 ECLIPSE Office User Course

6 August 2001

Figure 7-10 Cell Probe panel

Threshold
The Threshold panel allows you to limit the cells displayed to those that have
a property value inside a given range. You can threshold on multiple
properties, so that the cells displayed are those whose property values are
within the intersection of the supplied ranges. As you animate through time
different cells will fall into and outside of this property range so giving a
visual indication of fluid flow.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-37

Using the Results Viewer

The list of properties featured in the All Properties list can be toggled
between the Initial and Recurrent property list by the buttons at the top of the
panel.

Select properties for thresholding from the All Properties list either by double
clicking on them or by single clicking and then clicking on the [>] button.
Selected properties will then be listed in the Active Properties list. The
currently selected property’s details will be listed on the folder below. The
layout of the folder will differ for integer and real properties - the integer
thresholding folder allows multiple discrete ranges to be selected whereas the
real threshold folder allows just one floating point range to be set per property.
Selecting a property from the Active Properties list will display the details of
that property in a new folder below. Properties may be removed from the
Active Properties list (and have their threshold range reset) either by double
clicking on it or by selecting it and clicking on the [<] button.

Edit
This option opens the Simulation Property Editor panel, shown in Figure
7-11. This allows you to manipulate simulation properties. Simulation
properties can be created, edited and deleted. It is also possible to run the
Calculator from this panel and special variables are made available to the
Calculator when it is run in this context.

Property Types are placeholders for their individual properties and property
versions. The idea is that many versions of the same property may exist and all
be grouped under one Property Type umbrella. All properties (versions) must
be associated with a Property Type, and the min. max values used to color
these properties are taken from all properties associated with a Property Type.

Properties can be both Initial and Recurrent, that is they can exist with the
same name to describe both initial state and change through time. The type
(Initial or Recurrent) of the property to be edited/created will be ascertained
from the expression to be evaluated or assumed to be initial when running a
calculator script.

Type
This drop-down lists the property type of the property to be edited. Property
types with existing property versions are first in the list and indicated by an
asterisk.

Chapter 7-38 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

Version
This drop-down holds the names of the property versions corresponding to the
property type displayed in the Type drop-down. If no versions of the property
type currently exist, (none) is displayed. Note that property versions read from
the simulator output are not editable. This is to guard against the concept of
altering simulator output values directly. To edit these properties first make a
copy of the property and then edit the copy.

Results Viewer – Property Editor

56 ECLIPSE Office User Course

6 August 2001

Figure 7-11 Simulation Property Editor panel

Property creation parameters

The Property creation parameters section of the Simulation Property Editor
panel allows you to set the creation details for a property and is active when a
new property is to be created. New properties take their data type (Integer or
Real) from their Property Type; the Real and Integer radio buttons are not
selectable and simply indicate the type of the currently selected Property
Type.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-39

Using the Results Viewer

Create property type

This button provides a quick way of accessing the Create Property Type
modal dialog. This is described in more detail under Utilities > Create
Property Type.

New property
This box should be checked if a new version of a property is to be created. The
type of the property to be created will be ascertained from the expression to be
evaluated or assumed to be initial when running a Calculator script.

Inactive cells
This box should be checked if values for inactive cells are to be stored.

LGRs
This box should be checked if values for local grid refinements are to be
stored.

Edit scope
The Edit scope section of the Simulation Property Editor panel allows you to
specify which cells the edit is to be applied to.

All cells
This radio button will apply the edit to all the cells that exist for the property.

3D viewer selected cells

This radio button will apply the edit to the cells currently on display on the
Main Viewer.

Generate by
The Generate by section of the Simulation Property Editor panel defines the
method to compute the property being edited. Three methods are available:

Expression
The Expression folder allows you to specify a constant or arithmetic
expression with which to calculate the property. The two, operand drop-down
lists contain the names of all available Initial and Recurrent properties
separated by a blank line. You may select a property or type a constant value
into either of these fields. The operator list contains all available arithmetic
operators plus two difference operators, ‘T+1-T’ and ‘T-T0’ which operate
only on the recurrent property specified by the first operand field. The second
operand is only available when an arithmetic operator is selected.

Chapter 7-40 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

Expressions mixing Initial and Recurrent properties are allowed as is

specifying a particular report step with which to operate.

When you press the Apply button, the expression is evaluated to discern the
type (Initial or Recurrent) of property to be created and / or edited. If creating
a new property, a property of this type with this name must not already exist.
Likewise, if editing an existing property, an editable property of the required
type and name must already exist. The criteria describing the type of property
required for different expressions is provided in the FloViz User Guide.

Advanced Expression
Use the Advanced Expression folder when you want to edit or create
properties using a more complex single arithmetic expression than is provided
for in the basic expression folder, yet without programming the calculator. The
expression can include conditions, so different editing algorithms can be
applied to different sectors of the model.

When you click on this folder tab another panel appears: the Expression
Builder. This is the panel in which you type and edit your expression. When
you click on Apply on the Expression Builder, the expression is analyzed for
correct syntax; if validated, the expression is passed through to this folder.

Calculator
With this folder selected, you can enter (or select using the browser) the
location of a Calculator script in the Calculator file text entry field. The
Calculator script is run within the context of the Simulation Property Editor;
this panel allows a number of special variables to be made available for
optional use within the Calculator script. These include many of the values set
interactively on the Simulation Property Editor panel. For more details see the
section on Simulation property editing in the Calculator appendix of the
FloViz User Guide.

Run differencing
The Run Differencing folder allows you to compute properties which are the
difference in a property between simulation runs. The Import File button will
present you with a file browser with which to select an ECLIPSE INIT /
Restart or AVS format file to difference with. Properties common to the
current model and the selected file will be displayed in the Subtract... drop
down list. Select a property to be differenced from this list; the property read
from the file will be subtracted from the model’s property to create the new
property given by the Property Type and Version fields.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-41

Using the Results Viewer

Note that importing a new file will clear the previous file and its available
properties.

Apply
The Apply button applies the edits made on the panel.

Delete
The Delete button will display a question box asking if you are sure you wish
to delete the selected property. If the property exists as both Initial and
Recurrent you will be given the option to delete one or the other or both.
Deleting a property removes it from the application permanently.

Close
The Close button closes the panel without applying any edit.
Export
ECLIPSE .GRDECL keywords
This option allows you to output Initial properties to a file in the ECLIPSE
standard array input format (.GRDECL). Two property lists exist on the panel,
the Initial Properties list and the Selected Properties list. Select properties to
be written by highlighting the required properties in the Initial Properties list
then moving them by clicking on the >> button, or by double clicking the
property to be selected. To deselect a property highlight it in the Selected
Properties list and click the << button, or double click the property. Press the
OK button to confirm selection whereupon you will be prompted for a file to
write to. Enter a file name and press Save to write the properties.

STREAMLINES…
Display Streamlines
The Display Streamlines option simply toggles the display of streamlines on
and off in the viewer.

Edit Streamlines
The Edit Streamlines dialog allows you to affect the way streamlines are
displayed and filtered. Filtering can apply to both whole streamlines and
individual streamline segments, for example filtering by wells filters out
whole streamlines that do not originate or terminate at the selected wells,
whereas property thresholding selects just streamline segments whose property
value falls between the selected values.

Chapter 7-42 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

TIMESTEPS…
Individual timesteps can be chosen to display from a list showing sequence
number, timestep and date. Animation of the timesteps is controlled with
buttons similar to those on a video recorder.

CAUTION: All timesteps for all time varying objects in the view are
listed. It is therefore possible to select a timestep for which
there is no data for one of these objects. If this happens you
will be warned and the object’s closest previous timestep
used.

The timesteps can also be chosen from the timestep buttons on the 3D
Viewer’s toolbar.

The animation icons will let you single step forwards, single step backwards,
stop the animation and play the animation from current step to the end.
Additional buttons on the 3D Viewer’s toolbar will let you snap directly to the
first (rewind) or last (fast forward) timestep.

On the Animate Time panel it is possible to select timesteps directly from the
list, so the panel does not have the icons for first/last timestep.

Select the Options... button on the Animate Time panel to define the
minimum and maximum timesteps, the timestep interval, and the delay
between timesteps.

IJK SLICE
The IJK Slicer panel allows you to view restricted slices or blocks of the grid
based on the grid’s IJK structure. Structured grids will have a single global
domain and domains for each LGR created. LGRs can be sliced independently
of the global cells.

Unstructured grids are made up from several domains around features like
wells, faults and boundaries. Each of these domains has its own IJK structure
and can be sliced independently. There is also a top level, or global domain
which does not have an explicit IJK structure. It is an internally constructed,

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-43

Using the Results Viewer

virtual IJK grid that can be used to view the unstructured grid in a more
conventional manner.

The Global domain is sliced by default. To slice a particular domain either

select it from the Select Domain drop-down list box or simply pick on the
domain in the 3D Viewer with the left mouse button. This will automatically
select the chosen grid for slicing. Existing slicing of other domains will be
remembered.

TIP: When slicing sub-domains, it may be useful to display only the cells
in that particular sub-domain. Use Grid > Volume of Interest >
Domains to limit the domains viewed.

The effects of slicing are cumulative in that the global domain and any or all
sub- domains can be sliced at the same time. The union of the slices is
displayed. The buttons Reset Domain and Reset All Domains can be used to
cancel slicing if this is not desired.

The rest of the IJK Slice panel provides three folders for controlling the
slicing. The IJ Slicing folder allows a selection of rows and columns to be
displayed. These rows can be combined with a selection of K layers set in the
K Slicing folder. The ‘Honour IJ Slicing’ check-box on the K Slice folder
will toggle the combination between union and intersection with the IJ slices.
The IJK Extents folder allows the range of I,J and K cells displayed to be
restricted to a smaller block.

Several numbers in a row can be chosen by highlighting the first value then
holding the Shift key and highlighting the last value. All numbers in
between will be highlighted. Multiple IJK numbers can be chosen by pressing
the Ctrl key while selecting the appropriate numbers - using the Ctrl key
on an already selected row will deselect it. The full combination of selected
rows is shown in the horizontal box in a short-hand form such as “1-7,13,15-
20”. This box can be edited.

Use Every Nth to choose regularly spaced row or layer numbers.

Chapter 7-44 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

If AutoApply is on, then changes will take place immediately; if AutoApply

is off then any changes made in the panel will not happen until Apply is
chosen. When AutoApply is on, the Apply button is disabled (grayed out).

The status of AutoApply can be altered from the drop-down menu accessible
with the right mouse button - releasing the button over the AutoApply option
will change the state of AutoApply. The drop-down menu only changes the
status of AutoApply on the currently selected folder, so each folder can be set
as required.

VOLUME OF INTEREST
Grid cells
This option restricts the volume of the displayed model. Only cells in the new
restricted range will be available to the IJK Slicer. Volume of Interest may
only be set on the global grid.

Changes made to the Volume of Interest panel will be applied automatically.

Pressing the right mouse button anywhere in the window and clicking on
AutoApply is On can toggle off the AutoApply option.

Domain selection...
A domain is a named group of cells within the grid. Structured grids will have
a global domain and a sub-domain for any available LGRs.

In unstructured grids, reservoir features such as wells, faults and regions are
grouped into individual domains. Each domain has an independent IJK
numbering system. (PetraGrid will map this collection of IJK numbers to a
single, regular IJK grid for ECLIPSE internally.) There is also an
unstructured global domain that does not have an explicit IJK structure. Is it a
virtual IJK grid created by PetraGrid that allows the model to be displayed
and sliced in a more conventional manner.

From the Domain Selection window one or more domains can be chosen for
display.

Choices made in Domain Selection will not be applied until Apply is chosen.
Pressing the right mouse button anywhere in the window can toggle the
AutoApply option on by clicking on AutoApply is Off.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-45

Using the Results Viewer

Boundaries
Boundaries are used to define areal limits for structural models and grids.
They can also be used to assign properties and aquifers to particular sections
of the grid. Boundaries can be created in Editor>Boundaries. Boundary
boxes may be displayed or removed from the viewer in Editor >Boundaries.

The window Create VOI From Boundary allows you to select cells inside or
outside of a boundary for display. Choose the appropriate Boundary list and
highlight a boundary. Toggle on and off Select Inside to display cells inside or
outside of the boundary.

The Union and Intersection buttons will display the union or intersection of
the cells defined by the boundary with the cells currently selected in the 3D
Viewer.

WELLS
The Wells panel allows you to modify the appearance of the wells. The height
of the well stem and the well width may be changed using the Height and
Width sliders. The Display radio buttons toggle what is displayed between no
wells, just the wells, and the wells and their labels.

The Connections checkbox toggles the display of the simulation to well

connections. These are represented by spheres at the center of cells that the
well is connected to and may be green (open) or red (closed) depending on
their current status.

The Status check-box toggles the display of the well’s status. This is
represented by an icon that will appear at the top of the well stem. The icon
will be either:

• An upwards-pointing cone indicating the well is currently producing.

The cone will be colored purple.
• A downwards-pointing cone indicating the well is currently being used
as an injector. The cone will be colored according to the colors
associated with the saturations by the TERNARY_LEGEND ORDER
config file entry (by default red for gas, green for oil, blue for water).
• Two opposing cones indicate that the well is closed.
• A flat gray disk indicates the well is shut in.

Chapter 7-46 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

The Show All Wells check-box toggles between displaying all wells and just
those connected to the currently displayed cells.

The Level Of Detail radio buttons allow selection of low, medium or high
resolution. The higher the level of detail the better the wells will look but they
will take longer to draw.

DISTORTION
This panel allows the reservoir cells to be artificially ‘thickened’ or the whole
reservoir to be ‘flattened’. Cells of very thin reservoirs may be artificially
‘thickened’ to make the cells more visible, and steeply dipping reservoirs may
be flattened to facilitate property distribution visualization. The Thickening
Factor varies the amount of cell thickening applied.

The process of thickening relies on sampling points from a top surface. This
sampling can give incorrect results on and around discontinuities (faults) and
may show up as spikes or troughs around the faults. The sampling can also be
quite slow, particularly with unstructured (PEBI) grids.

DISPLAY
This option provides a number of options for controlling the way the grid is
displayed.
Cells
Displays cells with color fill

Outlines
Displays cell outlines
Faces…
Opens a panel allowing the user to select which cell faces should be displayed

Display Inactive Cells

By default, only active cells are displayed. This option allows the user to show
the entire grid.

Inactive Cell Colour…

Opens a panel allowing the user to select the color for inactive cells.
Display Shale Breaks
This option will turn off the display of cell faces adjacent to inactive layers.
Take for example a shale break that is represented by a layer of impermeable

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-47

Using the Results Viewer

cells. Assuming these cells are inactive, they are not displayed with the
majority of simulation properties. This means that your model may be full of
thin undisplayed layers; each layer will have cell faces above and below it, the
faces of the active cells above and below. If these layers are very thin, these
faces are unneccessary to the point of being invisible when internal to the
model. By turning off Shale Breaks you turn off the display of these
potentially invisible faces. This reduces the amount of geometry to be
displayed and so can dramatically speed up interaction with the model.
Transparency
Opens a panel allowing the user to control the transparency of the color fill.

SET ACTIVE GRID

If more that one grid is loaded, this option allows the user to choose which
grid is to be displayed.

Editor menu
BOUNDARIES...
Boundaries are 2D polygons or rectangles that are used to define 3D volumes.
This option brings up an editing panel that lists the currently defined
boundaries and allows boundaries to be created, copied, edited or deleted.

Utilities menu
CREATE PROPERTY TYPE
This modal dialog provides options for creating new types of properties. Once
created, these property types are available for the creation of new properties.

Display menu

The Display menu allows the 3D model display to be configured. Many of the
options are duplicated on the vertical toolbar.

OBJECT APPEARANCE...
This opens the Object Appearance panel that contains a list of all objects that
have been requested for display in the 3D Viewer, as shown in Figure 7-12.
On this panel you can select which objects to view at any one time.
Objects
This column displays the names of the objects that are currently in the view.

Chapter 7-48 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

Visibility
The drop-down menus in this column allow you to either Hide or Show the
object.
Render mode
The drop-down menus in this column allow you to select how the objects will
be visualized in the viewer. The choices are dependent on the type of objects.
Most objects will have the following options:
• Lines - This shows the objects as a framework of lines.
• Surfaces - This shows the objects as solid surfaces.
• Cell outlines - This shows the objects with the cell outlines
superimposed on the surfaces.
Level of detail
The drop-down menus in this column allow you to specify the level of detail
required in the viewer. If Level of Detail is not applicable for a given object,
the entry will only show All.

Results Viewer – Controlling the view

57 ECLIPSE Office User Course

6 August 2001

Figure 7-12 Object Appearance panel

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-49

Using the Results Viewer

COLOR LEGEND
These options control the appearance of the color legend. Switching between
the normal horizontal legend and the ternary legend is automatic as you
choose the property to display.

Show color legend

This option toggles the color legend on or off.
Color legend editor
The Color Legend Editor allows you to edit the position and size of the
legend and also allows access to the individual property Color Map Editors.
These allow editing of the colors, markers and method used to generate the
colormap and will be discussed in detail later.

Object for color legend

If you have selected more than one grid, this panel allows you to choose which
grid is used to define the color legend.

VIEW STATISTICS…
This panel displays information about objects currently in the viewer.
Property Statistics
This panel displays statistical information about the currently displayed
property. Information from the sum of the selected cells to the mean, median
and standard deviation are given. All data is for the current report step only.
Grid Statistics
This panel displays information about the numbers of selected grid cells.
Well Statistics
This panel displays information about the grid wells at the current date.
Information includes how many wells are connected to the selected cells and
of those open, which are producers and which are injectors. The number of
connections attached to the selected cells is also given.

NORMALIZE
This menu item brings up a dialog panel allowing various parameters for
Normalization to be entered.

CENTER OF ROTATION/ZOOM
Use this option to define the center of rotation and zoom for the model. After
choosing the option, select the location within the model around which to
rotate and zoom. When you have chosen a valid position, confirmation is
given in the status line.

Chapter 7-50 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

RESET CENTER OF ROTATION/ZOOM

This option resets the center of rotation and zoom to the center of the model.

PERSPECTIVE
This option toggles the perspective projection on and off.

SET VIEW
This option allows the choice of six predefined viewpoints for the model.

User
This view is defined as the last view of the model defined by the mouse. The
default is 30 degrees above the horizontal, 60 degrees to the left and with the
model rotated 8 degrees around the Z axis.
Top
A view from above the model in the negative Z direction.
Bottom
A view from below the model in the positive Z direction.

Front
A view of the model from the front or positive Y direction.
Back
A view of the model from the back or negative Y direction.
Left
A view of the model in the left or positive X direction.
Right
A view of the model in the right or negative X direction.

FREEZE
This option allows several changes to be made before re-rendering (such as a
change of IJK slice as well as a change of timestep). Only one button is
visible, and when you click on it, it changes to the other type.

When Freeze is ON the button changes to the red traffic light symbol and the
mouse cursor changes to the "busy" cursor (an hourglass). The mouse cursor
change only happens when the mouse position is over the 3D Viewer window.
A message VIEW FROZEN appears in the middle of the viewer. Rotation,
scaling and translation have no effect when the view is frozen. However, it is

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-51

Using the Results Viewer

still possible to bring up new dialogs, change settings on the dialogs, run
commands, add new objects to the view, etc.

RUBBER BAND ZOOM

This option allows an area of the 3D Viewer to be "lassoed" with the mouse in
order to zoom in on a particular area.

When Rubber Band Zoom is invoked, the mouse cursor changes to a

magnifying glass; you define the first corner of the zoom box by clicking and
holding the mouse down, and then dragging the mouse to define the other
corner. You can perform further rubber band zooms if you wish. To exit
rubber band zoom mode, click on the toolbar button again or re-select the
menu item Rubber Band Zoom.

Each zoom is stored in a list, and it is possible to undo the zooms one at a time
– click on the second toolbar button, or select the Undo Rubber Band Zoom
menu item – or completely – click on the third toolbar button, or select the
Reset Rubber Band Zoom menu item. The Undo and Reset are available
during a zoom, as well as when zoom mode has finished.

When in Rubber Band Zoom mode some functions are disabled, such as Cell
picking, Set View, Normalization, etc. However, rotation and translation are
still possible.

PICTURE BORDER
This menu item brings up a dialog panel where various parameters for picture
borders in the 3D Viewer can be entered.

ROTATE
Object rotation
This panel allows the object to be rotated about the center of rotation in the 3D
Viewer.

The buttons in the single step box allow for horizontal and vertical rotation by
the rotation angle. The buttons in the animation box rotate the object through
360 degrees, using the specified number of iterations.

Chapter 7-52 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

NOTE: Object rotation is not the same as camera rotation performed with
the camera rotation panel. Firstly, object rotation is always about
the center of rotation/zoom and not the center of the object.
Secondly, when an object is rotated it continues to be lit from the
front.

NOTE: Object Rotation is not available with Windows 98.

Camera rotation
This panel allows the camera to be rotated about the objects in the 3D Viewer.
The buttons in the single step box allow for horizontal and vertical rotation by
the rotation angle. The buttons in the animation box rotate the objects through
360 degrees, stepping by the specified angle each time.

NOTE: Camera rotation is not the same as object rotation performed with
the mouse. Firstly, camera rotation is always about the center of the
object, and takes no note of the center of rotation/zoom. Secondly,
moving the camera does not move the directed light, so that objects
will continue to be lit from the original camera position.

LIGHTS
Displaying lights on the model produces highlights and shadows, creating a
more realistic view and emphasizing topological features such as faults.

CAUTION: The use of lighting can increase the time taken to display
the model. This decrease in performance can be very
significant when working with large models.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-53

Using the Results Viewer

In the Lighting panel, switch on the ambient lighting and individual lights one
to four by clicking their radio buttons. The model display will become brighter
as more lights are switched on. The exact behavior is machine-specific.

TITLES…
Show Titles
This option toggles the titles on or off.
Edit titles
This option allows you to add titles and annotation to your 3D view. You may
add as many titles as you like by using the Add Title button. The currently
selected title may also be removed by pressing the Delete Title button.
The position, size and alignment to start position for the currently selected title
may be changed using the Position, Font and Align Text to Position sections
respectively. The position sliders have extents of -1.0 to 1.0. Fonts and text
heights may be machine-dependent.
The Contents section displays the selected title text. The contents of the title
may be edited by simply typing into the text box. The drop-down list holds
keywords that are translated on screen to the value they represent. Select an
entry point in the title text with the cursor and select a keyword to add it to the
title.
Titles may be defined in advance within the config file.

AXES
Axes can be displayed and configured by this panel. The axes may be white or
colored; if colored, then the colors are the same as in the view icons for the
predefined viewpoints (Top, Bottom, Left etc.), with red for the X axis, green
for the Y axis and blue for the Z axis.

This panel also controls the bounding box, tick marks and tick labels.

The Axes Extents option allows you to toggle the axes extents between that of
the current selection and the whole model. The axes will update as the selected
extent changes, for example by changing threshold or slicer values.

XYZ EXAGGERATION
This option allows the application of a scale factor to the X, Y, and Z (height)
directions. Vertical exaggeration can be quickly applied to the model by

Chapter 7-54 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Using the Results Viewer

clicking on the “Vertical Stretch” and “Vertical Shrink” icons in

the toolbar.

STEREO
This option brings up a dialog panel with extra control over stereoscopic
viewing parameters.

On the PC it is essential to start up with a stereo-enabled viewer if stereo is

required. Stereo is enabled in the ECL.CFG (or CONFIG.ECL) file. Even if
stereo is enabled, it is not turned on by default, but there is a performance
penalty when a stereo-enabled viewer is used even if stereo is not turned on;
the degree of the performance penalty depends on the graphics card. There are
numerous different hardware configurations that can be used for stereo
viewing. Any PC graphics card that supports quad buffers for stereo through
OpenGL should work.

The stereo effect alternatively displays the left and right images. To view these
it is necessary to use a system such as StereoGraphics’ CrystalEyes. This
consists of glasses containing LCD shutters and an infra-red transmitter to
synchronize the opening and closing of the individual lenses with the image.

Preferences menu
SET EXTERNAL UNIT SYSTEM
This modal panel allows you to change the unit system with which data values
will be displayed. The unit system can be switched between field, metric and
laboratory. Property units, axes and data values on other panels will be
automatically updated to reflect the unit system change.

GRAPHICS OPTIONS
There is a choice of two renderers. The hardware renderer uses the
workstation platform’s native graphics libraries and hardware to draw objects
on the screen. The software renderer implements its own graphics model,
drawing objects into an X Window System image.

In general, the hardware renderer will be faster. However, many workstations’

native graphics facilities do not support all rendering features. If the hardware
renderer does not support a rendering feature like lights, switch to Software
Renderer.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 7-55

Using the Results Viewer

The software render may be slower to draw, but it implements more rendering
features than all but the most expensive color graphics workstations. On some
platforms, such as a simple color X terminal, the software renderer may be the
only renderer available.

FLIP X AXIS
This option reverses the X axis. This should only be used for non-ECLIPSE
grids with a different origin.

FLIP Y AXIS
This option reverses the Y axis. This should only be used for non-ECLIPSE
grids with a different origin.

ROTATION STYLE
While you are translating/rotating/zooming objects in the 3D Viewer, you can
use different methods to display the object before the final display.
Unchanged
All objects in the 3D Viewer are displayed and moved during
translation/rotating/zooming. No objects are hidden. Cell outlines are
especially time- consuming to translate, rotate and zoom in the Unchanged
mode.
Wire frame
Rather than displaying and moving all objects in the 3D Viewer, wire frames
for each grid are displayed during translation, rotation and zooming. Wells are
displayed as simple lines without well labels. The Wire frame option is less
demanding on the software than the Unchanged mode.
Bounding box
All objects are hidden from view during translation except for a bounding box
around each grid. This is the least demanding style.

OUTLINE CONTROL
When cell outlines are displayed, the lines are lifted slightly above the surface
towards the eyepoint to make them visible. If, however, the model contains
very thin cells, some lines may show through from the bottom surface. This
option allows you to control a scale factor for the lift. Using a smaller value
will reduce the tendency for lines to show through, although the lines may
then appear dashed when viewed at an oblique angle.

Chapter 7-56 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Chapter 8 Generating Printed Reports

Overview

The Report Generator offers the facility to extract reports and information
from the print (.PRT) and Summary (.SMSPEC) files generated by the
simulator. A list of all reports is presented for each report step and you can
select the ones to extract. The extracted reports will be displayed in a text
window and can be saved to file. ERRORS, WARNINGS, COMMENTS,
MESSAGES, STEPS and PROBLEMS output from the simulator can also be
viewed. This is similar to the grep command on UNIX machines.

The Report Generator can also interpolate summary vectors output from the
simulator. Totals can also be calculated. Vectors can be extracted from the
summary files and selected from a list. The output is in the form of a table that
can be output to a file or the clipboard (on PC) for input into a spreadsheet. A
plot is of tabular data also available. Also from the summary vectors
Economics calculations can be performed and generate a .CIP file to be
imported into Peep.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 8-1

Generating Printed Reports

Report Generator
• From Summary files:
– Original data
– Interpolation
– Calculate totals
– e.g. Field Oil Production :
• Average rate per year
• Cumulative Oil Production per
year
• From Print file:
– Extract specific reports, e.g.
• Utilities available: • Well reports
– Calculator • Material Balance reports
– Text Editor – Extract ERRORS, WARNINGS,
PROBLEMS, etc.

58 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 8-1 Report Generator features

The Report Generator allows the user to specify reports using various levels
of detail. The user can select reports for individual wells, groups, and regions.
The user can also select which summary vectors to include in a report and can
average and interpolate summary data to provide reports at specific times or
intervals.

The Report Generator also allows data from multiple runs to be collated into
a single report.

NOTE: A project need not be open for the Report Generator to be

accessible.

Chapter 8-2 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Generating Printed Reports

Report Generator

• Generate reports with various levels of detail

– Select wells, groups, regions
– Select any summary items
– Average/interpolate data (ie. monthly, quarterly)
– Ability to collate data and plots from any run within a
project
– Generate data for input to Peep

59 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 8-2 Report Generator level of detail

Report Generator main window

The Report Generator main window consists of the Input panel and the
Output panel, as shown in Figure 8-3. The user defines the type of report
wanted in the Input panel, then presses Generate Report.

After the first report has been generated, the Output panel is available. This
panel displays a list of all the reports generated and displays the selected
report. Here the user can view the report, edit the report as needed, and save
the report to a file. In addition, if the data is such that a plot or a table can be
created of the data, these options will also be available.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 8-3

Generating Printed Reports

Report Generator Main Window

• Output Window
– View report
– Edit report
– Save Report

• Input Window
– Define type of report
– Define scope of report

60 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 8-3 Report Generator Main Window

Command Bar menu items

File menu
OPEN CURRENT CASE
Opens files from the current case. It is greyed out if no case is opened.

There are two submenus with this option.

Summary
Opens the summary SPEC file for the current case. A Summary Selection
module, similar to Figure 7-3, is then displayed so that you can select the
required vectors for reporting.
PRT
Opens the PRT file for the current case.

Chapter 8-4 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Generating Printed Reports

OPEN SUMMARY
Displays a file open dialog box with a list of summary SPEC files with the
extension (F)SMSPEC.

NOTE: Only one SMSPEC file can be selected at a time.

Each selected file will be opened and the data will be read. A Summary
Selection module, similar to Figure 7-3, is then displayed so that you can
select the required vectors for reporting.

OPEN PRINT
Displays a File open... dialog box with a list of PRT files with the extension
.PRT. You can select one file at a time.

OPEN OFFICE REPORT

Displays a File open... dialog box with a list of ORF files with the extension
.ORF. You can select one file at a time. The Office Report Files (ORF) are
written out by the Report Generator for the selected summary vectors or
extraction from the PRT file.

CLOSE
Closes and exits the Report Generator.

Report menu

The Report menu has two menu items:

• Input

This is used to define the type of Summary and Print reports desired. Press
the Generate Report button to generate a report.

• Output

This displays the generated reports.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 8-5

Generating Printed Reports

INPUT…
This page is displayed after loading a SUMMARY or a PRT file. There are
two fields displayed:

Case Names
A list of the root names of the loaded files (SUMMARY and PRT files).
Selecting a case name changes the report type depending on what type of file
was loaded.
Report
A type of report to be generated. Four types are available in the drop down
list:
• Summary
Generates reports of summary vector data in tabular form.
• Economics
Generates economics reports to be used in Peep.
• PRT Report
Extracts and displays reports from the print (PRT) file.
• Errors
Reports the Errors, Warnings,...etc extracted from the PRT file.

OUTPUT…
Displays the Output panel. This panel is available anytime after the first
report has been generated. This panel consists of two columns. The left side of
the display shows a list of the reports of various types. The right hand side
displays the report. You should select the type of report from the radiobutton
control to view the list of that report type. Selecting one of the listed reports
places the report in the viewer on the right hand side. The radiobutton control
lists three types of reports:
Summary
Displays a list of summary reports that have been generated.
PRT
Displays a list of reports extracted from the print (.PRT) file. This category
also includes any Error… type reports.
Economics
Displays list of generated Peep reports to be written to a CIP file.

Chapter 8-6 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Generating Printed Reports

Panel Buttons
New Window
This button displays the selected report in a separate text window. Note that
printing and editing are available from this window.

Remove Report
This button removes the selected report from the list.
Plot
This button produces line plots of the vectors for the selected reports. Only
enabled for the Summary reports.

Table
This button displays a table of vectors for the selected report. Only enabled for
the summary reports.

Write
This button writes the selected report to a text file. In the case of the
Economics report, the report is written to a CIP file type.
Help
Displays the help pages for the output window.

Utility menu
CALCULATOR
Opens the calculator panel allowing the user to write their own scripts to
perform calculations on the loaded summary vectors.

Help menu
ON MENUS
Contains help on menubar options.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 8-7

Generating Printed Reports

Report Types

Report Generator
Summary Report Input Panel

61 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 8-4 Summary Report input panel

Summary

The Summary report selection panel is shown in Figure 8-4. The panel fields
are described below:

Original Vectors
This is the default. Reporting time steps for the selected keywords read from
the summary files. Days/Months/Years can be selected. The rest of the fields
are disabled in this case.
Interpolate
Performs linear interpolation of the time steps of the selected vectors with
respect to Days/Months/Years. The rest of the fields are enabled and can be
used with this option. You can select the starting report date.

Chapter 8-8 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Generating Printed Reports

Average
Reports monthly/yearly average rates. You can enter a starting report date
(day, month, year) in the fields to select the required starting date. Only Month
and Year can be selected.

Sum
Reports a monthly/yearly summation of the rates. A starting report date (day,
month, year) can be entered in the fields to select the required starting date.
Only Month and Year can be selected.
Time interval
Time spacing in days/months/years.

Report Date
Selection of the report starting day/month/year.

For the Average and Sum calculations, if you select a day/month less than the
starting simulation day/month, the calculation will start from the simulation
starting date to the end of the year, and then calculate the monthly/ yearly
rates.

For example, if the simulation starting date is 19/10/1982 and you enter
1/1/1982, then the calculation for the yearly summation will start from
19/10/1982 to 31/12/1982, and run on a yearly calendar from then on.

Calculate Totals
Calculates totals for the selected rates keywords. There are three buttons to
select from:
• No - default for not calculating the totals.
• Only - calculates totals only without the rates.
• With Rates - calculates totals and rates.

Economics

This section is used to generate Peep script files (*.CIP) from ECLIPSE
SUMMARY files (*.SMSPEC) using ECLIPSE Office. The input panel for
an Economics report is shown in Figure 8-5.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 8-9

Generating Printed Reports

Report Generator
Economics Report Input Panel

62 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 8-5 Economics Report input panel

For each quantity you wish to report in the .CIP file you need a corresponding
vector in your SUMMARY file:

Quantity Summary Vector

Oil Production FOPR or FOPT
Water Production FWPR or FWPT
Gas Production FGPR or FGPT
Water Injection FWIR or FWIT
Gas Injection FGIR or FGIT
Number of Production Wells Operating FMWPR
Number of Injection Wells Operating FMWIN
Number of Wells Drilled FMWDR or FMWDT
Number of Workovers FMWWO or FMWWT

Table 8-1 CIP quantities and corresponding ECLIPSE vectors

Chapter 8-10 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Generating Printed Reports

Procedure: Generating an Economics (Peep) report

1. Select Economics from the drop-down list for Reports.
2. In the General tab, specify the Case Name and the frequency at which you
want data to be reported (Monthly or Yearly).
We recommend that you leave the Model Name defaulted to ECLIPSE and
the Global Parm Name set to ECLIPSE Default. However, you may change
the Model and Global Parm Name to any valid Peep parameters (for further
information see Peep documentation).
3. In the Production tab, use the first column of input to specify the vectors you
wish to use to calculate the reported quantities. Leave it empty for quantities
you do not wish to report in the .CIP file. Use the second column to specify
whether you want to report Rates or Vol umes in the .CIP file.
For example, in the panel below the vector FOPR is used to calculate and
report oil production volumes; FGPT is used to calculate and report gas
production rates.
Water production, water injection, and gas injection are not reported. FMWPR
and FMWIN are used to output the number of production and injection wells
that are operating, respectively. When reported, the injected gas quantity is
always output as volume.

4. In the Price tab, specify the oil and gas price that is reported in the .CIP file. If
you choose not to output the price (by setting Method: Ignore), Peep uses a
value from its database once the .CIP file is imported.
5. In the OpCost tab, specify the operating cost quantities that you wish to export
to Peep.
6. In the CapEx tab, choose the vectors you want to use to calculate the number
of drilling and workover events. (You may also opt not to report these
quantities.)
Also, specify the drilling and workover cost.

7. Click on the Generate Report button at the bottom of the Input panel to
calculate and report the quantities that you requested.
This does not create the .CIP file. It generates an output panel where you can
examine the reported quantities before finally writing them to the .CIP file.

8. Click on Output at the top of the Report Generator to go to the Output panel
and check the report.
9. Click on the Write button to write the .CIP file.
10. In the Write PEEP File panel, specify the location and name of the .CIP file
and click on Save.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 8-11

Generating Printed Reports

Print (PRT)
Opens a panel to extract reports selection from the PRT file, as shown in
Figure 8-6. If more than one PRT file is read, then a panel displaying the
names of the files read will appear to select from.

Report Generator
Print (PRT) Report Input Panel

63 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 8-6 Print (PRT) Report input panel

The PRT report panel lists all of the report steps listed in the PRT file. The
middle column lists the reports available from that report step. The frequency
of the reports and the available reports are controlled using RPTSCHED and
the various time stepping keywords (e.g. DATES, TSTEP) in the Schedule
section of the Data Manager. The user selects a report (only one report can be
selected at a time), then selects the report or reports desired and presses Add
to List.

The selected reports are then moved to the Selection List. You can select any
combination of PRT reports to consolidate into a single report.

Chapter 8-12 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Generating Printed Reports

Once all the desired reports are listed in the Selection List, press the
Generate Report button. As with the other report types, the results are listed
in the Output panel.

Errors, warns...
Opens a panel displaying the name of the PRT file and the available selection
from Errors, Warnings, etc, as shown in Figure 8-7. You should tick the
required box for reporting, then press Generate Report.

Report Generator
Errors Report Input Panel

64 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 8-7 Errror Report input panel

If more than one PRT file is read, then a panel displaying the names of the
files read will appear to select from.

NOTE: If a field is greyed out it means that there are no reports of that type
in the PRT file.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 8-13

Generating Printed Reports

BEST PRACTICE: Immediately after each case is run, open the Report
Generator and check the Errors, warns… list. This
is an easy way to determine if the run had data or
numerical problems that might lead to erroneous
results.

Chapter 8-14 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Chapter 9 Performing Sensitivity
Studies

Overview

It is possible to define a set of runs from a single dataset. The runs may be
submitted on a number of different machines. These runs could be launched
using different environments; for example, PVM. The Multiple Sensitivities
section of the Data Manager allows the user to manipulate previously
specified sensitivity runs.

The sensitivity runs are actually defined in the Schedule section, using the
Multiple Runs or Sensitivities buttons associated with certain keywords that
allow this function, as shown in Figure 9-1.

Setting up multiple runs

To set up multiple runs, you can change the parameters for the keywords in
the different sections of the dataset, currently these are limited to certain
keywords in the Schedule section: COMPDAT, GCONINJE, GCONPROD,
GECON, GRUPINJE, GRUPPROD, WCONINJE, WCONPROD,
WECON.

Multiple runs and sensitivities are specific to their keywords. Therefore it is

not possible to create a sensitivity case where various parameters from, say,
both WCONPROD and WECON are combined in a single run.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 9-1

Performing Sensitivity Studies

Multiple Sensitivities
• Allows you to define multiple runs from
the same case automatically

• Modes
– Multiple Runs
– Sensitivites
• Accessed through Data
Manager>Schedule
– Only supported for COMPDAT,
GCONINJE, GCONPROD, GECON,
GRUPINJE, GRUPPROD,
WCONINJE, WCONPROD, WECON

65 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 9-1 Keyword Editor panel supporting Multiple Sensitivities

Multiple Runs

Selecting Multiple Runs opens a panel similar to Figure 9-2. The columns in
each panel will differ with the keyword selected and represents the list of
variables that you can change. In some cases, you may need to scroll to the
right or enlarge the panel to see all the sensitivity parameters.

Each row in the table represents a run, and you can enter values for any of the
listed variables or leave them blank. A blank value uses the default value, or
the value entered in the Keyword Editor panel for the keyword.

You can view more rows in the table by either scrolling down or enlarging the
panel. If you need even more rows, they can be added by pressing the +
symbol in the upper right corner of the table. Only table lines with data will
actually be used, so there is no need to delete any unused rows.

Chapter 9-2 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Performing Sensitivity Studies

Multiple Sensitivities
Multiple Runs Panel

66 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 9-2 Multiple Runs panel (WCONPROD shown)

Procedure: Setting up multiple runs (WCONPROD example)

1. Open a project and import a dataset if data is not already present
2. Open the Data Manager and select the Schedule section.
3. From the list of events, select any Well Production Control event.
(WCONPROD).
4. In the Multiple Runs panel (Figure 3.25), each row represents a run. The
parameter names are listed at the top of the table, for example Oil Rate. The
first row in the table is the base run. The user can then define other runs
(rows) with different parameters. If the table is filled, additional rows may be
added by pressing the “+” symbol at the top-right of the table.
5. Click on the OK button to save these values and exit the panel. If the panel is
displayed again the selected values will be displayed and you can change
them if required.
6. From the File menu select Save or Save As... to save the changes to the
ECLIPSE Office MULT include file. The same steps can be repeated with other
keywords and different time steps.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 9-3

Performing Sensitivity Studies

Sensitivities

Sensitivities are different from Multiple Runs in that you only define the
number of runs to create and the range of the values you want to vary.
ECLIPSE Office then calculates the desired equally spaced values within the
range.

When the Sensitivities button is pressed in the Keyword Editor panel of a

supported keyword, a sensitivity panel, similar to Figure 9-3, will open. The
rows in each panel will differ with the keyword selected and represents the list
of variables that you can change. In some cases, you may need to scroll up or
down or enlarge the panel to see all the sensitivity parameters.

You can perform a sensitivity run on any combination of the parameters listed,
even if it is defaulted in the base keyword. You should enter a range for each
value that you want to vary, and the Number of Runs that you want to create.

The sensitivity runs are created by subdividing each specified range in to ‘n’
equally spaced increments. The individual runs are then created by matching
each index value, up to ‘n’. You can reverse the order of the Lower and
Upper range values (e.g. enter 2000 for Lower and 1000 for Upper) in order
to create inversely proportional properties in runs (such as with flow rates and
BHPs).

Chapter 9-4 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Performing Sensitivity Studies

Multiple Sensitivities
Sensitivities Panel

67 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 9-3 Multiple Sensitivities panel (WCONPROD shown)

Procedure: Setting up sensitivities (WCONPROD example)

1. Open a project and import a dataset if data is not already present
2. Open the Data Manager and select the Schedule section.
3. From the list of events, select any Well Production Control event.
(WCONPROD).
4. In the Multiple Sensitivities panel, the data is defined in a slight different way.
The user specifies the number of runs (“n”) and minimum and maximum
values for each parameter. The order can be reversed to allow inversely
proportional parameters. ECLIPSE Office then automatically creates runs by
calculating “n” equally spaced values for each parameter.
5. Click on the OK button to save and calculate the mean values for the selected
parameters.
6. From the File menu select Save or Save As... to save the changes to the
ECLIPSE Office MULT include file. The same steps can be repeated with other
keywords and different time steps.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 9-5

Performing Sensitivity Studies

Removing a run / Creating a case

If a MULT include file has been created you can remove a run or create a case
from a particular run. Select the Multiple Sensitivities section of the Data
Manager. A module will be displayed as shown in Figure 9-4.

Data Manager - Multiple Sensitivities

Section

68 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 9-4 Multiple Sensitivities section main window

The information displayed is read from the MULT Include file. The first list
displays the number of runs. The selected row will display the list of time
steps and the corresponding keywords for each run.

NOTE: The values are not editable via this panel. Go the appropriate
keyword in the Schedule section and press the appropriate Multiple
Sensitivities button.

Chapter 9-6 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Performing Sensitivity Studies

Selecting a run and pressing the Remove Run button will remove the run
from the MULT include file. If required all the files that belong to that run will
be removed.

Pressing the Create Case button will create a new case for the selected run.

NOTE: The first run cannot be removed nor can it create a case, since it
represents the base case.

CAUTION: Changes made in this panel are not saved until the user
saves the updated MULT file by using File>Save or
File>Save As…

Submitting multiple runs

This section describes how to submit multiple runs. Multiple runs may be
submitted at the same time in many cases. This section assumes familiarity
with the Run Manager as described in Chapter 6.

When the Run Manager is initially opened the “Number of Simulations”

field is set to the number of runs associated with the given case, however, only
one job stream is added by default.

Depending on the type of computer and the run environment settings, it is

possible to add additional job streams so that multiple runs can proceed
simultaneously. To add a job stream, simply type in the number of job streams
to be added in the “Job streams to be added” field of the Run Manager main
window.

The run environments and their capabilities and limitations are discussed
below.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 9-7

Performing Sensitivity Studies

NON-PVM LOCAL
The simulation runs can only be executed on the local host. Results can be
monitored while the runs are in progress.

UNIX
Single and multiple runs - multiple job streams can be used.

PC
Single and multiple runs - one job stream only. Multiple runs are queued and
run sequentially.

NON-PVM REMOTE
The simulation runs can be executed only on remote hosts. Results cannot be
monitored while the simulator is running as the files will only be transferred at
the end of the runs.

UNIX
Single and multiple runs - multiple job streams can be used.

PC
Single and multiple runs - multiple job streams can be used, however, if the
remote machines are PCs then each remote machine can only have one job
stream.

PVM
This is probably the most effective way to submit the runs on remote hosts.
PVM must be installed and running on the host machine as well as all remote
machines. The simulation runs can be executed on the local and remote hosts.
Results can be monitored while the runs are in progress.

UNIX
Single and multiple runs - multiple job streams can be used.

PC
Single and multiple runs - multiple job streams can be used.

Log messages will inform you about the status of each run. Results can be
monitored as soon as the results start to come back from the simulator.

Chapter 9-8 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Performing Sensitivity Studies

Controlling the runs, like terminating or holding a run, etc., is possible as

discussed in Chapter 6.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 9-9

Performing Sensitivity Studies

Chapter 9-10 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Chapter 10 Understanding the
Unstructured Gridder

Overview

The Unstructured Gridder module is an optional module in ECLIPSE Office

that offers a graphical interface for generating 2.5D PEBI grids.

This module allows you to enter:

• Reservoir boundary
• Well tracks (for vertical and horizontal wells)
• Perforations
• Faults
• Constant property values
• Property maps

A PEBI grid is automatically generated to honor all the features, and the grid
can be modified around any of the features or in the reservoir bulk.

If a Cartesian grid already exists for the case, you can easily convert this to a
PEBI grid without importing maps or other data.

NOTE: The Unstructured Gridder is also called PetraGrid and requires a

valid PetraGrid license in order to operate.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-1

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Unstructured Gridder
• PetraGrid
– Generate 2.5D PEBI
grids
• Data sources
– Property Maps
– Boundaries
– Constant Props
– Wells/Perfs
– Faults
– Existing Cartesian
grids

69 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 10-1 Unstructured Gridder window

Using the Unstructured Gridder

The data is input using options under the Create and Edit menus. The grid is
then constructed using either the Grid>Generate Grid or the Grid>Generate
Properties option. The grid is viewed using a 2D Viewer window.

All features currently in the model are shown in the Reservoir Data Tree. The
selected item is shown in red, and is the one that will be edited if the
Edit>Feature... menu option is selected.

Volumes, wells, faults and dividers are shown on the Reservoir - Areal View.
These features can be edited by double clicking on them in the Areal View. In
Edit Point mode, obtained by using the Edit>Edit Point menu option, these
features can be moved by dragging points.

Chapter 10-2 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Contours, scatter data, perforations and the PEBI grid are also shown. These
features cannot be edited graphically.

Wells, perforations and layers are displayed in the Cross Section window.

NOTE: No graphical editing can be done on the Cross Section window.

The PEBI grid can be shown on the Areal view, or for rotated PEBI cells on
the Cross Section. Simulation layers, or Z divisions, will be displayed on the
Cross Section (on the Areal view for rotated PEBI cells) when the PEBI grid is
displayed.

Unstructured Gridder
• Defining the reservoir properties
– Volumes – think of these like regions…
• Primary – extent of the grid
• Secondary – anything you want
– Maps – contour or mesh maps
– Constant Properties – assignable to each volume

• Heirarchy
– Map
– Constant for secondary volume
• If more than one, use ‘Creation Time’
– Constant for primary volume
70 ECLIPSE Office User Course
7 August 2001

Figure 10-2 Property Handling in PetraGrid

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-3

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Properties

The reservoir has a primary volume, which defines the extent of the model.
The primary volume has a constant properties table that defines the number of
layers and the property values for each layer. Maps can be attached to the
primary volume (by first creating layers), and these override the values defined
in the constant properties table.

The primary volume may have secondary volumes that overlay it. Secondary
volumes may also have constant properties tables. Properties for secondary
volumes may be left undefined, but if they are defined then within the
secondary volume they override values defined for the primary volume.

The value of a property at a point in a layer is obtained from the primary

volume by first looking for a map of the property attached to the layer. If a
map is found then it is sampled to get the property value, otherwise the value
is obtained from the property table.

If a point is enclosed by a secondary volume, the value of a property at that

point is obtained from the constant properties table of the secondary volume.
If the property is undefined for the volume then it is obtained from the primary
volume.

If a point is enclosed by two or more secondary volumes then properties at that

point are obtained from the enclosing secondary volume with the highest value
for ‘Creation Time’. Secondary volumes are assigned a ‘Creation time’, which
must be unique.

Maps

To use a permeability map with no anisotropy, set the map up as a Perm-X

map. If no Perm-Y map is defined then both X and Y permeability are
obtained from the Perm-X map.

Chapter 10-4 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Unstructured Gridder
• Gridding
– Domains gridded independently in the following order
• Horizontal wells
• Boundaries
• Faults/Hard Dividers
• Vertical Wells
– Order can be changed
– Local Grids
• Wells (radial) and Fractures (cartesian)
– Bulk Grids
• Control type and center point

71 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 10-3 PEBI Gridding Heirarchy

Gridding

Features are gridded in the following order:

• Horizontal wells
• Boundary
• Faults
• Vertical wells

This order can be changed via the Gridding Order panel accessed from the
main volume Grid Controls panel.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-5

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

CAUTION: Two features that intersect or pass close to one another

may not grid correctly. The exceptions to this are two faults
or a fault and the boundary (dividers are gridded as faults).

WARNING: Faults crossing a horizontal well will not be gridded

correctly.

Local grid

A local grid is defined around wells and fractures. By default a vertical well
will have a radial grid around it; other features will have a cartesian grid
around them.

Controls for the local grids are accessed by editing the feature and selecting
the Grid Controls sub panel. Local grid settings can be reset using the Grid>
Reset Grid Controls menu option. If a feature is added or moved, the extent
of all local grids will be checked. The extent will be reduced, where necessary,
to about half the distance to the nearest other feature.

Bulk grid

The primary volume has a grid style defined. It may also have a well defined
for it to center on. This is usually used to have a circular grid style around a
vertical well with a radial local grid. In this case if the local grid controls for
the well are changed, the settings for the volume will be changed to match.
The grid size along a fault is set as close as possible to the bulk grid size at the
same point.

Grid centers

The PEBI grid is generated as follows:

Chapter 10-6 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

• The volumes are gridded by first generating bulk grid centers, which are
placed according to the grid style.
• Within each local grid region new grid centers are generated according
to the type of feature and the control settings for the region. The original
bulk grid centers in the region are ignored.
• PEBI cells are constructed around the grid centers.
• The cells around the bulk grid centers are then ‘smoothed’ to reduce the
difference in size of neighboring cells. The number of smoothing
iterations is set on the volume grid control panel.

Additional bulk grid centers (user points) may be generated, and may be
displayed and edited graphically. If the number of smoothing iterations for the
volume is set to zero then the PEBI cells should each enclose one grid center,
except in the local grid regions around features.

Unstructured Gridder
• Generating a PEBI Grid
– Generate local grids
• Calculate cell centers
• Construct PEBIs
– Merge domains
+
– Smooth
• Reduce occurrence of
small cells next to big
cells

72 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 10-4 PEBI Grid Generation

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-7

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Reservoir Data Tree

Each feature in the reservoir is listed in the Reservoir Data Tree listed to the
left of the main window, as shown in Figure 10-5. Each feature has a control
panel that is used to enter information about the feature.

Unstructured Gridder
• Reservoir Data Tree
– Reservoir
• XY or XZ
– Boundary
• No Flow or Constant Pressure
• Sublayers for
– Constant Props
– Layers
– Maps
– Well
– Fault
– Dividers/Sub-volumes
73 ECLIPSE Office User Course
7 August 2001

Figure 10-5 Reservoir Data Tree

Reservoir node

This option includes information about the reservoir name and whether the
PEBI grids are to be produced in the horizontal (XY) or vertical (XZ) plane. It
is best to use PEBI cells in the vertical plane for modeling transients in
horizontal wells. If this is selected then it is possible to have the gridder ignore
layer boundaries.

A reservoir consists of a primary volume to which constant properties, layers

and property maps can be attached. The primary volume can be overlaid with

Chapter 10-8 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

multiple intersecting secondary volumes, to which constant properties can be

attached.

Primary volume node

This option includes information about the volume name and geometrical
attributes together with buttons to control gridding, layering and pressure
center placement.

External boundary type

The boundaries of the primary volume can be No Flow or Constant Pressure.
The latter is modeled by attaching a large aquifer to the cells in contact with
the edge.

Grid controls
This controls the grid style used in the interior of the volume. These grid styles
can be uniform or ‘expanding’ and centered on a well of interest.

Uniform grids are specified with fixed x, y dimensions and can be one of the
following styles:

• Hexagonal
• Rectangular

Expanding grids are specified with growth factor from some location out to a
uniform grid boundary beyond which no further growth occurs, The grid style
can be one of the following:

• Variable
• Circular
• Elliptical

TIP: Circular and elliptical grid styles should only be used with models
with one well. The well grid style should be set to radial.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-9

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Additionally the pressure point distribution can be smoothed to discourage

large PEBI cells from being adjacent to small ones (to reduce the effect of
numerical dispersion). This smoothing is achieved by explicitly traversing the
points and repositioning each one to the average of its nearest neighbors.
Smoothing is turned off by default for regular grids.

Finally the angle of orientation of the pattern can be set. This is useful for
aligning the grid with a horizontal well.

Z divisions
This controls how the geological layers are subdivided in this volume. Each
geological layer can be split into divisions, which can be split into
subdivisions. The subdivisions are the layers used by the simulator.

Well node

This contains the coordinates of the well.

Well track
Deviated vertical wells are not supported at present.

Effective Wellbore volume

This is to be interpreted as the volume that contributes to well bore storage
phenomena.

Reference Depth
The well BHP value will be corrected to this depth.

Grid controls
This controls the type of local grid used around the well. It is vitally important
to have small grid blocks near the well in order to model the transient
response. The following parameters control the grid:
• Grid style
If a Radial style is chosen then the number of theta and radial divisions
can be set. If another style is chosen, the local grid will be a single cell
around the well. For a Single Cell style, the well is completed in a single
cell with ‘radius’ equal to the value in the Radius field. For the Bulk
Cell style, gridding the cell radius is the same as that for the main
volume.

Chapter 10-10 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

• Radius
Outer radius of local grid region.
• Radial cells, sectors/sides
The number of radial and azimuthal divisions within the local grid, or
the number of sides of the single cell.

Fault node

The coordinates of the fault and the transparency of each segment of the fault
may be edited. Also the maximum cell spacing along the fault can be changed.

Property node

A table of constant properties for each layer in the reservoir is shown. Data in
this table is used as the default for layer properties in the absence of map
information. For two-phase simulation the different rock property tables are
assigned to each layer. In this case the ‘Satnum’ saturation table index to be
used for the layer is included in the table.

The value of a property at a point in the reservoir is found by first looking in

the constant property table of any secondary volume enclosing the point then
by looking for a property map, finally by looking in the constant property table
of the primary volume.

The effective Tops value for the reservoir is also input in this panel.

Limitations

Well trajectories

Deviated wells are only supported as deviated horizontal wells. Deviated

vertical wells are not supported.

Horizontal wells may be deviated, but will be modeled as a series of

horizontal sections. Horizontal wells do not have a radial grid around them
and transients for these wells will not be modeled accurately.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-11

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Anisotropy

In general PEBI grids can only be applied to isotropic models. The

unstructured gridder supports anisotropic models with a constant Kx/Ky ratio
(or for PEBI cells in the XZ plane a constant Kv/Kh ratio per layer). This is
done by generating the PEBI grid in scaled space where the Y coordinates are
scaled by Kx ⁄ Ky . This ensures that the cell boundaries in the modified PEBI
grid are normal to the permeability vector.

NOTE: For a fully anisotropic model the inter cell transmissibilities are
calculated using a CVFE method. This is only supported for a
single-phase model.

Unstructured Gridder
• PEBI Limitations
– Wells
• Deviated wells modelled as horizontal wells
• Horizontal well transient flow may not be modelled correctly
– Anisotropy
• Constant Kx/Ky ratio only
– Contouring
• Problems with values > 10^5 feet – use a UTM offset
– Others
• No sloping faults or hydraulic fractures
• Property edits lost after re-grid
• Picking and editing only for LGR parent cells
• Grid Coarsening is not shown

74 ECLIPSE Office User Course

7 August 2001

Figure 10-6 PEBI Limitations in ECLIPSE Office

Chapter 10-12 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Contouring

The mapping and contouring subsystem will not work correctly for feature
coordinates greater than about 10^5 feet. If you intend to use maps and your
data is in ASCII files in UTM coordinates, you should set the UTM offset
fields to specify an amount to subtract from the X and Y coordinates of
features as they are read from file, so that the displayed coordinates have a
maximum range of 10^5 feet. UTM offsets apply to metric maps only.

NOTE: Sigma maps are not supported for Dual Porosity cases.

Other limitations
• Sloping faults are not supported.
• Hydraulic fractures are not supported.
• Property edits are lost after a re-grid operation (other than Update
Transmissibilities).
• Grid coarsening is not displayed.
• Cell picking and editing are only supported for LGR parent cells.

Command Bar menu items

File menu
CLEAR
Deletes the current PEBI reservoir description, leaving the PEBI module in a
state to rebuild another description.

SAVE
Saves the current grid to keywords in the Grid section. Well data is written to
the Schedule section.

SAVE AS…
Saves the current grid to keywords in the Grid section as a new file. Well data
is written to the Schedule section as a new file as well.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-13

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

IMPORT ASCII…
Volumes...
Reads the outer boundaries of volumes from a file. The default file extension
is.ZON. The unstructured gridder supports four formats:
• X1, Y1, X2, Y2 - with new volume started when X1, Y1 does not equal
previous X2, Y2.
• X, Y - with marker card delimiting each volume.
• X, Y, ID.
• X, Y, Name.

Vertical wells...
Reads the location and trajectory of vertical wells from a file. The default file
extension is .WEL. Five formats are supported
• X, Y, ID.
• X, Y, MD, TVD - with marker card delimiting each well.
• MD, TVD, X, Y - with marker card delimiting each well.
• X, Y, TVD, MD - with marker card delimiting each well.
• MD, X, Y, TVD - with marker card delimiting each well.

True vertical depths (TVD) are used for the well depth coordinates, measured
depths (MD) are ignored.

Horizontal wells...
Reads the location and trajectory of horizontal wells from a file. The default
file extension is .WEL. Formats are as for vertical wells.
Faults...
Reads the location and path of vertical faults from a file. The default file
extension is .FLT. Four formats are supported:
• X1, Y1, X2, Y2 - with new fault started when X1, Y1 does not equal
previous X2, Y2.
• X, Y - with marker card delimiting each fault.
• X, Y, ID.
• X, Y, Name.

Chapter 10-14 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Importing property data

When reading properties from a file the external units for value can be set.
The data will be converted to the currently selected unit set and displayed in
the appropriate unit (not necessarily the same as the one used while reading).

The contour or scatter set coordinates can be expressed in Universal

Transverse Mercator (UTM) or in the current length unit. UTMs are assumed
to be in meters.

UTMs are normally very large and it is necessary to specify an origin as an

offset to retain numerical accuracy during the gridding and sampling
operations. This offset will be subtracted from all the coordinates prior to
display.

Contours...
Reads a set of contours from a file. The default file extension is .CNT. The
unstructured gridder supports three formats:
• X, Y, Property - with marker card delimiting each contour
• X, Y, Property, ID.
• ZYCOR (X, Y - with contours delimited by Marker, Property)
Scatter data...
Reads a property map in the form of a scatter set from a file. The default file
extension is .CNT. The only supported format is:
• X, Y, Property.
Mesh map...
Reads a property map in the form of a grid of mesh values from a file. The
default file extension is .Lnn where nn is the layer number with which the data
will be associated, for example, 01 is the first layer.

TIP: The file is assumed to consist of an ASCII file starting with a header
area followed by a grid of Nx * Ny values.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-15

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

You can select from a number of industry standard header formats. It is also
possible to specify how the grid is arranged (column or row order) and the
relative location of the mesh origin.

TIP: For a non standard header you can list the order in which the
recognized parameters appear in the header area.

EXPORT ASCII…
These options export a single feature, or a set of contours. The same formats
are supported as for the ASCII readers.
Volume...
Writes the outer boundary of a volume to a file. The default file extension is
.ZON.
Well...
Writes the location and trajectory of a well to a file. The default file extension
is .WEL.
Fault...
Writes the location and path of a vertical fault to a file. The default file
extension is .FLT.

Contours...
Writes a set of contours to a file. The default file extension is .CNT.
Scatter data...
Writes a scatter set to a file. The default file extension is .CNT.

PRINT PREVIEW...
This brings up a preview window showing approximately the final appearance
of the printer output using the current settings. Like the printing, it has two
modes, one where just the main workspace is printed, and one where all of the
window is printed.

PRINT SETUP (PC ONLY)

Allows selection of one of the default printers on the PC.

Chapter 10-16 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

PRINT LAYOUT...
This opens the Print Layout panel, which is used to specify various aspects of
the print output, especially the datestamp appearance. There are also controls
for aspect ratio and scaling of fonts.

PRINT TYPE…
This opens the Printer Drivers panel, which allows selection of the format in
which to store the graphics image. The various output options are specified in
the ECL.CFG file.

PRINT
There is a submenu associated with this option:
Print Window
This option prints all the contents of the plot window, which is the main graph
plus all the information windows and small graphs.
Print Graph
This option prints only the contents of the main plot window.
Print Pictures
This option prints all pictures to the specified printer.

SAVE TO BITMAP...
This will save the graph to a bitmap (.BMP) file. This type of file is suitable
for reading into many packages, and conversion into other image types, but
since it is only a bitmap, can be quite coarse and therefore produces a lower
quality image than saving a plot via printing to a file in PostScript, CGM or
other format.
Graph…
Saves only the main graph.

Whole Picture...
Saves both graphs to a single bitmap (.BMP) file. Note the discussion of the
bitmap format above.

CLOSE
Closes the Unstructured Gridder.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-17

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Edit menu
FEATURE...
Edits the currently highlighted feature on the Reservoir Data Tree.

Generally a data panel will be displayed appropriate to the item selected on the
tree.

DELETE FEATURE
Deletes the currently selected feature from the data tree.

COPY TO CLIPBOARD… (PC ONLY)

This option allows you to copy and paste graphs from ECLIPSE Office into
many other Windows programs. This option has three menu items:
Main Graph
This option copies only the main graph to the clipboard.

Whole Picture
This option copies both the Main Graph and the secondary (small) graphs to
the clipboard.

TIP: In the 2D viewer, the color legend actually resides in a different

window than the active graph. To include the color legend with your
graph, use the Graph>Add/Remove Components option to hide all
items except the active graph and the legend. Then use this option to
copy both the graph and legend to the clipboard as a single picture.
You can also use Whole Picture… option to save the picture as a
file.

EDIT POINT
Move a point around the current graph area, unconstrained in the X-Y plane.
On mouse down (when you press the mouse button) the nearest point on the
active plot will be selected. It will be moved to the position of mouse up
(where the mouse is released). To cancel the edit drag the mouse outside of the
plot area before releasing the button.

Chapter 10-18 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

X EDIT
Move a point around the current graph area in the X direction only. If data is
monotonic then it can not be edited to a point which would remove the
monotonicity.

Y EDIT
Move a point around the current graph area in the Y direction only.

APPLY
Edit options must have the changes fixed using this option before re-gridding.

UNDO
Before the current changes are applied, graphical edits can be undone using
this option. This option only works on the last feature which was edited.

View menu

OPTIONS…
Displays the Edit View Options panel allowing the display settings to be
altered. See the discussion of the 2D Viewer in Chapter 7 for details on the
usage of this feature.

HIGHLIGHT ACTIVE
If this option is checked the currently selected object will be displayed with
visible handles at the location of the nodes of the object. This is useful for
editing boundaries and faults, as only nodes can be moved.

REFRESH X-SECTION
Forces a regeneration of the cross section display.

ZOOM IN
Zooms in one step into the center of the plot area. The size of the zoom
depends on the settings in the Zoom Preferences panel. Plots may also be
zoomed and panned using the zoom box on the navigation graph.

ZOOM OUT
Unzoom the complete plot area into a rectangular portion of the plot. The
zoom goes out one step for each time the button is pressed, or the menu item
selected, the size of the step being adjustable through the Zoom Preferences
panel.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-19

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

RUBBERBAND ZOOM IN
Zoom into the current plot using a dragged box. To use this, after selecting the
menu option, place the cursor (which will change into a magnifying glass
symbol) over the grid. Click on one corner of your desired zoomed area, and
drag the mouse with the button held down to the opposite corner of the area.

UNZOOM COMPLETELY
Completely unzoom the plot. This displays the complete data range on the
main graph.

ZOOM PREFERENCES…
Opens a panel where zoom settings such as scope and step size can be set.

INVERT
Inverts the color scheme of the graph window so that, for example, dark
foreground graph colors on a light background become light on a dark
background.

Create menu
MAIN VOLUME
Creates or replaces the primary volume which defines the reservoir boundary,
and onto which a constant properties table, layers and maps will be attached.

NOTE: If there is no primary volume then a volume created by the toolbar

button will be the primary volume, otherwise it will be a secondary
volume.

Digitize
Creates a polygonal primary volume by digitizing. Use double click or press
to close the boundary.

Rectangle
Creates a rectangular primary volume by clicking on opposing corners on the
canvas.
Circle
Creates a circular primary volume by clicking on the centre and radius on the
canvas.

Chapter 10-20 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

VOLUME
Create a secondary volume which defines an area with distinct properties, and
onto which a constant properties table will be attached.

Digitize
Create a polygonal volume by digitizing. Double-click or hit Enter to close the
boundary.
Rectangle
Create a rectangular volume by clicking on opposing corners on the canvas.
Circle
Create a circular volume by clicking on the center and radius on the canvas.

FAULT
Creates a segmented fault by digitizing the track. Double-click or press Enter
to complete input.

DIVIDER
Hard
Creates a hard divider. A hard divider is a line that the PEBI grid will align
with. Use double click or press Enter to complete the divider.
Soft
Creates a soft divider. A soft divider is one that the PEBI grid will not align
with. Use double click or press Enter to complete the divider.

VERT. WELL
Creates a vertical well by clicking on the x, y position. Depth and perforation
data can be input later by editing the well.

HORI. WELL
Creates a horizontal well by clicking in the projection of its trajectory onto the
areal view. Double-click or press Enter to complete the well. Depth and
perforation data can be input later by editing the well.

CONST. PROPS.
Creates a constant properties table for the primary volume.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-21

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

NOTE: The Edit panel automatically pops up to collect the data.

LAYER
Adds a layer to the primary volume. Maps are attached to layers, so use this
option if data is to be read from maps.

NUMERICAL AQUIFER
Creates a numerical aquifer.

NOTE: The Edit panel automatically pops up to collect the data. The
aquifer must then be connected to an edge of the reservoir by setting
the external boundary type of that edge to the name of the aquifer.

MAP
Creates a map of the given type for the layer currently highlighted on the
reservoir data tree. Data can be loaded for the map by either digitizing in
contours or by reading contours or scatter data from file using the File | Import
ASCII option.
Tops
Creates a Tops map.
Thickness
Creates a thickness map.

NOTE: Thickness maps cannot be added to layers that already have a base
map defined.

Perm. X
Creates an X permeability map.
Perm. Y
Creates a Y permeability map.

Chapter 10-22 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Perm. Z
Creates a Z permeability map.

Porosity
Creates a porosity map.
Base
Creates a base map.

NOTE: Base maps cannot be added to layers which already have a

thickness map defined.

NTG
Creates an NTG map.

CONTOUR
Digitizes in a contour for the map currently selected on the Reservoir Data
Tree. Use double click or press to complete the contour.

NOTE: The edit panel automatically pops up to collect the contour value
and to allow the option of treating the contour as closed.

SCATTER
Click in a set of points to form or add to a scatter set for the map currently
selected on the Reservoir Data Tree. Use double click or press to complete
the set.

NOTE: The Edit panel automatically pops up to collect the scatter values in
a table.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-23

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Grid menu
GRID CONTROLS
Resets the grid controls for all faults or wells in the model. When new features
are created they will have these controls.

Generate grid
Generates pressure centers for any volume that does not have them and
generates the PEBI cells around them.
Generate properties
Generates pressure centers for any volume that does not have them and
generates the PEBI cells around them. It generates pore volumes of the cells
and calculates the transmissibility between neighbors. If the data is defined
from maps this option can take a reasonable amount of time.

CENTRES
Generate all
Regenerates PEBI pressure centers.

Selected Volume
Regenerate PEBI pressure centers for the volume currently selected on the
reservoir data tree.
Delete all
Deletes the PEBI pressure centers.

SHOW GRID REPORT

Creates a report after gridding showing which features have not been honored
by the grid, and giving an option to refine the grid by reducing the bulk size.

RESET GRID CONTROLS

Sets default grid controls and layer divisions for all grid items.

RESET DIVISIONS
Sets default layer divisions for the primary volume. It is automatically invoked
if a layer depth or thickness changes, or a perforation is edited.

Settings menu
MAP LIMITS...
Sets the X-Y limits of the display area (Areal View). The viewing area will
always be large enough to enclose all the features but it can be extended using

Chapter 10-24 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

this option. Mesh map limits (the area covered by the map/contouring grid)
can also be set via this menu option. If the mesh maps, which set their own
limits, have been read in, then the values will be read-only.

CROSS SECTION…
Displays a panel that allows you to control the location of the cross-section
line either by specifying end points or by snapping to a well. This item is only
active when the areal display is the main display (e.g. areal display on the left).

TIP: It is generally easier to move the cross-section graphically. Use the

Edit>Edit Point, Edit>X Edit and Edit>Y Edit menu items to move
the ends pf the corss-section line. The ends are moved by clicking on
the small boxes on each end of the line.

UTM CONTROLS...
Controls the offsets subtracted from X,Y coordinates during ASCII import
from file.

2D menu
PICK
Enters cell selection mode. If the Show Cell Probe option is also selected then
the Cell Probe panel will be displayed. This panel allows a list of initial and
recurrent properties to be selected and observed as different cells are selected
by clicking on them with the mouse. Options are available to inspect all layers
of the simulation grid and all timesteps of a recurrent property.

Individual cells can be selected using the left mouse button. To select more
than one cell hold down the Shift button while picking. In this mode the right
mouse button will de-select cells. The last cell selected will have its cell ID
and i, j, k value displayed in fields on the panel, and also in the status bar at
the bottom left of the window. If the Cell Probe panel is visible then the
selected properties of the last cell selected are displayed in the window at the
bottom of the panel. If not then the value of the current cell selected is
displayed in the status bar.

MEASURE
This selects the Measure mode in which the x, y, slope, and distance between
the drag start position and the current mouse position are reported.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-25

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

SHOW CELL PROBE

If this option is checked then selecting Pick will display the Cell Probe panel.

SELECT CELLS…
Rectangle
Digitise
Multiple cells may be selected by dragging out a rectangle over an area of the
grid or by digitizing a boundary (finishing with a double-click or pressing
Enter). The current selection is first cleared then cells selected if their centers
lie within the area indicated.

Options menu
ADD/REMOVE COMPONENTS...
This invokes the Graph Configuration panel. From this, you can add or
remove components, such as toolbars and small plots from the window.

MAIN TITLE SETTINGS…

Opens a panel where the properties of the title of the main or active graph can
be changed, such as fonts and colors.

SMALL TITLE SETTINGS…

Opens a panel where the properties of the title of the small graphs (if present)
can be changed, such as fonts and colors.

MODIFY GRAPH TITLE...

This brings up a simple panel in which you can edit the title of the main graph
active at the time.

GRAPH LEGEND STYLE...

This opens the Graph Legend Configuration panel, which can be used to
control the appearance of the legend at the top of the active graph, or even
whether it is present.

PLOT STYLE SETTINGS...

This invokes the Data Style panel for the currently active plot. Various style
settings for the appearance of the data (line, marker style and color) are
modified through this panel.

Chapter 10-26 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

X/Y AXIS SETTINGS...

This invokes the Axis Style panel for the axis displaying the current active
data, either X or Y, depending on menu option chosen. The many axis style
attributes are modified from this panel.

GRID SETTINGS...
The Grid Properties panel can be opened using this menu option. The grid
has a small number of settings, mostly related to the visibility of the grid itself,
and the current point, if defined.

Help menu
UNSTRUCTURED GRID MODEL…
Displays help pages for the Unstructured Gridder section.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Chapter 10-27

Understanding the Unstructured Gridder

Chapter 10-28 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Overview

The exercises for this course are designed to mimic the actual simulation
project workflow and use a common dataset. The purpose of these exercises
is to illustrate the use of ECLIPSE Office for simulation project management
as well as to show examples of common practical tasks. It is recommended to
perform the exercises in order; however, the data for each exercise contains a
copy of the project file that can be used as a starting point.

Project Directory Management

The data for this study is provided in a form of the recommended directory
structure for ECLIPSE Office projects. Since simulation projects often
generate large volumes of output, it is recommended to keep input data and
program output in separate folders, as shown in Figure EX- 1. When a specific
application, such as ECLIPSE Office, is launched, it should always be
launched from its own directory.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 1

Exercises

Exercise Problem Overview

• Organizing a Simulation Project

49 ECLIPSE Office User Course

25 July 2001

Figure EX- 1 Example of simulation project directory structure

Reservoir Description

The reservoir used for the examples is shown in Figure EX- 2. The Snark
reservoir consists of a dome structure split into four fault blocks.
Hydrocarbons are found in 5 geological layers.

The field was discovered in 1980. The well PRODUCER was the first
development well. Additional wells were drilled in 1980 and 1981. Water
production, believed to be from an aquifer, has been a problem in several
wells. An injection well was added to dispose of the produced water.

The goal of this project is to develop a reservoir model that matches the
known production from 1980-2000, and then analyze the following production
options:

1. Continuation of present operations to the economic limit of the field.

Exercises 2 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

2. Addition of another producer to increase ultimate recovery.

3. Move the injection to a location where it will contribute to increased

production by increasing areal sweep efficiency.

Exercise Problem Overview

• Structure
– 4 fault blocks
– 5 geological layers
• Discovery – 1980
– 5 wells (1 disposal)
• Task
– Reservoir Model
– History Match
– Predict
• Decline to Econ Limit
• Add another well
• Waterflood

76 ECLIPSE Office User Course

8 August 2001

Figure EX- 2 Exercise project structure

Exercise Data

The instructor will advise where the data for this project is loaded. Students
should copy the data from the original location to their local project directory.

The data for this course is located in:

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 3

Exercises

Exercise 1 Building a Base Case; Part 1 – Case and

Grid Definition

Introduction

This exercise will build a Black Oil model from scratch for use as a base case
in the study. It will focus on data manipulation in the Case Definition and Grid
sections in the Data Manager.

In this case, a simulation grid has been prepared based on the structure maps
using FloGrid. Constant porosity and permeability values will be used until
the results of recent core tests and log analysis are available.

Exercise Steps

Data preparation:

1. Create a project directory called snark in a convenient place.

2. Copy the entire contents and directory structure of the project data
directory to your local snark directory. The instructor will provide the
proper commands for your particular computing environment.

The command to copy the data is:

3. Create a sub-directory beneath the snark directory named office.

Open new project:

1. To begin, start ECLIPSE Office using one of the procedures described in

Chapter 1. Make sure that ECLIPSE Office is started in the office sub-
directory created above.

2. Select File > New Project.

3. Call the project Snark.

Exercises 4 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

4. Select File > Save Project to save the project file to disk.

5. In the main ECLIPSE Office panel, choose View > Display Model in
DM.

6. In the main ECLIPSE Office panel, choose View > Display Model in
Grid Section.

The ECLIPSE Office main window should look like Figure EX- 3.

Figure EX- 3 Snark project - initial case

Model definition

1. Click on Data to activate the Data Manager module (DMM).

2. Select Case Definition.

3. Select the General tab.

This tab is used to define the basic reservoir data. If you are defining a grid
manually, you must enter the grid dimensions here. However, if you are

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 5

Exercises

importing a grid keyword file that contains the SPECGRID keyword then the
dimensions can be left alone.

Select or enter the following data (leave all other fields defaulted):

Simulator Black Oil

Simulation Start Date 1 Jan 1980
Title Snark field study
Run Type Normal
Units Field

The panel should look like Figure EX- 4.

Figure EX- 4 Snark case setup - General tab

4. Select the Reservoir tab.

The Reservoir tab is used to activate features pertaining to the reservoir grid.
These items include fractured reservoirs, special rock compressibility options,
aquifers, local grid refinement and coarsening, and special transmissibility
features. In general, the Grid Type and Geometry Type fields do not

Exercises 6 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

have to be filled out, as these will be auto-detected when you complete the
Grid section.

An aquifer is strongly suspected in the Snark reservoir based on well behavior.

A numerical aquifer will be connected to the bottom of the reservoir.

5. Select Aquifers and Numerical.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 5.

Figure EX- 5 Snark case setup - Reservoir tab

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 7

Exercises

6. Select the PVT tab.

The PVT tab is where the fluids that are present in the model are defined as
well as many other special models, such as the Polymer Model or the Solvent
Model.

7. Select Gas, Oil, Water, and Dissolved Gas.

NOTE: The Dissolved Gas option will only be active if the Oil option has
been selected.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 6.

Figure EX- 6 Snark case setup - PVT tab

In this study, there are no other special options needed so nothing is needed on
the other panels.

Exercises 8 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

8. Click on the Apply button to save.

9. Click on OK to exit.

10. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select File > Save Project to save
the Case Definition section.

Importing grid geometry and fault data

1. In the Data Manager window, select Grid to open the grid definition
section, where the geological properties will be defined.

A grid for this model has already been created using FloGrid. The output
from FloGrid, or any file containing valid GRID section keywords, can be
imported into ECLIPSE Office.

2. In the Grid section main window, select File > Import File > New to
import the snark\data\exercise_1\snark_geom.grdecl file.
Select the file from the browser.

The program may warn you about possible differences in grid sizes between
the grid defined in the Case Definition section and the imported file if a grid
was previously defined. If this happens, click on OK.

The program may then ask if you want to update the Case Definition section
with the grid size read from the imported file. If this happens, click on YES.

CAUTION: In the case where a size difference exists, the grid size, as
specified in the Case Definition section, will take priority.
The SPECGRID keyword in the imported file will not
supersede that.

Fault location data is also available, but in a separate file. This data will be
imported and appended to the geometry data.

3. In the Grid section main window, select File > Import File > Append to
import the snark\data\exercise_1\snark_faults.grdecl
file. Select the file from the browser.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 9

Exercises

4. Select File > Save File As. Accept the default name and directory.

5. Press Save.

6. In the Grid section window, select Subsection > GRID Keywords.

7. Select Geometry as the Keyword Type and check that the geometry
keywords have been inserted correctly. The panel should look like Figure
EX- 7.

Figure EX- 7 Grid section - imported geometry keywords

8. Select Faults as the Keyword Type and check that the faults keywords
have been inserted correctly. The panel should look like Error! Reference
source not found..

Exercises 10 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 8 Grid section - imported faults keywords

Inserting keywords

1. Select Properties from the Keyword Type list to insert porosity and
permeability.

2. Select Edit > Insert Keyword, and from the list of keywords, select
Porosity.

NOTE: When the panel first opens, the top keyword is highlighted. This
keyword is NOT selected – you must click on a keyword to select it.
Only one keyword can be selected at a time.

3. Select Porosity from the Keywords list.

The panel automatically closes and a table for data input is displayed in the
right hand side of the Keyword Editor panel.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 11

Exercises

Using the Box Editor (EQUALS, COPY, MULTIPLY)

At this point in the study, there is only average property data. These steps will
assign a constant value of 0.325 to the entire grid.

1. In the Grid section Keyword Editor panel, select Edit > Box to display
the Array Box Selection panel.

2. In the Array Box Selection panel, set the minimum and maximum range
to be the entire grid as follows:
Row I J K
1 1 1 1

2 20 25 23

3. Set the Operation to Equals.

4. Enter 0.325 in the Data Value field. The panel should look like Figure
EX- 9.

Figure EX- 9 Assigning constant Porosity using the Box Editor

5. Click on Apply.

Exercises 12 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

6. Click on Close.

Average permeability values will be entered on a layer-by-layer basis. To

better observe what is happening, change the view of the grid to a X-Z cross-
section.

7. Select View > Grid Order > XZ-plane.

8. To insert the permeability data, select Edit > Insert Keyword and select X
Permeability from the Keywords list.

9. Select Edit > Box to display the Array Box Selection panel.

10. Change the K-value range to be from 1 to 5.

11. Enter 0.290 into the Data Value box, and select D for Darcy from the
Unit dropdown-list.

12. Make sure that the Operation is set to Equals. The panel should look
like Figure EX- 10.

Figure EX- 10 Assigning X Permeability to specific layers using the box editor

13. Click on Apply.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 13

Exercises

The data will be converted to the correct unit as needed for the simulator,
based on the selection of model units in the Case Definition section - in this
case, FIELD - when the file is saved to disk.

14. Repeat steps 10 through 13 for the rest of the layers, using the information
below:

Layers Average Permeability, mD

6 250
7-16 200
17-19 325
20-23 230

By default, units are treated in a passive way in ECLIPSE Office, which

means that no conversion on the table values will take place. Once the data is
saved to the file, it will be converted to the unit ECLIPSE requires. This is
specified in the Case Definition; General tab. Active units can also be
specified, by selecting Util > Active Units in Panels from the main
ECLIPSE Office window.

The next step is to copy the X permeability to the Y and Z arrays. Then a 0.1
multiplier will be applied to the Z permeability.

15. Select Edit > Insert Keyword to display the Keyword Selection box.
Select Y permeability from the list.

16. Select Edit > Box.

17. Select COPY on the Operation drop-down list.

18. Select PERMX from the Copy From drop-down list.

19. Leave the I,J,K ranges at their default values. The panel should look like
Figure EX- 11.

Exercises 14 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 11 Copying PERMX to PERMY using the Box Editor

20. Click on Apply to perform the operation.

21. Press the Close button.

22. Repeat steps 15-20 for the Z Permeability keyword. Leave the Array
Box Selection panel open.

23. Select Multiply as the Operation.

24. Enter 0.1 as the Multiplier. The panel should look like Figure EX- 12.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 15

Exercises

Figure EX- 12 Multiplying PERMZ by a constant using the Box Editor

25. Press the Apply button.

26. Press the Close button.

27. Select File > Save File… from the Grid section main window. Accept the
defaults in the Save File panel.

28. Press the Save button.

Requesting Grid-based output

A GRID file is required by all sections in order to display region and property
data during the model-building phase of the project, as well as for post-
simulation visualization. It can be recognized by the file name extension
.GRID or .EGRID for an unformatted or binary file, and .FGRID or .FEGRID
for an ASCII or formatted file. The output format is selected on the main Run
Manager panel.

1. To ensure that a GRID file is written as part of the output, in the Grid
section Keyword Editor panel, select Operational Keywords from
the Keyword Types list.

Exercises 16 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

2. If the Simulator GRID File Type (GRIDFILE) keyword is not

present, insert the keyword as shown above.

3. Set the GRID File Type to Both.

4. Press Apply.

TIP: The .EGRID format is a new binary format that is much more
compact than the older .GRID format. Using this format takes up
less disk space and loads into other applications faster.

The GRID file only contains information about the grid geometry, basically
the locations of the cell corner points and any LGR information. All other
initial properties, including user-defined values such as porosity and
permeability, and ECLIPSE-generated values such as transmissibility and
cell-center depth, are stored in the INIT file.

5. Select Edit > Insert Keyword.

6. Select Output INIT File from the keyword list.

7. Press Apply on the Keyword Editor panel.

Adding a numerical aquifer

Inserting a numerical aquifer requires a minimum of two keywords. The first

keyword, AQUNUM, defines the aquifer and the inactive cell it will inhabit. In
addition to the dummy location for the aquifer, the AQUCON keyword must be
added to define how the aquifer connects to the active grid.

1. Select Edit > Insert Keyword.

2. Click on Numerical Aquifer Assignments.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 17

Exercises

TIP: There are two keywords with the same descriptive name, select the
second one. If you accidentally insert the other keyword, AQUNNC,
select Edit > Delete Keyword and repeat Step 8.

3. Enter the following data for the AQUNUM keyword:

Aquifer ID: 1

I J K XSA Length Poro. Face Depth Init. PVT Sat.

Press Table Table
1 1 17 1.44E8 2000 .3 500 3700 4300 1 1

4. Press the Apply button.

5. Select Edit > Insert Keyword.

6. Click on Numerical Aquifer Connections.

7. Enter the following data for the AQUCON keyword:

Aq. ID I- I+ J- J+ K- K+ Face
1 1 20 1 25 23 23 K+

8. Press the Apply button.

9. Select File > Close to close the Keyword Editor panel.

10. Select File > Save File… from the Grid section main window. Accept the
defaults in the Save panel.

11. Press the Save button.

The file save panels will display a comments window. This contains all box
operations performed in the section since the last save operation was
performed. You can add notes or comments into this section, and these will be
saved to the project, and are accessible by a double-click event on the required
case, on the main ECLIPSE Office panel.

Exercises 18 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Viewing the grid data

The grid definition and properties up to the current time can be processed to
generate the GRID file for viewing in 2D (or 3D with an optional FloViz
license). These steps are provided here only to demonstrate the workflow, the
use of the 2D and 3D viewers will be discussed later in this course.

1. In the Grid section main window, select GridView > From keywords to
generate a gridfile for 2D and 3D viewing.

2. Select YES to create the grid geometry file.

3. Select GridView > 2D to see the 2D image of the simulation grid, which
should look like Figure EX- 13.

Figure EX- 13 2D view of Snark grid geometry

4. Select File > Close

5. If you have a FloViz license, select GridView > 3D to see the 3D image
of the simulation grid. This should look like Figure EX- 14.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 19

Exercises

Figure EX- 14 3D view of Snark grid geometry

6. Select File > Close

NOTE: The 2D and 3D option will only be available for selection once the
message “SimGrid created” appears in the ECLIPSE Office Log
Window.

7. Select File > Close to exit the Grid section.

Once the data is saved to file as well as the project, you do not need to save
the current contents.

Exercises 20 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Exercise 2 – Building a Base Case; Part 2 – PVT and

SCAL Correlations

Introduction

ECLIPSE Office includes industry-standard correlations for the generation of

fluid properties. This exercise describes how oil, water, gas and rock
properties can be generated using correlations and included as keywords in a
simulation.

This exercise is a continuation of Exercise 1.

Using PVT Correlations

If you are continuing from Exercise 1, skip to Step 10.

Open existing project:

1. To begin, start ECLIPSE Office using one of the procedures described in

Chapter 1. Make sure that ECLIPSE Office is started in the office sub-
directory created in Exercise 1.

2. Select File > Open Project.

3. Select the file snark\office\snark.off.

4. In the main ECLIPSE Office panel, choose View > Display Model in
DM.

5. In the main ECLIPSE Office panel, choose View > Display Model in
Grid Section.

6. Press the Data button to open the Data Manager module.

7. Press the Case Definition button to review the defined phases.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 21

Exercises

8. In the Case Definition panel, select the PVT tab. This shows that the
simulation model contains oil (with dissolved gas), water and gas. The
properties of these will be determined in this exercise.

9. Click OK to close the Case Definition panel.

10. Press the PVT button on the Data Manager main window.

Defining rock properties by correlation

1. In the PVT section main window, select Section > Correlations….

2. The PVT Correlations panel initially shows the standard conditions for
the default (empty) set of PVT tables, PVT1.

3. Select Edit > Rock Props...

The PVT Correlations panel now shows the rock properties correlations.

4. Select the Newman correlation in the Correlation Type drop-down menu.

5. Select Unconsolidated Sandstone in the Rock Type drop-down

menu.

6. Enter a Rock porosity of 0.325.

7. Enter a Rock reference pressure of 4000 psia. This is the reservoir

pressure at the water-oil contact.

8. Click on Apply.

The PVT Correlations panel should now look like Figure EX- 15.

NOTE: The greyed out fields are for parameters that are not required by the
selected correlation. Any values in these fields are ignored in the
calculation.

9. Select File > Update to write the ROCK keyword to the data set.

Exercises 22 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

10. Click on Yes to update the keywords with the results from the rock
correlation.

There are a series of information dialogs to inform the user that the DENSITY,
PVTO, PVCO, PVDG, PVTW, and PVZG keywords cannot be updated. This is
because, so far, only a rock correlation has been made.

11. Click on OK in each information dialog.

Figure EX- 15 Rock properties correlations panel

Viewing the generated ROCK keyword

1. Select View > ROCK...

The PVT Correlations panel now shows the ROCK keyword, containing the
reference pressure (which was entered) and the rock compressibility (which
was calculated using the Newman correlation) (Figure EX- 16).

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 23

Exercises

Figure EX- 16 Correlation-generated ROCK keyword

Generating water properties by correlation

1. Select Edit > Water Props...

The PVT Correlations panel now shows the PVT water properties
correlations.

2. Select the Meehan Viscosity correlation.

3. Select the Meehan Compressibility correlation.

4. Enter a Temperature of 220°F.

5. Enter a Reference pressure of 4000 psia.

6. Click on Apply

The PVT Correlations panel should look like Figure EX- 17.

Exercises 24 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 17 Water properties correlations panel

7. Select File > Update.

8. Click Yes to update the keywords.

9. Click OK in each information dialog.

Viewing the generated PVTW keyword

1. Select View > PVTW...

The PVT Correlations panel now shows the PVTW keyword generated using
the Meehan correlations (Figure EX- 18).

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 25

Exercises

Figure EX- 18 Correlation-generated PVTW keyword

Generating gas properties by correlation

In this exercise, it is assumed that only the gas gravity and temperature are
known. Therefore, we will use the Critical Properties from Correlation
option.

1. Select Edit > Gas Props > Crit Props from Corr...

The PVT Correlations panel now shows the gas properties correlations.

2. Select the Hall-Yarborough Z-factor correlation.

3. Select the Lee Viscosity correlation.

4. Select the Thomas et alia Critical properties calculation.

5. Set the number of Pressure nodes to 11.

This item controls how many pressures are in the calculated table, from the
minimum pressure to the maximum pressure.

6. Set the Temperature to 220°F.

Exercises 26 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

7. Set the Reference pressure to 4000 psia.

8. Enter a Gas gravity of 0.7 sg_Air_1.

9. Click on Apply.

A warning message appears to inform you that the gas compressibility is

outside the range for the correlation. This can be safely ignored.

10. Click on Accept to accept the extended range for gas compressibility.

The PVT Correlations panel should now give appear like Figure EX- 19.

Figure EX- 19 Gas property (Critial Props by Corr) correlations panel

11. Select File > Update

12. Click on Yes to update the keywords.

13. Click on OK in each information dialog.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 27

Exercises

Viewing the gas properties

In addition to the view of the PVDG keyword (View > PVDG...), as illustrated
with the ROCK and PVTW keywords earlier, the gas properties can be viewed
as a table.

1. Select View > Gas Table....

Generating live oil properties by correlation

1. Select Edit > Oil Props...

The PVT Correlations panel now shows the oil properties correlations.

2. Select Pb (bubble point) as the Input Rs or Pb field.

3. Select the GlasO Rs/Pb correlation.

4. Select the GlasO Oil viscosity correlation.

5. Select the GlasO FVF correlation.

6. Select the Vasquez Undersaturated oil compressibility correlation.

7. Enter 11 Pressure nodes.

8. Enter a Reference pressure of 4000 psia.

9. Enter a Bubble point of 3814 psia.

10. Enter a Temperature of 220°F.

11. Enter a Density of 35 APIoil.

12. Enter a Corrected gas gravity of 0.7 sg_Air_1.

13. Click on Apply

The PVT Correlations panel should now look like Figure EX- 20.

Exercises 28 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 20 Oil properties correlation panel

14. Select File > Close

15. Click on Yes to update the keywords.

16. Click on OK in the information dialog.

Viewing PVT keywords

1. In the PVT section main window, select Section > Keywords...

This displays the PVT Keyword Editor panel (Figure EX- 21). All the
currently defined keywords are listed.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 29

Exercises

Figure EX- 21 PVT section Keyword Editor panel

2. Check that the following keywords are defined. If some are missing, go
back and repeat the steps for creating the PVT data from correlations.
• PVTO
• PVDG
• PVTW
• ROCK
• DENSITY

3. In the PVT Keyword Editor panel, select View > Plot...

The line plot window provides a graphical plot of the oil and gas keywords
(Figure EX- 22).

Exercises 30 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 22 Graphical view of PVTO data

Double-click on the PVDG plot to make it the main plot (

4. Figure EX- 23).

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 31

Exercises

Figure EX- 23 Graphical view of PVDG data

5. Select File > Close in the line plot viewer panel.

6. Select File > Close in the PVT Keyword Editor panel.

Saving the PVT keywords

1. In the PVT section main window, select File > Save As…

2. Click on OK to overwrite the existing (empty) PVT file with the keywords
generated from the correlations.

3. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, select Util > Text Editor...

4. Select the file \snark\office\snark_pvt.inc

5. Use the scroll bar to examine the file. The keywords listed at the bottom of
the file are the data that will be used by ECLIPSE. The rest of the file
consists of comments and variables of use to ECLIPSE Office.

6. Select File > Close to close the text editor.

7. Select File > Close to close the PVT section.

Exercises 32 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Using SCAL Correlations

This section addresses using the SCAL correlations in ECLIPSE Office to

generate relative permeability curves when other data is not available. At
present, only the Corey correlation is available.

1. From the Data Manager main window, press SCAL.

2. Select Section > Correlations from the SCAL section main window.

This displays the SCAL correlation panel as shown in Figure EX- 24.

3. Set the number of Table entries to 11.

4. Select SWOF, SGOF, SLGOF as the Keyword Family at the bottom of

the panel.

NOTE: ECLIPSE supports SCAL data in two common formats. The SCAL
keywords are classified as belonging to one Keyword Family or the
other based on these formats. Users must choose to use one format
or the other; they cannot be mixed in the same run.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 33

Exercises

Figure EX- 24 SCAL correlations panel

5. Enter the following data in the correlation panel:

Water Gas Oil

Swmin 0.2714 Sgmin 0 Sorg 0
Swcr 0.2714 Sgcr 0 Sorw 0.3
Swi 0.2714 Sgi 0 Kro(Swmin) 1
Krw(Sorw) 0.4 Krg(Sorg) 0.5 Kro(Sgmin) 1
Krw(Swmax) 1 Krg(Sgmax) 1

6. Press the Apply button.

7. Select View > Plot to view the results of the correlations graphically.

The plot window should now be displayed with the SGOF keyword shown, as
illustrated in Figure EX- 25.

Exercises 34 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 25 Graphical display of the SGOF keyword

8. Double-click on the SWOF plot at the top of the plot window. The plot
should now look as shown in Figure EX- 26.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 35

Exercises

Figure EX- 26 Graphical display of SWOF keyword

Saving the SCAL keywords

1. Select File > Close to close the plot panel.

2. Select File > Close to close the PVT Correlations panel.

3. Answer Yes when prompted to update the keywords with values from
correlations.

4. Select Section > Keywords from the PVT section main window to open
the Keyword Editor panel, as shown in Figure EX- 27.

Exercises 36 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 27 SCAL section Keyword Editor panel

TIP: The correlations only determine the relative permeability. There are
no correlations available for capillary pressure. If you want to
include capillary pressure, add the data to the keywords shown in
this panel after generating them by correlations.

5. Select File > Close to close the Keyword Editor panel.

6. Select File > Save As... from the PVT section main window.

7. Click OK, accepting the default name for the section.

8. Select File > Close to close the PVT section and return to the Data
Manager main window.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 37

Exercises

Exercises 38 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Exercise 3 – Building a Base Case; Part 3 –

Completing the Data Entry

Introduction

This exercise completes the building of the initial case for the field study. The
objective of this exercise is to illustrate the setup of the initialization data,
defining REGIONS data, selection of summary vectors for output, and the
specification of the well production schedule.

This exercise is a continuation of Exercise 2.

Initialization of the model

Initialization can be performed one of two ways in ECLIPSE. The most

common method is Equilibration, in which only the depths of the oil-water
and gas-oil contacts, entry-point capillary pressures and initial pressure at a
datum depth are defined. ECLIPSE then automatically calculates the initial
cell saturations using this data along with the PVT, relative permeability and
capillary pressure tables. This method insures hydrostatic equilibrium and is
the recommended method, however, it does not always completely match
maps of water saturation often provided in simulation studies.

The Equilibration method uses the EQUIL keyword, as well as either RSVD or
PBVD for dissolved gas and either RVVD or PDVD for vaporized oil
(condensate). Other keywords may also be required depending on the options
used in the model.

The other method is Enumeration and is commonly used in many basic

simulators. In this method, the initial water and gas saturations (SWAT and
SGAS), pressure (PRESSURE), Rs (RS) and Rv (RV) and other parameters are
defined on a cell-by-cell basis. While this method allows the user to directly
specify water saturation, it does not ensure hydrostatic equilibrium and can
lead to convergence problems with the model.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 39

Exercises

For this exercise, we will use the Equilibration method to initialize the model.

If you are continuing from a previous exercise, skip to Step 7.

Open existing project

1. To begin, start ECLIPSE Office using one of the procedures described in

Chapter 1. Make sure that ECLIPSE Office is started in the office sub-
directory created in Exercise 1.

2. Select File > Open Project.

3. Select the file snark\office\snark.off.

4. In the main ECLIPSE Office panel, choose View > Display Model in
DM.

5. In the main ECLIPSE Office panel, choose View > Display Model in
Grid Section.

6. Press the Data button to open the Data Manager module.

7. Press the Initialisation button on the Data Manager main window.

The Initialisation main panel is displayed. Initially, a single initialization

region is defined, but there are no keywords present.

Defining Initial Conditions

1. Select Edit > Insert Keyword… from the Initialisation section Keyword
Editor panel.

2. Select Equilibration Data Specification (EQUIL) from

the Keyword Selection panel.

3. Enter the following data:

Datum Pressure WOC OW Cap GOC GO Cap Rs

Depth at Datum Depth Pressure Depth Pressure Table
Depth
3000 ft 4000 psi 3000 ft 0.0 psia 2300 ft 0.0 psia 1

Exercises 40 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

4. Press the Apply button.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 28.

Figure EX- 28 Initialisation section Keyword Editor panel showing EQUIL data

5. Select Edit > Insert Keyword… from the Initialisation section Keyword
Editor panel.

6. Select Rs v Depth from the Keyword Selection panel.

7. Enter the following data:

Depth Rs
2000 0.77
4000 0.77

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 41

Exercises

TIP: To add additional rows to any table in ECLIPSE Office, press the +
symbol in the upper right corner of the table, or type CTRL-N. Rows
can be deleted using CTRL+D or by right-clicking over the table and
selecting one of the Delete options.

8. Press the Apply button.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 29.

Figure EX- 29 Initialisation section Keyword Editor panel showing RSVD data

Requesting Initial Solution output

ECLIPSE does not provide very much output by default, so it is up to the user
to request any specified data. In this example, a restart file at initial time is
desired.

1. Select Keyword Types > Miscellaneous

Exercises 42 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

2. Select Edit > Insert Keyword…

3. Select Initialisation Print Output (RPTSOL) from the

Keyword Selection list.

4. In the Restarts column, select Initial Restart.

5. In the FIP Reports (Fluids-In-Place) column, select + Balance

Sheets (This requests and initial fluids-in-place and material balance
report).

6. Press Apply.

7. Select File > Save As....

8. Click OK, accepting the default name for the section.

9. Select File > Close to close the Initialisation section and return to the
Data Manager main window.

Defining REGIONS data

Regions are used in ECLIPSE for a number of purposes. Region arrays are
often provided to define Fluids-In-Place (FIPNUM) regions and specify
different equilibration (EQLNUM), PVT (PVTNUM) and relative permeability
(SATNUM) zones in the reservoir, among others.

In this example you will learn how to define a FIPNUM array for reporting
Fluids-In-Place for each fault block. In addition to illustrating the use of
FIPNUM, you will also learn how to edit array-based keywords using the 2D
Viewer. These editing techniques can be used to edit any array-based keyword
in any section of ECLIPSE Office.

Entering and initializing the FIPNUM array

1. In the main Data Manager window, press Regions to open the Regions
section.

2. Select Edit > Insert Keyword… from the Regions section Keyword
Editor panel.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 43

Exercises

3. Select FIP Region Numbers (FIPNUM) from the Keyword

Selection panel.

In order to edit the array with the 2D Viewer, initially fill the array with some
dummy value.

4. In the Regions section Keyword Editor panel, select Edit > Box to
display the Array Box Selection panel.

5. In the Array Box Selection panel, set the minimum and maximum range
to be the entire grid as follows:
Row I J K
1 1 1 1

2 20 25 23

6. Set the Operation to Equals.

7. Enter 1 in the Data Value field.

8. Click on Apply.

9. Click on Close.

Defining FIPNUM using the 2D Viewer

1. Select GridView > Run Simulation.

CAUTION: ECLIPSE will then start and run to the current point. Wait
until the message “Simulations Finished. Timer Stopped”
appears in the Log Window before proceeding.

2. Select GridView > 2D to open the 2D Viewer panel.

The 2D Viewer initially opens showing only the grid geometry as shown in
Figure EX- 30. In order to edit FIPNUM you must first make it the active
property.

Exercises 44 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 30 Regions section 2D Viewer panel

3. In the 2D Viewer window, select View > Options to open the Edit View
Options dialog.

4. In the Edit View Options dialog, select the Colour Fill tab.

5. Select the Initial Properties button and select FIPNUM from the list that
appears below.

The Edit View Options dialog should look like Figure EX- 31.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 45

Exercises

Figure EX- 31 Edit View Options dialog box

6. Press Apply, leaving the Edit View Options dialog open.

The 2D Viewer window should now look like Figure EX- 32.

Exercises 46 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 32 Regions section 2D Viewer showing FIPNUM

The next step is to select the cells belonging to the first region. This can be
done in a number of ways, using the 2D > Pick and 2D > Select cells…
options.

Individual cells may be selected by selecting 2D > Pick and then selecting the
cell you want.

TIP: Holding the SHIFT key down while selecting will allow picking
multiple cells.

A rectangular group of cells may be selected by using 2D > Select cells… >
Rectangle. To use this method, simply click in one corner of the desired area
and drag to the opposite corner, releasing the mouse button at the opposite
corner.

An arbitrary shape of cells may be selected using 2D > Select cells… >
Digitise. When using this method, you do not have to close the shape, simply

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 47

Exercises

click on the last point and press enter to automatically connect it to the first
point.

The goal of this part of the exercise is to create FIPNUM regions conforming
to those shown in Figure EX- 33.

Figure EX- 33 FIPNUM definitions for Snark study

7. Select 2D > Show cell probe to UN-check it. (The cell probe is not
needed for this task and the panel would block the view).

8. Select 2D > Select cells… > Digitise.

Exercises 48 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

9. Define a boundary around the central fault block. Press the Enter key to
finish the polygon. When finished, the 2D Viewer window should look
like Figure EX- 34.

Figure EX- 34 Regions section 2D Viewer showing selected cells (FIPNUM = 2)

10. In the Edit View Options panel, press the Edit Properties button to open
the Selected Cells panel.

The cells you selected graphically will be displayed in the table. In this table
you can change the value of each selected cell individually or operate on them
as a group. There are also options to change the values of the cells above and
below the selected cell.

11. In the Selected Cells panel, set the Edit Mode to Set all selected
cells.

12. Check the + layers below box so that the changes will be made to all
layers.

13. Enter the number 2 in the FIPNUM field at the bottom of the panel.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 35.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 49

Exercises

Figure EX- 35 Selected Cells panel for FIPNUM = 2

14. Press OK.

CAUTION: This operation may take a few minutes, be patient and do

not try clicking on other ECLIPSE Office panels, buttons,
etc.

The 2D Viewer panel should now look like Figure EX- 36.

Exercises 50 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 36 Regions section 2D Viewer after editing FIPNUM = 2

The next step is to repeat steps 8-15 for the fault block on the right-hand side,
FIPNUM = 4.

15. Select 2D > Select cells… > Digitise.

16. Define a boundary around the right-hand side fault block. Press the Enter
key to finish the polygon. When finished, the 2D Viewer window should
look like Figure EX- 37.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 51

Exercises

Figure EX- 37 Regions section 2D Viewer showing selected cells (FIPNUM = 4)

17. In the Edit View Options panel, press the Edit Properties button to open
the Selected Cells panel.

18. In the Selected Cells panel, set the Edit Mode to Set all selected
cells.

19. Check the + layers below box so that the changes will be made to all
layers.

20. Enter the number 4 in the FIPNUM field at the bottom of the panel.

21. Press OK.

The 2D Viewer panel should now look like Figure EX- 38.

Exercises 52 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 38 Regions section 2D Viewer after editing FIPNUM = 4

The last FIPNUM region is very small, so use the Pick option to define it.

22. Select 2D > Pick.

23. Click on the cell in FIPNUM region 4 that is in the upper left corner of that
region.

24. Hold down the SHIFT key and select the next 10 cells moving down
(Total of 11 in this column).

25. Continue to hold down the SHIFT key and select the first 5 cells in the
column to the right of the cells selected in the previous step.

The 2D Viewer panel should now look like Figure EX- 39.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 53

Exercises

Figure EX- 39 Regions section 2D Viewer showing selected cells (FIPNUM = 3)

26. In the Edit View Options panel, press the Edit Properties button to open
the Selected Cells panel.

27. In the Selected Cells panel, set the Edit Mode to Set all selected
cells.

28. Check the + layers below box so that the changes will be made to all
layers.

29. Enter the number 3 in the FIPNUM field at the bottom of the panel.

30. Press OK.

Changing the visible range of the 2D Legend

The 2D Viewer does not change. This is because the data is out of range of the
currently defined legend. To change the range of the legend:

1. Double-click over the legend tick marks in the 2D Viewer to open the
Color Legend Property Editing panel.

Exercises 54 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

2. Change the upper end of the Visible range to 4.

3. Press OK.

The 2D Viewer panel should now look like Figure EX- 40.

Figure EX- 40 Regions section 2D Viewer after defining 4 FIPNUM regions

Saving 2D Edits

1. In the 2D Viewer window, select File > Save to keywords.

2. Select File > Close.

NOTE: The edits just made are not reflected in the array table. You must
close and reopen the Regions section in order to see the changes in
the table.

3. Select File > Save As… to save the current Regions section data.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 55

Exercises

4. Select File > Close to close the Regions section.

Defining the Well Schedule

The well schedule, often called the recurrent data, contains the well
definitions, completions, production history, production constraints and
controls, and report step times.

The Schedule section of the Data Manager does not have any facility to import
data other than keywords; therefore, an application to convert typical
spreadsheet production data into keywords is desirable. In this example, the
well definition and production keywords have been prepared using the
Schedule program. The data will be imported into ECLIPSE Office. The user
will then make a few modifications and additions.

Importing Schedule section keywords

1. From the Data Manager main window, select Schedule.

The Schedule section main window appears.

2. In the Schedule section main window select File > Import > New….

3. Select the file \snark\data\exercise3\snark_wells.sch.

4. Answer Yes when warned about the SCHEDULE keyword not being
found.

This file only contains the well definitions and completions.

5. Click on different keywords and review the data entered. To see only the
keywords associated with a specific well or group, or a specific keyword,
use Event > View… options.

6. Select Event > Expand COMPDATs.

Note how the individual completion records are now reorganized into a table
that can be easily understood and edited.

Exercises 56 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

NOTE: The Historical Well Production Data keywords at the

bottom of the section initially define all the wells as SHUT, which is
equivalent to “not present” rather than “shut-in”. This is a
commonly used technique allowing all wells to be defined at the
beginning of the section rather than at the specific times the wells
are drilled.

7. Select File > Import > Append…

8. Select the file \snark\data\exercise3\snark_history.sch.

9. Answer Yes when warned about the SCHEDULE keyword not being
found.

These additional keywords provide the historical production data from 1980
through Dec. 1, 2000.

10. Click on different keywords and times and review the data entered. To see
only the keywords associated with a specific well or group, or a specific
keyword, use Event > View… options. When using these view options an
asterisk (*) next to a listed time means that there are applicable keywords
at that time.

Adding keywords to the Schedule section

Well flow rates and other time-based vector data are requested in the
Summary section, however, restart files and other grid-based data, and reports
to the ASCII output file (.PRT) are requested at specific times in the Schedule
section.

In this example, we will request restart files and printed output.

1. Select the initial time (1 Jan 1980).

2. Select the topmost keyword in the list.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 57

Exercises

WARNING: In the Schedule section, some keywords are order

dependent. You should always put the keywords in the
logical order: drill the well (WELSPECS), complete the
well (COMPDAT), and operate the well (WCON*). In
addition, vertical flow performance (VFP) tables should
always be placed near the top of the section. It is also best
to put output and simulator control keywords near the top.

3. Select Event > New…

4. Select the Event Type Output from the New Event panel.

5. Select Restart File Output Control (RPTRST) from the list

on the right.

6. Press OK.

The RPTRST keyword is now visible in the Keyword Editor panel.

7. In the Restarts column, select Every Report.

8. Press Apply.

9. Select Event > Move > Top to move the RPTRST keyword to the top of
the list.

Using the Keyword Explorer

Many times the category of a particular keyword is not obvious. If you are
looking for a particular keyword, you can use the Keyword Explorer to
quickly insert a keyword. The Keyword Explorer panel is available in all
sections of the Data Manager except the Summary and Multiple
Sensitivities sections.

1. Select Edit > Explore keywords…

2. Press the Toggle Desc/Keys button

3. Select RPTSCHED

Exercises 58 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

4. Press the Close button on the Keyword Explorer panel.

The RPTSCHED keyword is now visible in the Keyword Editor panel.

5. In the FIP Reports column, select + Balance Sheet.

6. Press the Next Page button.

7. In the Well Reports column, select Well & Connection Flows

8. In the Solution Summary column, select + Terminal.

9. Press Apply.

10. Select Event > Move > Top to move the keyword to the top of the list.

Saving the Schedule section

1. Select File > Save As....

2. Click OK, accepting the default name for the section.

3. Select File > Close to close the Schedule section and return to the Data
Manager main window.

Requesting Summary Output

In this section the output vectors are requested from the simulation. In this
exercise you should report all the standard rates (actual and historical),
cumulatives and pressures, as well as the well block pressures for comparison
to shut-in pressures measured in the field.

Selecting Summary vectors

In the Data Manager main window, select Summary.

Two panels will open; the Summary section main window and the Selected
List. The Selected List contains a listing of all the summary keywords
requested.

1. In the Summary section main window, select the General tab.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 59

Exercises

2. Select the ALL keyword.

3. Press the Add to List button.

TIP: The All keyword is a subset of the most commonly used summary
vectors, specifically FOPR, GOPR, WOPR, FOPT, GOPT, WOPT,
FOIR, GOIR, WOIR, FOIT, GOIT, WOIT, FWPR, GWPR,
WWPR, FWPT, GWPT, WWPT, FWIR, GWIR, WWIR, FWIT,
GWIT, WWIT, FGPR, GGPR, WGPR, FGPT, GGPT, WGPT,
FGIR, GGIR, WGIR, FGIT, GGIT, WGIT, FVPR, GVPR, WVPR,
FVPT, GVPT, WVPT, FVIR, GVIR, WVIR, FVIT, GVIT, WVIT,
FWCT, GWCT, WWCT, FGOR, GGOR, WGOR, FWGR,
GWGR, WWGR, WBHP, WTHP, WPI, FOIP, FOIPL, FOIPG,
FWIP, FGIP, FGIPL, FGIPG, FPR, FAQR, AAQR, FAQT, and
AAQT.

4. Select the SEPARATE keyword

5. Press Add to List

6. Select the TCPU keyword

7. Press Add to List

The three selected vectors will now appear in the Selected List.

8. Select the Field tab.

9. Select Oil from the Phases list

10. Select Production History from the Types list.

11. Select FOPRH in the Keywords List.

12. Press Add to List.

13. Select Gas from the Phases list

14. Select Production History from the Types list.

Exercises 60 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

15. Select FGPRH in the Keywords List.

16. Press Add to List.

17. Select Water from the Phases list

18. Select Production History from the Types list.

19. Select FWPRH in the Keywords List.

20. Press Add to List.

21. Select Injection History from the Types list.

22. Select FWIRH in the Keywords list.

23. Press Add to List.

24. Select the Wells tab.

25. Select Oil from the Phases list

26. Select Production History from the Types list.

27. Select WOPRH in the Keywords List.

28. Press Add to List.

29. Select Gas from the Phases list

30. Select Production History from the Types list.

31. Select WGPRH in the Keywords List.

32. Press Add to List.

33. Select Water from the Phases list

34. Select Production History from the Types list.

35. Select WWPRH in the Keywords List.

36. Press Add to List.

37. Select Injection History from the Types list.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 61

Exercises

38. Select WWIRH in the Keywords list.

39. Select INJECTOR in the Wells list

40. Press Add to List.

41. Select Others from the Phases list.

42. Select Pressure from the Types list.

43. Select WBP from the Keywords list.

44. Press Add to List.

45. Select WBP9 from the Keywords list.

46. Press Add to List.

The Selected List panel should now look like Figure EX- 41.

Figure EX- 41 Summary section Selected List panel

47. Select File > Save As....

Exercises 62 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

48. Click OK, accepting the default name for the section.

49. Select File > Close to close the Summary section and return to the Data
Manager main window.

50. Select File > Close in the Data Manager main window

51. Select File > Save Project in the ECLIPSE Office main window.

Note that the Run button on the main window is now active, indicating that
all the necessary sections exist. However, this does not imply that all the
necessary keywords are present or that the data is correct.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 63

Exercises

Exercises 64 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Exercise 4 – Running the Base Case

Introduction

This exercise demonstrates the use of the Run Manager for submitting runs
and monitoring the results. The example used in this case is the base case
created in Exercises 1-3. In this exercise, the default settings of the Run
Manager are used.

Running the Base Case

After all the required sections have been defined in the Data Manager, the
Run button is activated on the ECLIPSE Office main window. At this point,
the Run Manager can be opened and the simulation parameters defined for
the run.

If you are continuing from a previous exercise, skip the first section of the
instructions below.

Open existing project

1. To begin, start ECLIPSE Office using one of the procedures described in

Chapter 1. Make sure that ECLIPSE Office is started in the office sub-
directory created in Exercise 1.

2. Select File > Open Project.

3. Select the file snark\office\snark.off.

Run the Simulation

1. Press the Run button to open the Run Manager module.

The panel should look similar to Figure EX- 42.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 65

Exercises

Figure EX- 42 Run Manager main window

2. Check the Host Name, Simulator Version and Executable Name fields.
These should show the name of your local machine, the current simulator
version and the correct path to the eclipse.exe executable. Your instructor
will advise the correct values.

NOTE: If the settings are not correct, check the Environment setting toi
make sure it is set to NON-PVM LOCAL. If the values are still
incorrect, press the Reset button.

3. Check that the Environment field is set to NON-PVM LOCAL.

Exercises 66 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

4. Check that all the input and output File Types listed on the right-hand side
of the panel are set to Multiple and Unformatted (binary).

5. Insure that the Summary checkbox for Run Time Monitoring is checked.
(You will not monitor solutions in this exercise).

6. Insure that the Turn Off Simulation checkbox is UN-checked.

7. Select Submit > Runs (or press the button on the toolbar).

The run is now submitted to ECLIPSE. On a PC, a DOS window will open
where the simulation output can be watched. On UNIX, this occurs in the
terminal window used to start ECLIPSE Office.

Run Time Monitoring

As soon as the first report step is written (31 days in this case), the Plot
Summary Vectors run time monitoring button will become active.
Continue the exercise when this occurs.

1. Press the Plot Summary Vectors button or select Monitor > Summary
Vectors.

The 2D line plot viewer will now be displayed as shown in Figure EX- 43.
Note that there are no plots initially in the display.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 67

Exercises

Figure EX- 43 Initial view of Summary Vector runtime monitoring panel

2. Select LinePlot > Field > Production Rate. The display should now look
similar to Figure EX- 44.

A plot of the field total oil, gas and water production rates are displayed. In
addition, if historical rate vectors have been requested in the Summary
section of the Data Manager, as was done in the previous exercise, then this
data will also be displayed for comparison.

NOTE: Your display may not look exactly like this, depending on how far
the simulation has run before you create the graph.

Exercises 68 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 44 Run Time Monitoring of Field Production Rates

Note how the oil and gas production seem to be providing a good match, but
the water production is significantly different. In this case, it is much lower
than historical at early time, but ends up much higher than the historical
production.

As the run progresses, the gas production also begins to differ by a significant
amount. However, due to the default axes limits it is difficult to see this since
the gas and the oil curves are almost overlaid. To correct this, adjust the axis
limits of the Gas rate data.

3. Double-click on the Y-Axis to the right of the display. This will open the
Axis Property Edting window for this Y-Axis.

4. Select the Range tab. The panel should now look like Figure EX- 45.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 69

Exercises

Figure EX- 45 Axis Property Editing panel

5. Make sure the Limit Range box is UN-checked and enter 24000 in the
upper limit of the Visible Range field on the right of the panel.

6. Press the OK button.

Allow the run to finish. At this point, the Summary Vector run time
monitoring panel should look similar to Figure EX- 46.

TIP: When the simulation is finished the message “Info:

Simulations Finished. Timer Stopped” will appear in
the Log Window. Above this will be messages regarding whether or
not the run finished successfully or if there were errors reported.

7. From the Summary Vector run time monitoring panel, select File >
Close.

8. From the Run Manager main window, select File > Close to return to the
ECLIPSE Office main window.

Exercises 70 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 46 Summary Vector run time monitoring panel at end of run

Discussion

In this exercise the use of the Run Manager was demonstrated. This usage is
very similar regardless of the Run Environment selected. Use the procedures
described in Chapter 6 to set up other Run Environments. Note that run time
monitoring may not always be available, depending on the Run Environment
selected.

When monitoring runs it is possible to plot a number of vectors, not just the
example shown. The options under the LinePlot menu will activate depending
on the data selected in the Summary section of the Data Manager, and the
user can make any number of custom plots using the LinePlot>User menu
item, as will be illustrated in the next exercise.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 71

Exercises

In this example the base case does not history match the data. This is usually
the case in an initial simulation run. The next few exercises will demonstrate
the history matching process using the case management, run management and
results viewing capabilities of ECLIPSE Office.

Exercises 72 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Exercise 5 – Analyzing the Base Case

Introduction

This exercise focuses on the use of the Results Viewer and Report
Generator for simulation analysis. The data set used is the Snark base case
that was built in Exercises 1-3.

In this exercise, you will learn how to create a variety of 2D line plots. User
data from an external dataset will be imported to compare to the simulation
results. The resulting graphs will be saved to a Graphics Run File (GRF) for
re-use with other cases in the study.

The use of the 2D and 3D Viewers for viewing line plot and grid data will be
illustrated in this exercise. Since there are many techniques that can be used
for creating plots, these lessons are continued in the exercises to follow.

Checking the Run for Errors

The first step in analyzing a simulation run is to check the run for errors and
other problems. ECLIPSE Office only reports that a simulation has failed if
the run is terminated with an Error condition. There are a number of lesser
problems, such as convergence issues and un-physical PVT information,
which will allow a run to proceed. However, the engineer should always
review these problems to insure that the run is indeed giving a valid result.

Generating an Error report

1. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, select Report to enter the
Report Generator.

2. Select File > Open Current Case > PRT.

3. Select Errors, ... from the Report drop-down.

The window should look like Figure EX- 47.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 73

Exercises

Figure EX- 47 Report Generator Errors... report panel

NOTE: If the run terminated with a fatal error, the Errors checkbox would
automatically be selected. If the Errors option is grayed, no fatal
errors occurred.

TIP: If errors are reported with regard to include files not found for
reading, it may be necessary to check if the CASE preference in the
/ecl/macros/CONFIG.ECL file has been set to CASE BOTH.
This setting is not recommended with ECLIPSE Office. This is
changed in the section with the heading SECTION SYSTEM.

No errors should appear at this stage. However, if errors exist, the simulator
gives information to correct it. However, there are non-fatal errors or
warnings, as well as messages that should be reviewed.

4. Check the ERRORS and WARNINGS checkbox.

Exercises 74 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

5. Press Generate Report.

6. Uncheck the ERRORS and WARNINGS checkbox.

7. Check the MESSAGES checkbox.

8. Press Generate Report.

9. Press the Output button.

10. Select Report 1 from the list of reports. The selected report is displayed in
the panel, as shown in Figure EX- 48.

Figure EX- 48 Error and Warnings report for the Base case

11. Carefully examine all the WARNING messages.

There are a number of warnings about negative total fluid compressibility

being calculated at certain pressures and gas saturations. Note that all the
pressures are very high so it is unlikely that we will be operating in this range
and we can safely ignore this problem. However, if the run were to enter this
range, serious convergence problems could occur.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 75

Exercises

There are also a number of warning messages about the bottom hole pressure
constraints being set to default. This is generally OK for a history match run,
but is not recommended when performing a prediction run.

12. Select Report 2 from the Reports list.

The MESSAGES report is now displayed as shown in Figure EX- 49.

Figure EX- 49 Messages report for the Base case

Carefully examine all the messages:

How many active cells are in the model?

How much memory does the case require?

Exercises 76 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Fluids-in-place and Material balance reports

Another item that should always be checked after a run is finished is the
Fluids-in-place and material balance. The Fluids-in-place will give an
indication if the simulation model agrees with the geological model. In many
cases these values will differ and it is up to the simulation engineer to
determine the cause. Often it is found in the assumptions behind porosity (in-
situ as from logs, or at a reference depth as from cores) and the handling of
rock compressibility.

Generating a Material Balance and FIP report

1. Press the Input button.

2. Select PRT Reports from the Report drop-down to see a list of available
reports.

3. Select Report 0 from the Reports list and the keyword BALANCE from
the Keywords list.

4. Click on the Add to List button to see it in the Selection List box.

5. Press Generate Report to report on the initial fluids in place.

6. Select Output to display the report, as shown in Figure EX- 50.

What is the original oil-in-place?

How much Free Gas is in the reservoir?

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 77

Exercises

Figure EX- 50 Initial material balance report

TIP: The contents of the report window may be copied to any text editor
by using the usual window management facilities (for example:
select the text, Ctrl-c to copy and Ctrl-v to paste).

Determining the ultimate recovery and recovery fraction

1. Select Input to enter details for the next report.

2. Select Report 251 from the Reports list and BALANCE from the
Keywords list

3. Click on the Add to List button.

4. Press Generate Report.

5. Return to the Output window. The panel should look similar to Figure
EX- 51.

Exercises 78 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 51 Material balance report at end of run for the Base case

6. Examine the report and make a note of the following:

What is the ultimate recovery at the end of the history match period?

What is the recovery factor?

TIP: A report may be displayed in a separate text window by selecting

New Window.

7. Select File > Close to exit the Report Generator.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 79

Exercises

Creating Production and Injection plots

Loading Summary and Solution Data

1. Press the Result button on the ECLIPSE Office main window to open the
Results Viewer.

2. Select File > Open Current Case > Summary…

This will open the Load/Extract Summary Vectors panel as shown in Figure
EX- 52.

Figure EX- 52 Load/Extract Summary Vectors panel for the Base case

3. Check that the Read All Summary Vectors and Read All Reports boxes
are checked.

4. Press Load.

5. Select File > Open Current Case > Solution….

This will open the Load/Extract Solutions panel as shown in Figure EX- 53.

Exercises 80 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 53 Load/Extract Solutions panel for the Base case

6. Ensure that the Read INIT File and Read All Data from Restart Files
boxes are checked.

7. Press Load.

Creating graphs using standard templates

First, we will create a set of standard production and injection plots of the
field and of each individual well, comparing the results to the historical data
input to the Schedule section.

1. Select LinePlot > Field > Production Rate

2. Select LinePlot > Field > Injection Rate

3. Select LinePlot > Well > Production Rate

4. Select PROD1 from the well list.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 81

Exercises

BEST PRACTICE: When creating well plots, only select the first
producer or injector (depending on the type of plot
you want) in the list. Use the Edit > Previous
Well/Group and Edit > Next Well/Group controls
to switch between wells. This offers the advantage
of retaining any customization. In addition, if you
select multiple wells they will all be plotted on the
same graph.

The display should look like Figure EX- 54.

Figure EX- 54 Default Line Plots used for base case

5. Select View > Next Well/Group to examine the next well. View each
well in turn and note the degree of history match.

6. Double-click (or drag and drop) on the small graph titled Field Injection
Rate.

7. Examine the plot, shown in Figure EX- 55.

Exercises 82 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 55 Field Injection graph for Base case

Note how it appears that there is no injection. However, we know that the well
INJECTOR should have been injecting throughout most of the run.

8. Select Options > Table. A table of the graph data will appear.

Scroll down the table to see if there is any injection (FWIR) data.

9. Press OK to close the table.

10. Pay close attention to the range of the Y-Axis on the Field Injection
graph. Note the range is only 0 to 1.

Changing Axis properties

1. Double-click while pointing over the left-hand side Y-Axis. The Axis
Property Editing panel should appear.

2. Select the Range tab.

3. Enter an upper range of 10000 and un-check the Limit Range box, as
shown in Figure EX- 56.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 83

Exercises

Figure EX- 56 Axis Property Editing panel for Field Injection graph

4. Press OK.

Deleting Data from an Existing Graph

In this example, there is no Oil or Gas injection. Therefore, you do not need to
display these values on your plots.

1. Click on the FOIR line in the Legend at the top of the graph. The selected
Legend object will be highlighted in Yellow.

2. Click and hold the mouse button down over the FOIR line in the Legend
and drag it to the Dustbin (Trash Can) in the upper right corner of the
toolbar. Release the mouse button over the Dustbin.

The selected Legend item and data are removed from the graph.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the FGIR Legend item

The graph should now look like Figure EX- 57.

Exercises 84 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 57 Field Injection graph with new Y-Axis range

You will save the plot definitions in a Graphics Run File later in this exercise.
Since customizations are also saved to the file, it is efficient to make any
customizations to the plots before you save the run file.

One very common customization is to change the colors such that oil is
designated by Green, gas by Red and water by Blue. It is also common to
denote historical data with markers and simulation results with a line.

Customizing graph line styles and colors

1. Double-click, or drag and drop, the Field Production graph to make it the
main graph.

2. Double-click on the FOPR item in the Legend.

The Data Style Property Editing panel appears.

3. Select the Line Style tab and select the color Green, as shown in Figure
EX- 58.

4. Press OK.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 85

Exercises

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for the FGPR curve, except set the color to Red.

Figure EX- 58 Data Style Editing panel for FOPR

6. Double-click on the FOPRH item in the Legend.

The Data Style Property Editing panel appears.

7. Select the Line Style tab, un-check the Draw box.

8. Select the Marker Style tab.

9. Check the Draw box, select the Circle symbol, set the color to Green, and
move the marker Size slider to the position shown in Figure EX- 59.

10. Press OK.

11. Repeat steps 6 through 10 for the FGPRH curve, except set the color to
Red.

12. Repeat steps 6 through 10 for the FWPRH curve, except set the color to
Blue.

Exercises 86 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 59 Data Style Editing panel for FOPRH

13. Double-click, or drag and drop, the Well Production graph to make it the
main graph.

14. Repeat steps 2 through 12 for the Well Production plot.

The main window should now look similar to Figure EX- 60.

Figure EX- 60 Results Viewer main window after customization

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 87

Exercises

Creating user-defined graphs

In addition to default template plots, you can make custom plots of any data
specified in the Summary section.

For this exercise, you will make a multi-graph plot consisting of the average
pressure represented by WBP9, which is the average of the well block pressure
(the pore volume weighted average pressure of all blocks containing well
connections), along with the 8 neighboring cells in the areal direction. You
will then import a file of shut-in pressures taken from periodic 24-hour shut-
ins of the wells. This type of plot is often used to validate the history match on
pressure since flowing BHP data is often unavailable.

1. Select LinePlot > User. The User Templates window appears.

2. Select TIME in the X-Axis vectors column.

3. Select WBP9:PROD1 in the Y-Axis vectors column.

4. Press Add to List.

The panel should now look similar to Figure EX- 61.

Figure EX- 61 User Templates panel for Pressure plot

Exercises 88 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

5. Press Apply.

A new graph will appear in the main graph window.

6. Double-click in the title are in the upper left corner of the graph. The
Graph Title Edit panel appears.

7. Enter Pressure Match - Well PROD1

8. Press OK.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 62. You can toggle through the
wells as with the Well Production graph.

Figure EX- 62 User-defined Pressure Match plot

NOTE: You can toggle through wells anytime all the vectors on the graph
are related to the same well. If the graph will not toggle, it is a
symptom that there is a vector on the graph that is attached to
another well or level (e.g. Field, Group).

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 89

Exercises

Creating a multi-graph pictures

Sometimes it is desirable to have more than one graph in the same picture for
easy comparison. In this study, you will create a picture containing the
Pressure Plot for each of the four producing wells in a separate graph.

1. Select Edit > Add New Graph …

A new pane appears in the main graph window.

2. In the User Templates panel, select TIME in the X-Axis vectors column.

3. Select WBP9:PROD2 in the Y-Axis vectors column.

4. Press Add to List.

5. Press Apply.

A new graph will appear in the newly created pane.

6. Double-click in the title are in the upper left corner of the graph. The
Graph Title Edit panel appears.

7. Enter Pressure Match - Well PROD2

8. Press OK.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 63.

Exercises 90 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 63 Main Graph display with two plots

9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 for the well PROD3.

10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 for the well PRODUCER.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 64.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 91

Exercises

Figure EX- 64 Main Graph display with four plots

Importing Observed (User) data

Observed data can be imported in a number of formats. One of the easiest to

use is the Column Format. This is a columnar file with header information
across the top. The file is limited to 255 total characters (white space included)
per line, but multiple pages in the same file may be used to import large
numbers of data vectors. In the column format, all vectors on the same page
must share a common TIME or DATE axis and blanks are not allowed (use –
1.e33 as null).

1. Select File > Open Observed > Column Format….

2. Select the file \snark\data\exercise_5\wstp_obs.dat.

The Column Format User Data panel will appear. This panel is used to
describe the header information to ECLIPSE Office. The top part of the panel
shows the first few lines of the file as a guide.

Exercises 92 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

3. Enter numbers corresponding to the proper header line for each item.
Items not present in the file should be assigned a 0. In this case, enter a 1
for the Mnemonics, 2 for the Units, and 3 for Well and Group Names,
and 5 for First Line of Data (comment lines, beginning with --, do not
count). Enter 0 for all the other items, as shown in Figure EX- 65.

Figure EX- 65 Column Format User Data panel

4. Press OK.

Adding Observed Data to existing graphs

Currently the well PRODUCER should be the active graph (the one with the
yellow border). The active graph should be set to PROD1 before proceeding.

1. Right-click over the graph containing the plot for PROD1.

2. Select Set As Active Graph.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 93

Exercises

3. The yellow border should now be around the PROD1 plot.

4. Select LinePlot > Observed…

5. Select TIME in the X-Axis vectors column.

6. Select WSTP:PROD1 in the Y-Axis vectors column.

7. Press Add to List.

8. Check the Add to Graph button, as shown in Figure EX- 66.

9. Press Apply.

Figure EX- 66 Observed Vectors selection panel

10. Repeat steps 1 through 9 for well PROD2.

11. Repeat steps 1 through 9 for well PROD3.

12. Repeat steps 1 through 9 for well PRODUCER.

The display should now look similar to Figure EX- 67.

Exercises 94 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 67 Pressure Match plots with Observed values overlaid

Discussion

Examination of the plots constructed thus far illustrates that there is too much
pressure support coming from somewhere. This is illustrated in the pressure
and gas production data, which clearly indicate that the simulation is not
dropping below bubble point as is clear in the historical data.

The high pressure can be caused by a number of reasons; the permeability

could be too high, the aquifer could be too strong, a well of wells may be
coning, or the faults may need to be made more sealing.

Using the 3D Viewer to examine water flow

The 3D Viewer can be used to track the movement of water over time. The
user can apply thresholds on depth and water saturation in order to see only

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 95

Exercises

those cells above the OWC (3000 ft) and with water saturation above the
initial value (Swi = 0.2714).

Open the 3D Viewer and set the viewed property

1. Select Edit > 3D to open the 3D Viewer.

2. Select Grid > Property… > Display… to open the Property Selection
panel.

3. Select the Recurrent radiobutton at the top of the panel and SWAT from
the property list.

4. Press Close. The view should now show water saturation.

5. Select Display > XYZ Exaggerate….

6. Set the Z Factor to 5.

7. Press the Apply button.

Applying a threshold to the view

1. Select Grid > Property… > Threshold….

This will open the Threshold panel. Note that the current property (SWAT) is
active by default.

2. Select Initial from the radiobuttons at the top of the panel.

3. Select DEPTH from the All Properties list.

4. Move DEPTH from the All Properties list to the Active Properties list by
pressing the > button.

5. Select DEPTH in the Active Properties list. The DEPTH threshold folder
appears below.

6. Set the Maximum value to 3000.

7. Press Apply.

The 3D Viewer should now look similar to Figure EX- 68. Note how only the
cells above the OWC are visible.

Exercises 96 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 68 3D Viewer after applying a DEPTH threshold

8. In the Threshold panel, select SWAT from the Active Properties list.

This will open the SWAT folder in the panel below.

9. Set the Minimum value to 0.4.

10. The display should now look similar to Figure EX- 69.

11. Animate the display by pressing the > button.

12. When the display gets to February 1, 1981, stop the animation by
pressing the [] button.

13. Rotate the model until the well PRODUCER is clearly visible. Note the
significant coning around the well, as shown in Figure EX- 70.

14. Advance the display to the end of the run by pressing the > button.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 97

Exercises

Note how the all the wells except PROD1 have many nearby high water
saturation cells at the end of the run, but only PRODUCER shows any real
signs of coning.

Figure EX- 69 3D Viewer after applying DEPTH and SWAT thresholds

Threshold values will be remembered throughout the session, until the 3D

Viewer is closed. Therefore, to prevent the thresholds from obscuring further
work, they should be disabled.

15. In the Threshold panel, select Disable All.

16. Press Apply.

The entire model should once again be visible.

17. Select File > Close to close the 3D Viewer and return to the Results
Viewer main window.

Exercises 98 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 70 3D view showing coning around well PRODUCER

Creating a Graphics Run File

A Graphics Run File (GRF) is a file that contains all the specification needed
to re-create the 2D line graphs and solution plots in the Results Viewer. GRFs
are very powerful, since they can be edited and re-used for many other cases.

Creating a GRF is easy. In fact, it has already been done for you – all you need
to do is save it to a file!

In this course, you will create a GRF to be used for the later history matching
exercises.

1. Select File > Write GRF…

2. Enter analyze_base_case.grf in the file selection panel that

appears.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 99

Exercises

3. Press Save.

This completes the analysis of the base case. The history matching process
now begins, as you introduce changes to the model to improve the match.

4. Select File > Close to close the Results Viewer.

Exercises 100 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Exercise 6 – History Matching; Case Snark_HM-1

Introduction

This exercise illustrates the use of the Case Manager as a tool for controlling
simulation data. The user will create a clone (copy) of the base case, edit this
copy, and perform another analysis. The data set used is the Snark base case
that was built in Exercises 1-3.

In this exercise, you will learn how to create clone cases and how to import
non-keyword format data from a spreadsheet into a table, using cut and paste
techniques (on a PC) or from a file (PC or UNIX). You will also learn how to
add comments to the case. You will then use the Run Manager to control the
simulation and the Results Viewer and Report Generator to analyze the
results. Use of the GRF constructed in the previous exercise for a new case is
demonstrated. You will also compare the results of this case to the Base case
and save this as a new GRF for later use.

If you are continuing from Exercise 5, start with Step 1 under Case
Management.

Open existing project

1. To begin, start ECLIPSE Office using one of the procedures described in

Chapter 1. Make sure that ECLIPSE Office is started in the office sub-
directory created in Exercise 1.

2. Select File > Open Project.

3. Select the file snark\office\snark.off.

Case Management

ECLIPSE Office offers very robust Case Management features designed to

graphically illustrate the relationship between cases as well as reduce the
footprint of the simulation study by efficiently sharing files wherever possible.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 101

Exercises

You will start the history matching process by creating a clone (copy) of the
Base case.

Creating a clone case

1. In the Case Manager panel of the ECLIPSE Office main window, select
the base case, Snark. The selected case is always highlighted in Red.

2. Select Case > Add Case > Clone

A new case, Snark-1, is created. Note how the display shows it to be a child
(clone) of the parent case (Snark).

Changing the case name/comments

1. Click on the Snark-1 node. The case name will turn Red when it is
selected.

2. Select Case > Show

The Case Information panel appears.

3. Change the Case Name to Snark_HM-1.

NOTE: You cannot change the name after the simulation has been run the
first time. This is because ECLIPSE Office equates cases with their
runs by the case name.

4. Add the following comment to the bottom of the comments window:

First History Match case – Added laboratory PVT and

SCAL data and defined SATNUM regions.

The panel should now look similar to Figure EX- 71.

Exercises 102 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 71 Case Information Window for case Snark_HM-1

5. Press OK.

NOTE: Comments entered here do not appear in the simulation dataset.

These are stored in the ECLIPSE Office project file only.

Importing new PVT data

The PVT data is supplied in the form of a *.pvo file from PVTi. This is based
on a recombined fluid sample from well PRODUCER.

1. Press Data to open the Data Manager.

2. In the Data Manager main window, press PVT to open the PVT section.

3. Select File > Import > New

4. Answer Yes when asked to clear the section.

5. Select the file snark\data\exercise_6\snark_pvt.pvo.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 103

Exercises

6. Press Open.

Examine the imported keywords

1. Select Section > Keywords….

2. Examine each of the keywords by selecting them.

3. Select View > Plot to view the tables in graphical form.

4. Select File > Close to close the graph window.

5. Select File > Close to close the Keyword Editor panel.

6. Select File > Save As… to save the new PVT section to a new file.

Accept the default name. Note that it assumes the name of the current case.

7. Enter the following in the comment window at the top of the Save As
dialog box:

Added new PVT data from PRODUCER

8. Press OK.

9. Press OK to save the REGIONS file. Accept the default name.

10. Select File > Close to exit the PVT section.

Importing and manipulating tabular data

There are several methods for importing tabular data in ECLIPSE Office. The
first method is to import keywords, such as was demonstrated in the previous
exercise. The second method involves adding the keyword manually then
importing the data from a columnar text file. The third method is similar
except that it uses the cut and paste feature on PCs running Windows.

In this exercise, you will delete the correlated SCAL data and import three sets
of relative permeability and capillary pressure data. PC users will use the cut
and paste method and UNIX users will use the file import method.

Exercises 104 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Clearing the correlated SCAL data/Preparing to import new data

1. From the Data Manager main window, select SCAL to open the SCAL
section.

2. Select File > Clear

3. Answer Yes when asked to clear the data.

4. Select Section > Keywords

5. In the Keyword Editor panel, select Edit > Rename Tables

6. Enter PRODUCER in the To Table Set field.

7. Press OK.

8. Select Edit > Insert Keyword.

9. Select Water Saturation Functions (SWFN).

10. Select Edit > Insert Keyword.

11. Select Gas Saturation Functions (SGFN).

12. Select Edit > Insert Keyword.

13. Select Oil Saturation Functions (SOF3).

The three keywords should now be listed in the Keyword Editor panel as
shown in Figure EX- 72.

14. Select Edit > Insert Tables After

15. Enter the name PROD1 as the Table Set Name.

16. Press OK.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 105

Exercises

Figure EX- 72 SCAL section Keyword Editor panel after entering initial table

17. Select the new table PROD1 in the Saturation Tables list.

18. Select Edit > Insert Tables After

19. Enter the name INJECTOR as the Table Set Name.

20. Press OK.

Importing data using cut and paste (PC Users only)

1. Start Microsoft Excel.

2. In Excel, select File > Open

3. Select snark\data\exercise_6\rel_perm.xls.

4. Press Open.

The spreadsheet consists of three sets of columnar data, each divided by a

vertical bar. The data is arranged in the same order as the table for the
keyword for which it is intended.

Exercises 106 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

5. In the SCAL section Keyword Editor panel, select the table

PRODUCER from the Saturation Tables list.

6. Select Water Saturation Functions in the Keywords list.

7. In Excel, select the water saturation data in cells A4:C27.

8. Select Edit > Copy

9. In the SCAL section Keyword Editor panel, point at the empty table for
the Water Saturation Functions (SWFN) keyword and right-click.

10. Select Table Import > From Clipboard.

11. Accept the defaults for the Text Import Wizard panel.

The Keyword Editor panel should now look similar to Figure EX- 73.

Figure EX- 73 SCAL section Keyword Editor panel after importing SWFN data

12. Press Apply to save the new table.

13. Select the Oil Saturation Functions (SOF3) keyword.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 107

Exercises

14. In Excel, select the water saturation data in cells A30:C53.

15. Select Edit > Copy

16. In the SCAL section Keyword Editor panel, point at the empty table for
the Oil Saturation Functions (SOF3) keyword and right-click.

17. Select Table Import > From Clipboard.

18. Accept the defaults for the Text Import Wizard panel.

19. Press Apply.

20. Select the Gas Saturation Functions (SGFN) keyword.

21. In Excel , select the water saturation data in cells A57:C66.

22. Select Edit > Copy

23. In the SCAL section Keyword Editor panel, point at the empty table for
the Gas Saturation Functions (SGFN) keyword and right-click.

24. Select Table Import > From Clipboard.

25. Accept the defaults for the Text Import Wizard panel.

26. Press Apply.

27. Select the table PROD1 from the Saturation Tables list

28. Repeat steps 6 through 26 for the PROD1 tables, using the table below as
a guide:

ECLIPSE Keyword Table Excel range

SWFN F4:H27
SOF3 F30:H53
SGFN F57:H66

Exercises 108 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

NOTE: An error that will occur when trying to save the SOF3 data for
PROD1. Look in the lower left of the Status Bar to see the error.
This is an example of the powerful validation in ECLIPSE Office.
Change the value of Krowg (Krog) at an Oil Saturation of 0.7191
from 0.9695 to 0.8695 to correct the error.

29. Select the table INJECTOR from the Saturation Tables list

30. Repeat steps 6 through 26 for the INJECTOR tables, using the table
below as a guide:

ECLIPSE Keyword Table Excel range

SWFN K4:M27
SOF3 K30:M53
SGFN K57:M66

31. In Excel, select File > Exit.

Importing data from text files (optional for PC)

1. In the SCAL section Keyword Editor panel, select the table

PRODUCER from the Saturation Tables list.

2. Select Water Saturation Functions in the Keywords list.

3. Point at the empty table for the Water Saturation Functions (SWFN)
keyword and right-click.

4. Select Table Import > From File.

5. Select the file snark\data\exercise_6\krw_PRODUCER.txt.

6. Press Apply.

7. Select the Oil Saturation Functions (SOF3) keyword.

8. Point at the empty table for the Oil Saturation Functions (SOF3)
keyword and right-click.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 109

Exercises

9. Select Table Import > From File.

10. Select the file snark\data\exercise_6\kro_PRODUCER.txt.

11. Press Apply.

12. Select the Gas Saturation Functions (SGFN) keyword.

13. Point at the empty table for the Gas Saturation Functions (SGFN)
keyword and right-click.

14. Select Table Import > From File.

15. Select the file snark\data\exercise_6\krg_PRODUCER.txt.

16. Press Apply.

17. Select the table PROD1 from the Saturation Tables list

18. Repeat steps 2 through 16 for the PROD1 tables, using the table below as
a guide:

ECLIPSE Keyword Table File Name

SWFN krw_PROD1.txt
SOF3 kro_PROD1.txt
SGFN krg_PROD1.txt

NOTE: An error that will occur when trying to save the SOF3 data for
PROD1. Look in the lower left of the Status Bar to see the error.
This is an example of the powerful validation in ECLIPSE Office.
Change the value of Krowg (Krog) at an Oil Saturation of 0.7191
from 0.9695 to 0.9095 to correct the error.

19. Select the table INJECTOR from the Saturation Tables list

20. Repeat steps 2 through 16 for the INJECTOR tables, using the table
below as a guide:

Exercises 110 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

ECLIPSE Keyword Table File Name

SWFN krw_INJECTOR.txt
SOF3 kro_INJECTOR.txt
SGFN krg_INJECTOR.txt

Saving the changes to the SCAL section

1. Select File > Close to close the Keyword Editor panel

2. From the SCAL section main window, select File > Save As….

Accept the default file name.

3. Press OK.

4. Press OK to save the REGIONS file.

5. Answer Yes if prompted that the file already exists.

6. Select File > Close to close the SCAL section.

Defining Saturation Table regions

Saturation Table (SATNUM) regions are used to assign different tables of

relative permeability and capillary pressure to different areas of the grid.

You can define SATNUM regions using the graphical methods used earlier to
create FIPNUM regions, or by importing region arrays created in another
application. This can be done in either the SCAL section or the Regions
section of ECLIPSE Office.

In this example, the SATNUM regions have been created with FloGrid and the
keywords exported to a file. You will import the file and add it to the existing
regions.

Appending keywords

1. In the Data Manager main window, select Regions.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 111

Exercises

The Regions section Keyword Editor panel opens and displays the only
region currently defined, FIPNUM.

2. Select File > Import > Append….

3. Press OK when warned that existing keywords will be overwritten.

4. Select the file

snark\data\exercise_6\snark_satnum.grdecl.

5. Press Open.

The SATNUM array is now imported.

Viewing the SATNUM regions in the 3D Viewer

1. Select GridView > Run Simulation.

2. Press Yes when prompted to overwrite the .DATA file.

3. After ECLIPSE is finished, select GridView > 3D.

The 3D Viewer will open.

4. Check the current property in the color legend. If the property shown is not
SATNUM, select Grid > Property > Display and select SATNUM.

The display now shows the SATNUM regions.

Note that there is no Region 1 defined. It is not unusual in ECLIPSE to have

more tables defined in the run than are actually used in any given case. This is
because it is generally easier to simply adjust the region definitions than to add
and remove tables.

5. Select File > Close to close the 3D Viewer.

Saving the Regions file

1. Select File > Save As….

2. Press OK, accepting the default name.

Exercises 112 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

3. Press OK when warned that the file already exists.

CAUTION: A Regions section include file may be created whenever

you save a Grid, PVT, SCAL, or Initialization file. The file
for this particular case was created when you saved the
PVT section. Always make sure you understand what is in
the Regions include file before overwriting it!

4. Select File > Close to close the Regions section.

5. Select File > Close to close the Data Manager.

6. Select File > Save Project in the ECLIPSE Office main window.

Running the case

1. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, press the Run button to open
the Run Manager.

2. Check the Host Name, Simulator Version and Executable Name fields.
These should show the name of your local machine, the current simulator
version and the correct path to the eclipse.exe executable. Your instructor
will advise the correct values.

NOTE: If the settings are not correct, check the Environment setting to
make sure it is set to NON-PVM LOCAL. If the values are still
incorrect, press the Reset button.

3. Check that the Environment field is set to NON-PVM LOCAL.

4. Check that all the input and output File Types listed on the right-hand side
of the panel are set to Multiple and Unformatted (binary).

5. Insure that the Turn Off Simulation checkbox is UN-checked.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 113

Exercises

6. Select Submit > Runs (or press the button on the toolbar).

7. Select Yes when prompted to overwrite the .DATA file.

Why would you ever NOT want to overwrite the .DATA file?

Analyzing the Results

In this example, you will edit the Graphics Run File (GRF) created in the
previous exercise and use it for this case.

You will then add the results of the base case to see if there was any
improvement. The new graphs will be saved to another Graphics Run File
for later use.

Editing a Graphics Run File

1. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, select Util > Text Editor.

2. Select the file analyze_base_case.grf. This should have been

saved in the snark\office directory in the previous exercise. If
working from the solutions, copy this file to the snark\office
directory.

The Graphics Run File appears in a Text Editor window, similar to Figure
EX- 74.

In order to use this file with another case, you need to replace the name of the
old case with the name of the new case.

Exercises 114 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 74 Text Editor panel showing the base case Graphics Run File

3. In the Text Editor window, select Edit > Replace.

4. Enter SNARK_E100 in the Find What: field,

5. In the Replace With: field, enter SNARK_HM-1_E100.

TIP: If your case is not named SNARK_HM-1 then in the step above, use
the name of your case in the Case Manager with _E100 appended
onto the end. This is the naming format used by ECLIPSE Office
for all ECLIPSE 100 (Black Oil) runs.

6. Press Replace All.

7. Press OK at the prompt that appears reporting how many changes were
made. The panel should report that 42 changes were made.

8. Press Cancel on the Replace panel.

9. Select File > Save As from the Text Editor window.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 115

Exercises

10. Enter analyze_hm1_case.grf.

11. Press Save.

12. Select File > Close to close the Text Editor.

The GRF used for the previous exercise can now be used with this case to
quickly re-create the diagnostic plots.

Running the GRF

13. After the simulation run is finished, select File > Close in the Run
Manager panel.

14. Press the Result button in the ECLIPSE Office main window.

15. Select File > Open GRF….

16. Select analyze_hm1_case.grf.

17. Press Open.

Be patient while the GRF loads the data and creates the plots.

18. Examine the match on all the plots.

Note how the pressure match is much better, although it is still too high in
most of the wells. Also, notice that the gas production is still too low, but
water production is a good match.

Comparing results of different cases

Next, you will import the results of the base case and add these to the existing
plots. The resulting plots will be saved and used with future history match
cases.

Loading the results of a different case

Before cases can be compared, all the cases need to be loaded.

Exercises 116 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

1. From the Results Viewer main window, select File > Open > Summary.

2. Select SNARK_E100.SMSPEC.

3. Press Open.

4. The Load/Extract Summary Vectors panel opens, as shown in the

previous exercise.

5. Insure that both the checkboxes in the upper left of the panel are checked
and press Load.

6. Select File > Open > Solution.

The Import Properties panel opens as shown in Figure EX- 75.

Figure EX- 75 Import Properties panel

By default, the panel will list the first .GRID, .INIT and restart files found in
the working directory. In this exercise, the first file encountered should be the
correct one (SNARK_E100). However, if it is not, use the Browse… buttons

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 117

Exercises

to select the SNARK_E100.GRID (or .EGRID) and

SNARK_E100.INIT files. Then select the SNARK_E100 restart file from
the list of restarts.

7. Enter SNARK_E100 in the Origin field at the bottom of the panel. The
Origin name is how the case will be referred to in the Results Viewer.

8. Press OK.

The Load/Extract Solutions panel will appear as shown in the previous

exercise.

9. Insure that both checkboxes in the upper left of the panel are checked and
press Load.

Adding a different case to existing graphs

1. If the Field Production Rate plot is not the main graph, double–click, or
drag and drop, the Field Production Rate plot into the main graph.

2. Select LinePlot > User.

The User Template panel appears as shown in Figure EX- 76. Note the
addition of a new column with the two loaded cases shown.

Exercises 118 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 76 User Templates panel with multiple cases loaded

3. In the Names column, select SNARK_E100.

4. In the X-Axis Vectors column, select TIME.

5. Scroll down the Y-Axis Vectors column, until FOPR is visible.

6. Press and hold the Ctrl key and select FOPR.

7. Scroll down the Y-Axis Vectors column, until FWPR is visible.

8. Press and hold the Ctrl key and select FWPR.

9. Press Add to List.

The three vectors should now appear in the Vectors to Plot/Save column.

10. Click the Add Lines to Display radio button.

11. Press OK.

The new lines are added to the Field Production Rate plot.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 119

Exercises

Adjusting the Legend display on the main graph

Note how the new vectors are listed in the Legend. FWPR and FOPR were
added to the bottom of each Legend column and FGPR is hidden behind the
graph. ECLIPSE Office attempts to build a visible legend using the Graph
Legend Style settings, but often this is handled improperly when adding lines
to existing graphs. The following procedure can be used whenever this occurs.

1. Select Options > Graph Legend Style.

The Graph Legend Configuration panel opens as shown in Figure EX- 77

2. Set the number of columns to Three.

3. Press OK.

Figure EX- 77 Graph Legend Configuration panel

The main display should now look like Figure EX- 78.

Exercises 120 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 78 Results Viewer main window after adjusting Legend Style

Next, you will move the Legend items into a more desirable order and change
the line type and color of the base case data for more intuitive visual
comparison.

Changing the order of Legend items

1. Click on the FOPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100) legend item. The item
will show a yellow background when selected.

2. Click and drag the FOPR legend item to the top of the right-had side list
(above FWPR and FGPR).

3. Click and drag the FGPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100) legend item in
between the FOPR and FWPR items.

Changing Legend properties

4. Point the mouse at the FOPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100) legend item
and right-click.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 121

Exercises

5. Select Properties for [FOPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100)].

The Data Style Property Editing panel appears.

6. Select the Line Style tab

7. Set the Line Type to Dashed and the color to Green.

8. Select the Plot Style tab.

9. Select Left Histogram.

10. Press OK.

11. Point the mouse at the FGPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100) legend item
and right-click.

12. Select Properties for [FGPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100)].

13. Select the Line Style tab

14. Set the Line Type to Dashed and the color to Red.

15. Select the Plot Style tab.

16. Select Left Histogram.

17. Press OK.

18. Point the mouse at the FWPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100) legend item
and right-click.

19. Select Properties for [FWPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100)].

20. Select the Line Style tab

21. Set the Line Type to Dashed and the color to Blue.

22. Select the Plot Style tab.

23. Select Left Histogram.

24. Press OK.

Exercises 122 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Editing the Legend text

1. Point the mouse at the FOPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100) legend item
and right-click.

2. Select Edit Text [FOPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100)].

The Legend Text Editor panel appears. The current Legend Text is all stored
in the first of three available fields.

3. Click in the Legend Text field and remove the “vs. TIME” string, leaving
only FOPR (SNARK_E100), as shown in Figure EX- 79.

Figure EX- 79 Legend Text Editor panel

4. Press OK.

5. Point the mouse at the FGPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100) legend item
and right-click.

6. Select Edit Text [FGPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100)].

7. Click in the Legend Text field and remove the “vs. TIME” string, leaving
only FGPR (SNARK_E100).

8. Press OK.

9. Point the mouse at the FWPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100) legend item
and right-click.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 123

Exercises

10. Select Edit Text [FWPR vs. TIME (SNARK_E100)].

11. Click in the Legend Text field and remove the “vs. TIME” string, leaving
only FWPR (SNARK_E100).

12. Press OK.

13. Repeat steps 1 through 12 for all the other Legend items.

The main panel should now look similar to Figure EX- 80.

Figure EX- 80 Main Display after cleanup of Legend

Editing Axis text

Note how the addition of the vectors to the existing plot also added the
additional vectors to both Y-Axes. It is often desirable to clean up the axis
labels, or change the units before printing. The axis labels and/or units can be
changed as follows:

1. Select Options > Y-Axis Settings.

Exercises 124 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

The Y-Axis Settings panel for the primary Y-Axis is displayed as shown in
Figure EX- 81.

2. Change the Title field to Oil,Water (i.e. remove FWPR and FOPR).

3. Press OK.

Figure EX- 81 Axis Property Editing panel

Editing of any Y-Axis can also be performed by right-clicking over the desired
axis. For a secondary axis, this is the only way to edit the axis.

4. Point at the Y-Axis on the right-hand side of the main graph (Gas).

5. Right-click and select Show Edit Box.

6. Change the axis Title to read simply Gas.

7. Press OK.

The Field Production Rate plot should now look like Figure EX- 82.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 125

Exercises

Figure EX- 82 Field Production Rate plot after editing Legend and Y-Axes

Saving the Graphics Run File

You will now save the modifications you made to the plots to a graphics run
file for use with the next exercise.

1. Select File > Write GRF….

2. Select the file analyze_hm1_case.grf.

3. Select Yes when prompted to overwrite the file.

4. Select File > Close to close the Results Viewer.

Exercises 126 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Exercise 7 – History Matching; Case Snark_HM-2

Introduction

This exercise continues to illustrate the use of the Case Manager as a tool for
controlling simulation data. You will create a clone (copy) of the first history
match case, edit this copy, and perform another analysis. The data set used is
the Snark_HM-1 case that was built in Exercise 6.

In this exercise, you will learn how to replace existing keywords with new
values. You will also learn how to add comments to individual keywords. You
will then use the Run Manager to control the simulation and the Results
Viewer and Report Generator to analyze the results. The GRF from the
previous example is used to create a set of line plots for analysis. In addition,
2D solution plots and line plots generated from solution data will be created.
Additional features of the 2D and 3D Viewers are illustrated.

If you are continuing from Exercise 6, start with Step 1 under Case
Management.

Open existing project

1. To begin, start ECLIPSE Office using one of the procedures described in

Chapter 1. Make sure that ECLIPSE Office is started in the office sub-
directory created in Exercise 1.

2. Select File > Open Project.

3. Select the file snark\office\snark.off.

Case Management

If you decide to keep the changes made during the previous history match
case, then you probably want to create the next case as a clone of the history
match case. However, if you decide NOT to keep the results of the history
match case, then you should create your next case by creating another close of
the Base case.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 127

Exercises

In this study, the PVT and SCAL data imported into the SNARK_HM-1 case
will be kept.

Creating a clone case

1. In the Case Manager panel of the ECLIPSE Office main window, select
the first history match case, Snark_HM-1. The selected case is always
highlighted in Red.

2. Right-click and select Add Clone Case.

A new case, Snark_HM-1-0, is created. Note how the display shows it to be a

child (clone) of the first history match case (Snark_HM-1).

Changing the case name/comments

1. Click on the Snark_HM-1-0 node. The case name will turn Red when it is
selected.

2. Double-click on the node name.

The Case Information panel appears.

3. Change the Case Name to Snark_HM-2.

NOTE: You cannot change the name after the simulation has been run the
first time. This is because ECLIPSE Office equates cases with their
runs by the case name.

4. Add the following comment to the bottom of the comments window:

2nd history match case – replaced constant props with

map data.

5. Press OK.

Exercises 128 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Importing new reservoir property data

The reservoir property data is supplied in the form of a *.grdecl file from
FloGrid.

1. Press Data to open the Data Manager.

2. In the Data Manager main window, press Grid to open the Grid section.

3. Select File > Import > Append

4. Select the file snark\data\exercise_7\snark_props.grdecl.

5. Press Open.

Examine the imported keywords in the 3D Viewer

1. Select GridView > From Keywords….

2. Answer Yes to write the EGRID file.

3. Select GridView > 3D.

4. Select Display > XYZ Exaggerate….

5. Set the Z-Factor to 4.

6. Press Apply.

7. Press Close.

8. In the 3D Viewer panel, select Grid > Property > Display.

9. In the Property Display panel, select PORO.

10. Examine the new porosity data

11. In the Property Display panel, select PERMX.

12. Examine the new permeability data.

13. In the Property Display panel, select NTG.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 129

Exercises

14. Examine the net-to-gross data. Note that the NTG legend shows a
maximum value greater than 1. This may indicate a data problem since
NTG should be constrained between 0 and 1.

15. Select File > Close to close the 3D Viewer.

Using the Box Editor (MinValue, MaxValue)

1. Select Subsection > GRID Keywords….

2. Select Properties in the Keyword Type column.

3. Select Net to Gross Thickness Ratios (NTG) from the Keywords list.

Note that many values greater than 1 are immediately apparent.

4. Select Edit > Box.

5. Set the Operation to MinValue.

6. Enter a 0 in the Data value field, as shown in Figure EX- 83.

Figure EX- 83 Array Box Selection panel (MinValue)

7. Press Apply.

8. Set the Operation to MaxValue.

9. Enter a 1 in the Data value field, as shown in Figure EX- 84.

Exercises 130 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 84 Array Box Editor panel (MaxValue)

10. Press Apply.

11. Press Close.

The display should now show the new values.

12. Press Apply in the NTG Keyword Editor panel.

Adding comments to keywords

1. Select Porosity in the Keywords column.

2. In the text box at the top of the Porosity (PORO) keyword panel, enter the
following comment:

Porosity data from average well values w/5% cutoff.

3. Press Apply.

4. Select File > Close.

Saving the properties to a new file (Advanced Save)

1. Select File > Save As… to save the Grid section to a new file.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 131

Exercises

In this example only the grid properties have changed. There were no changes
to the geometry or other keywords. Since the GRID section data is often very
large, ECLIPSE Office divides the data into five separate files, with the
keywords grouped by their Keyword Type.

To save space, only save the files that were changed.

2. In the Save File As panel, press the Advanced button.

3. In the Saving File As – Advanced panel, uncheck all the items in the
Section to Save list, except GRID PROPERTIES.

4. Make sure that both check boxes in the Options section are checked.

5. Press Save.

6. In the Grid section main window, select File > Close.

7. In the Data Manager main window, select File > Close.

Running the case

1. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, press the Run button to open
the Run Manager.

2. Select Submit > Runs (or press the button on the toolbar).

3. Select Yes if prompted to overwrite the .DATA file.

Killing a case

Note that as the run progresses, a number of WARNING messages are printed
regarding the convergence of the linear equations. Do not proceed until the
WARNING messages begin to appear

1. Select Monitor > Kill All Simulations….

2. In the Kill All Simulations panel, check the box next to Kill Case
SNARK_HM-2_E100.

3. Press OK.

Exercises 132 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Examining the Warning messages

1. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, select Report to enter the
Report Generator.

2. Select File > Open Current Case > PRT.

3. Select Errors, ... from the Report drop-down.

4. Check the ERRORS and WARNINGS checkbox.

5. Press Generate Report.

6. Press the Output button.

7. Carefully examine all the WARNING messages.

There are a number of warnings about linear convergence failures. These are
acceptable since they are happening in iterations other than the final solution.
If the linear equations are not converged after the last Newton iteration,
ECLIPSE will either automatically reduce the time step size or report a
PROBLEM.

Next, you will implement the recommendation of the WARNING message.

8. Select File > Close to close the Report Generator window.

Tuning the Simulation

The WARNING messages suggest a possible way to fix the problem, by

increasing LITMAX in the TUNING keyword.

The TUNING keyword in ECLIPSE is used to control convergence and time

stepping. This keyword will be inserted into the Schedule section.

1. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, press the Data button.

2. Press Schedule in the Data Manager main window.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 133

Exercises

Using the Keyword Explorer

1. Select Edit > Explore Keywords….

2. In the Explore Keywords panel, press the Toggle Desc/Keys button until
the keywords are shown.

3. Scroll down the list and select TUNING.

4. The keyword should be inserted automatically, if not, press Apply.

5. Press Close.

6. In the Keyword Editor panel, press Next Page twice, until the panel
shows Page 3 of 3.

7. Enter 40 in the Max. Linear Iteration in a Newton field.

8. Press Apply.

9. Select File > Save As….

10. Press OK in the Schedule File Save As panel, accepting the default file
name.

11. Answer Yes if prompted to overwrite the file.

TIP: Increasing LITMAX rarely works alone. It is always good to

increase NSTACK as well. NSTACK is the number of previous
solutions ECLIPSE keeps to use to calculate the next time step.
However, it is also common that increasing these variables has little
effect other than to slow down the run. Therefore, the engineer must
determine the best combination of LITMAX and NSTACK for each
case.

12. Select File > Close to close the Schedule section.

13. In the Data Manager main window, press Case Definition.

14. Select the Misc tab.

15. Set the Stack Size of Previous search directions to 40.

Exercises 134 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

16. Press OK.

17. Select File > Close to close the Data Manager.

18. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, press the Run button to open
the Run Manager.

19. Select Submit > Runs (or press the button on the toolbar).

20. Select Yes when prompted to overwrite the .DATA file.

Discussion

Note as the run progresses that there are still convergence problems reported
after 274 days, but less than in the previous run. However, the run is also
going considerably slower. You could continue to adjust the TUNING
variables in an attempt to make the run converge faster, or simply accept the
performance decrease. For this exercise, you will fix the problem.

One of the most common causes of convergence problems is high throughput.

If you observe the run as it is running, after the first year you can easily see
that the water production is significantly higher than the injection, and is much
higher than in the previous runs. This suggests a problem with either the
aquifer or the vertical permeability.

1. In the Run Manager window, select Monitor > Kill All Simulations….

2. In the Kill All Simulations panel, check the box next to Kill Case
SNARK_HM-2_E100.

3. Press OK.

4. Select File > Close to close the Run Manager.

Correcting PERMZ

1. Press Data to open the Data Manager.

2. In the Data Manager main window, press Grid to open the Grid section.

3. Answer Yes if asked to recalculate the well positions.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 135

Exercises

4. Select Subsection > GRID Keywords….

5. Select Properties in the Keyword Type column.

6. Select X Permeability (PERMX) from the Keywords list.

Make a mental note of the first couple of values you see in the table.

7. Select Z Permeability (PERMZ) from the Keywords list.

Note how the values are nearly the same. You will apply a 0.1 multiplier to the
PERMZ values to reduce the vertical throughput.

8. Select Edit > Box.

9. Set the Operation to Multiply.

10. Enter a 0.1 in the Multiplier field.

11. Press Apply.

12. Press Close.

13. Press Apply in the PERMZ Keyword Editor panel.

14. In the Grid section Keyword Editor panel, select File > Close.

15. In the Grid section main window select File > Save File….

16. Press the Save button, accepting the defaults.

TIP: You do not need to include any comments when using the Box
Editor. ECLIPSE Office does this automatically!

Why is it OK to use Save File instead of Save File As in this case?

17. Select File > Close to close the Grid section.

Exercises 136 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

18. Select File > Close to close the Data Manager.

19. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, press the Run button to open
the Run Manager.

20. Select Submit > Runs (or press the button on the toolbar).

21. Select Yes when prompted to overwrite the .DATA file.

Note that the case is running much faster and the convergence problems are
gone.

Analyzing the results

In this example, you will again use the Graphics Run File (GRF) created in
the previous exercise. This latest version of the GRF contains the original line
plots from Exercise 5 – Analyzing the Base Case, and the comparison to the
clone case created in Exercise 6 – History Matching; Case Snark_HM-1.

You will then learn how to make 2D solution plots and create line plots of
solution data. In addition, the use of the Rubber Band Zoom, Cell Probe and
IJK Slicer features in both the 2D and 3D Viewers is illustrated.

Editing a Graphics Run File

1. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, select Util > Text Editor.

2. Select the file analyze_hm1_case.grf. This should have been saved

it the snark\office directory in the previous exercise. If working from
the solutions, copy this file to the snark\office directory.

3. In the Text Editor window, select Edit > Replace.

4. Enter SNARK_HM-1_E100 in the Find What: field,

5. In the Replace With: field, enter SNARK_HM-2_E100.

TIP: If your case is not named SNARK_HM-2 then in the step above, use
the name of your case in the Case Manager with _E100 appended

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 137

Exercises

onto the end. This is the naming format used by ECLIPSE Office
for all ECLIPSE 100 (Black Oil) runs.

6. Press Replace All.

7. Press OK at the prompt that appears reporting how many changes were
made. The panel should report that 42 changes were made.

8. Enter SNARK_E100 in the Find What: field,

9. In the Replace With: field, enter SNARK_HM-1_E100.

10. Press Replace All.

11. Press OK at the prompt that appears reporting how many changes were
made. The panel should report that 14 changes were made.

12. Press Cancel on the Replace panel.

13. Select File > Save As from the Text Editor window.

14. Enter analyze_hm2_case.grf.

15. Press Save.

16. Select File > Close to close the Text Editor.

Running the GRF

1. After the simulation run is finished, select File > Close in the Run
Manager panel.

2. Press the Result button in the ECLIPSE Office main window.

3. Select File > Open GRF….

4. Select analyze_hm2_case.grf.

5. Press Open.

Be patient while the GRF loads the data and creates the plots.

6. Examine the match on all the plots.

Exercises 138 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Using Rubberband Zoom with line plots

1. Select View > Rubberband Zoom In.

Note how the cursor changes to a magnifying glass with a + symbol to indicate
zooming in.

2. Click on the plot at approximately 5500 days and 7600 MSCF/day. Hold
the mouse button down and drag the cursor to a point at approximately
7800 days and 3200 MSCF/day.

The display should look similar to Figure EX- 85.

Figure EX- 85 Rubberband Zoom in a line plot

When the mouse button is released, the display will zoom to the selected area
as shown in Figure EX- 86.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 139

Exercises

Figure EX- 86 Display after Rubberband Zoom operation

Note how the water production match has worsened, but gas production is up,
although still far too low. Examination of the well pressure plots also shows
that the pressures are still too high in most cases.

Jumping to a specific well plot

1. Double-click on the Well Production Rate plot to make it the main graph.

2. Select View > Jump to Well/Group….

3. Select PRODUCER in the Select Well/Group Name panel.

4. The Well Production Rate plot for PRODUCER becomes the main
graph.

5. Press Close in the Select Well/Group Name panel.

You can easily see that the majority of the water production is coming from
this well. Recall from Exercise 5 – Analyzing the Base Case that coning is

Exercises 140 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

present in the model in the area around PRODUCER. This was examined in
the 3D Viewer using thresholds to see the growth of the cone over time

You will now create a view of the coning from a different perspective. You
will create a 2D solution plot of water saturation, select the cell containing
PRODUCER, then create a cross-section through the well. Next, you will
create line plots of the water saturation versus depth for the selected IJ column
at different times to see the advancement of the cone.

Creating a 2D solution plot

1. Select View > 2D.

2. Select the grid SNARK_HM-2 in the Select Grid panel.

3. Press OK.

A 2D plot of the initial Oil Saturation (SOIL) is displayed, as shown in Figure

EX- 87.

Figure EX- 87 2D Solution plot of SOIL

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 141

Exercises

4. Select 2D > Property….

The Property Selector panel appears.

5. Select the Recurrent Property radiobutton.

6. Select SWAT from the property list.

The panel should look like Figure EX- 88.

Figure EX- 88 Property Selector dialog box

7. Press OK.

Creating a 2D Cross Section

1. Select Edit > Add New Graph….

2. Select 2D > Cross Section > Generate

A Cross Section plot is created next to the areal graph as shown in Figure
EX- 89.

Note the location of the cross section line on the areal display.

3. Point at the cross section line in the areal display.

4. Right-click and select Anchor > To Well….

5. Select PRODUCER in the Select Anchor Well panel.

Exercises 142 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 89 2D Solution Plot with Cross Section display

6. Press OK.

The cross section line moves to the location of well PRODUCER. An anchor,
indicate by a red * symbol, is placed as the well location so that the cross
section can be rotated around the well.

For this exercise, we want the cross section to be east-west in order to

examine the behavior of the fault.

Creating a line plot of solution data

The next step is to create a new graph containing a water saturation versus
depth plot for the column of cells containing the well PRODUCER at initial
time.

1. Select 2D > Pick.

The Cell Probe panel will appear. It is not needed for this part of the exercise.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 143

Exercises

2. Press Close in the Cell Probe panel.

3. In the areal display, select the cell containing the well PRODUCER.

4. Select Edit > Add New Graph….

5. Select LinePlot > Solution > Depth vs. Solution

An initial Depth vs. Solution plot appears in the new graph, as shown in
Figure EX- 90.

Figure EX- 90 Depth vs. Solution plot at T=0

Changing Timesteps in the 2D Viewer

1. Click anywhere in the color filled area of the areal plot to make it the
active graph (yellow border).

2. Select Tools > Timestep….

The Timestep Selector panel appears.

Exercises 144 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

3. Scroll down and select the last timestep (251) 01 Dec 2000.

4. Press OK.

Note how both displays in the main graph now show the last timestep.

5. Select Edit > Add New Graph….

6. Select LinePlot > Solution > Depth vs. Solution

A Depth vs. Solution plot for the last timestep appears in the new graph, as
shown in Figure EX- 91.

Figure EX- 91 Depth vs. Solution plot at last timestep

Using the Cell Probe with 2D Solution plots

In addition to viewing the solution as a color filled graph, the value of the
current solution as well as any other solution can be simultaneously displayed
using the Cell Probe.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 145

Exercises

1. Select View > 2D.

2. Select SNARK_HM-2_E100 in the Select Grid panel.

3. Press OK.

A 2D plot of the initial Oil Saturation (SOIL) is displayed in the

main graph.

4. Select 2D > Pick.

The Cell Probe panel appears.

5. In the Cell Probe panel, select Initial from the Property radiobuttons.

6. Select PERMZ in the All Properties list.

7. Move PERMZ to the Probe Properties list by pressing the > button.

8. Select Recurrent from the Property radiobuttons.

9. Select SWAT in the All Properties list.

10. Press the Ctrl button and select PRESSURE in the All Properties list.

11. Press the > button to move these items to the Probe Properties list.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 92.

12. Press Apply.

13. In the main graph, select any cell.

Observe that the requested properties are shown in the Cell Probe panel.

14. Practice selecting groups of cells by Ctrl-clicking on multiple cells.

15. Experiment with the effects of the various setting on the Cell Probe panel.

16. In the Cell Probe panel, select Close.

Exercises 146 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Using Rubberband Zoom in the 2D Solution plot

1. Select 2D > Cross Section > Generate.

A cross section is automatically created as new graph in the same picture.

Figure EX- 92 Cell Probe panel

2. Point at the cross section line in the areal display.

Note how the cursor changes to a hand symbol when you are over the line.

3. Click on the cross section line and drag it to the vicinity of well
PRODUCER.

4. Click on the Cross Section graph to make it the active graph.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 147

Exercises

5. Select View > Rubberband Zoom In.

6. Select an area on the cross section that includes only the cells near the well
PRODUCER.

The display should be similar to Figure EX- 93.

Figure EX- 93 Rubberband Zoom in a cross section display

Animating 2D solution plots

1. Select Tools > Animate > Run.

The display will now run through time, displaying the change in oil saturation
over time.

Using the IJK Slicer in the 2D Viewer

1. Click on the areal graph to make it the active graph.

2. Select 2D > Slice….

Exercises 148 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

3. Right-click on the background of the Slice Selector panel, select

AutoApply is Off.

4. Select I in the Direction radiobutton group

5. Use the > button on the slider bar to scroll through the I cells (cross
section)

6. Select J in the Direction radiobutton group

7. Use the > button on the slider bar to scroll through the J cells (cross
section)

8. Select K in the Direction radiobutton group

9. Use the > button on the slider bar to scroll through the K cells (areal)

10. Press OK.

Saving the Graphics Run File

You will now save the modifications you made to the plots to a graphics run
file for use with the next exercise.

1. Select File > Write GRF….

2. Select the file analyze_hm2_case.grf.

3. Press Save.

4. Select Yes when prompted to overwrite the file.

Viewing the results in the 3D Viewer

Many of the features provided in the 2D Solution Viewer are also relevant to
viewing the model in 3D. In this exercise, the Rubberband Zoom, Cell Probe,
Animation and IJK Slicer features can be used with either 2D or 3D views. In
addition, the 3D viewer features other functions such as grid transparency and
more robust well display controls.

1. Select View > 3D.

2. Select SNARK_HM-2_E100 in the Select Grid panel.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 149

Exercises

3. Press OK.

A 3D plot of the initial Oil Saturation (SOIL) is displayed in the 3D Viewer

window.

Using Rubberband Zoom in the 3D Viewer

1. Select Display > Set View > Top.

2. Select Display > Rubber Band Zoom.

3. Click on one corner of a box around the cells near well PRODUCER.

4. Drag the mouse to the opposite corner of the box. The well PRODUCER
should lie within the box.

The display should look similar to Figure EX- 94.

Figure EX- 94 3D Viewer showing Rubber Band Zoom

Exercises 150 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

5. Select Display > Rubber Band Zoom to turn off zooming.

TIP: When Rubber Band Zoom is turned off, the display remains in the
zoomed position. To remove the zoom, select Display > Undo
Rubber Band Zoom or Display > Reset Rubber Band Zoom.

TIP: Always set the view to a plan or cross-section view before using the
Rubber Band Zoom. When the zoom box is projected into a grid
that is randomly oriented in 3D space, the result of the zoom may be
slightly off-center.

Using the Cell Probe in the 3D Viewer

1. Select Grid > Property > Cell Probe.

The Cell Probe panel appears.

2. In the Cell Probe panel, select Initial from the Property radiobuttons.

3. Select PERMZ in the All Properties list.

4. Move PERMZ to the Probe Properties list by pressing the > button.

5. Select Recurrent from the Property radiobuttons.

6. Select SWAT in the All Properties list.

7. Press the Ctrl button and select PRESSURE in the All Properties list.

8. Press the > button to move these items to the Probe Properties list.

9. Check the Always On Top button.

10. In the 3D Viewer, select any cell.

Observe that the requested properties are shown in the Cell Probe panel.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 151

Exercises

11. In the Cell Probe panel, select Close.

Normalizing the View

Sometimes it is useful to restore the display to the full visual extent of the
model. This can be done manually or set to happen automatically when the
view changed. The default is to force manual Normalization.

1. Select Display > Normalize….

2. Press Normalize View.

3. Press Apply.

4. Press Close.

Using the IJK Slicer in the 3D Viewer

The IJK Slicer in the 2D Solution Viewer is limited to displaying a slice in

either I, J or K. In the 3D Viewer, however, there is no such limitation. You
can select any combination of I, J and K slices, and/or limit the view to a
range of cells, as is demonstrated below.

1. Select Grid > IJK Slice….

2. Select the IJ Slicing tab

3. Select 8 in the I-Direction column.

4. Press the Ctrl key and select 13 in the I-Direction column.

5. Select 9 in the J-Direction column.

6. Press the K Slicing tab.

7. Select 6 in the K-Direction column.

Note how the view has changed to include the selected I and J slices, as well
as all of layer 6.

8. In the K-Slicing tab, check the Honour IJ Slicing box.

Note the view now changes to show only layer 6 for the selected I and J slices.

Exercises 152 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

9. In the K-Slicing tab, un-check the Honour IJ Slicing box.

10. Select the IJK Extents tab.

11. Set the values in the sliders to the following values:

Slider I J K
Min 4 7 1

Max 20 11 23

Changing the well display

Note that two wells are visible in the 3D Viewer. This is because the default
behavior is to only show wells when any of their connections lie in one of the
cells currently in the display. This behavior can be changed as illustrated
below.

1. Select Grid > Wells….

The Wells panel is displayed as shown in Figure EX- 95.

Figure EX- 95 Wells panel in the 3D Viewer

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 153

Exercises

2. Check the Well Status, Connections and Show All Wells boxes.

3. Press Apply.

Note that the wells are now shown, along with a status icon above each well.
The perforations are also shown. The color of the object will change as the
wells are opened and closed.

Using Grid Transparency

1. Select Grid > Display > Transparency….

2. Set the Grid Transparency value to 0.7.

3. Press Apply.

4. Select Display > XYZ Exaggerate….

5. Set the Z Factor to 4.

6. Press Close.

7. Select Grid > Display > Outlines to remove the grid cells outlines.

8. Rotate and Zoom the display until it looks similar to Figure EX- 96.

Exercises 154 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 96 3D View with Transparency and IJK limits

Timesteps and Animation in the 3D Viewer

As discussed previously, well PRODUCER is experiencing severe water

production believed to be from coning. This is very apparent in the 3D
Viewer.

1. Select Grid > Timesteps….

2. In the Timesteps panel, press the Play > button.

3. Observe the growth of the cone around PRODUCER.

4. After the animation has finished, select step 51 in the Timesteps panel.

The display now jumps to the specified timestep.

5. Experiment with the IJK Slicer and animation to get a clear mental
picture of the coning effect.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 155

Exercises

6. Press Close in the Timesteps panel.

7. In the Grid Transparency panel, move the slider all the way to Min. The
panel should now report the transparency as 0.

8. Press Apply.

9. Press Close.

10. In the IJK Slice panel, press the Reset All Domains panel.

11. Press Close.

12. Select File > Close in the 3D Viewer window.

13. In the Results Viewer main window, select File > Close.

14. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select File > Save Project.

Exercises 156 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Exercise 8 – History Matching; Case Snark_HM-3

Introduction

This exercise continues to illustrate the use of the Case Manager as a tool for
controlling simulation data. The user will create a clone (copy) of the second
history match case, edit this copy, and perform another analysis. The data set
used is the Snark_HM-2 case that was built in Exercise 7.

In this exercise, you will adjust the aquifer values and import a file containing
a MULTNUM array using the Data Manager. You will then use the Run
Manager to control the simulation and the Results Viewer and Report
Generator to analyze the results. You will then learn how to delete keywords
and cases. The GRF from the previous example is used to create a set of line
plots for analysis. Additional features of the 2D and 3D viewers are illustrated.

If you are continuing from Exercise 7, start with Step 1 under Case
Management.

Open existing project

1. To begin, start ECLIPSE Office using one of the procedures described in

Chapter 1. Make sure that ECLIPSE Office is started in the office sub-
directory created in Exercise 1.

2. Select File > Open Project.

3. Select the file snark\office\snark.off.

Case Management

In this study, you will keep the results from the previous case (SNARK_HM-2)
as a basis for the next case. Therefore, you will create a new case that is a
clone of SNARK_HM-2.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 157

Exercises

Creating a clone case

1. In the Case Manager panel of the ECLIPSE Office main window, select
the second history match case, Snark_HM-2. The selected case is always
highlighted in Red.

2. Right-click and select Add Clone Case.

A new case, Snark_HM-2-0, is created. Note how the display shows it to be a

child (clone) of the second history match case (Snark_HM-2).

Changing the case name/comments

1. Click on the Snark_HM-2-0 node. The case name will turn Red when it is
selected.

2. Double-click on the node name.

The Case Information panel appears.

3. Change the Case Name to Snark_HM-3.

NOTE: You cannot change the name after the simulation has been run the
first time. This is because ECLIPSE Office equates cases with their
runs by the case name.

4. Add the following comment to the bottom of the comments window:

3rd history match case – changed aquifer definition

and applied region multipliers to control flow
across faults

5. Press OK.

Exercises 158 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Data Management

Importing MULTNUM data

The keyword MULTNUM is another way to define fault data. Earlier in the
study, you imported the FAULTS keyword. The FAULTS keyword allows
you to provide names for faults and then apply transmissibility multipliers
using the keyword MULTFLT. This keyword is very easy to use, but can be
difficult to setup when multiple fault blocks are involved.

For example, consider a reservoir with a large north-south fault and a smaller
east-west fault that dies out at the north-south fault. One the left side of the
main fault, you have one large fault block. On the right side of the main fault,
you have two blocks separated by the east-west fault. Both of these fault
blocks contact the larger fault block on the other side of the main fault.

With the FAULTS keyword, it would be necessary to split the main fault into
two pseudo-faults so that the transmissibility across the barriers of each of the
smaller fault blocks with the main fault block can be individually controlled.

The MULTNUM keyword offers an easier alternative in many cases. This

keyword consists of an array assigning each cell to a fault block. The flow
from any block to any other block can be controlled using the MULTREGT
keyword. FloGrid can automatically generate these keywords for you during
the building of the reservoir grid.

The MULTNUM and MULTREGT data for this exercise is supplied in the form
of a *.grdecl file from FloGrid.

1. Press Data to open the Data Manager.

2. In the Data Manager main window, press Grid to open the Grid section.

3. Select File > Import > Append

4. Select the file

snark\data\exercise_8\snark_multregt.grdecl.

5. Press Open.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 159

Exercises

Examine the imported keywords

1. Select GridView > From Keywords….

2. Answer Yes to write the EGRID file.

3. Select GridView > 2D.

4. Select View > Options… in the 2D Viewer window.

5. Select the Colour Fill tab.

6. Select Initial Property from the Property display radiobutton group.

7. Select MULTNUM from the list of properties.

8. Select the Line/Text tab.

9. Check the Text box.

10. Press Apply.

The display should now look like Figure EX- 97.

11. In the Grid section main window, select Subsection > Grid Keywords.
Do not close the 2D Viewer.

12. In the Keyword Editor panel, select Transmissibility from the Keyword
Type list.

Exercises 160 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 97 Grid section 2D Viewer showing MULTNUM

13. In the Keywords list, select MULTREGT.

TIP: Select View > Keywords if you do not know which keyword is
MULTREGT.

The panel should look like Figure EX- 98.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 161

Exercises

Figure EX- 98 Grid section Keyword Editor panel showing MULTREGT

14. Arrange the Keyword Editor panel and the 2D Viewer panel so they you
can see them both.

15. Examine the MULTREGT keyword. Take a few minutes to make sure you
understand how the fault blocks communicate.

16. In the 2D Viewer panel, select File > Close.

Changing the aquifer connections

In addition to the fault transmissibility data, you have also been advised that
the geologic interpretation of the aquifer has changed. Instead of underlying
aquifer it is now believed that the aquifer is only located on the eastern side of
the field.

1. In the Keyword Editor panel, select Aquifers from the Keyword Type
list.

2. Select AQUCON from the Keywords list.

3. Change the Face to I+.

4. Press Apply.

Exercises 162 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

5. Select File > Close.

6. In the Grid section main window, select File > Save File As….

7. Press Save, accepting the default settings.

8. Select File > Close in the Grid section main window.

9. Select File > Close in the Data Manager main window.

10. Select File > Save Project in the ECLIPSE Office main window.

Run Management

Running the case

1. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, press the Run button.

2. Select Submit > Runs (or press the button on the toolbar).

3. Select Yes if prompted to overwrite the .DATA file.

Analyzing the results

In this example, you will again use the Graphics Run File (GRF) created in
the previous exercise. This latest version of the GRF contains the original line
plots from Exercise 5 – Analyzing the Base Case, the comparison to the clone
case created in Exercise 6 – History Matching; Case Snark_HM-1 and the 2D
Solution plots and Line plots of solution values created in Exercise 8 – History
Matching; Case Snark_HM-3.

Editing a Graphics Run File

1. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, select Util > Text Editor.

2. Select the file analyze_hm2_case.grf. This should have been saved

it the snark\office directory in the previous exercise.

3. In the Text Editor window, select Edit > Replace.

4. Enter SNARK_HM-2_E100 in the Find What: field.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 163

Exercises

5. In the Replace With: field, enter SNARK_HM-3_E100.

TIP: If your case is not named SNARK_HM-3 then in the step above, use
the name of your case in the Case Manager with _E100 appended
onto the end. This is the naming format used by ECLIPSE Office
for all ECLIPSE 100 (Black Oil) runs.

6. Press Replace All.

7. Press OK at the prompt that appears reporting how many changes were
made. The panel should report that 54 changes were made.

8. Enter SNARK_HM-1_E100 in the Find What: field,

9. In the Replace With: field, enter SNARK_HM-2_E100.

10. Press Replace All.

11. Press OK at the prompt that appears reporting how many changes were
made. The panel should report that 14 changes were made.

12. Press Cancel on the Replace panel.

13. Select File > Save As from the Text Editor window.

14. Enter analyze_hm3_case.grf.

15. Press Save.

16. Select File > Close to close the Text Editor.

Running the GRF

1. After the simulation run is finished, select File > Close in the Run
Manager window.

2. Press the Result button on the ECLIPSE Office main window.

3. Select File > Open GRF….

4. Select analyze_hm3_case.grf.

Exercises 164 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

5. Press Open.

Be patient while the GRF loads the data and creates the plots.

6. Examine the match on all the plots.

Creating a plot of cumulative production

There are two ways in ECLIPSE Office to create a plot of cumulative

production. The first way is to request the specific ***T keywords in the
Summary section. If these variables are present in the run, then the various
Totals plots will be activated under the LinePlot menu item.

1. Select LinePlot > Field > Production Totals.

2. Select SNARK_HM-3 from the Select Data Names panel.

3. Press OK.

A cumulative production versus time plot is created.

Determining the value at the cursor location

1. Select FOPT in the legend.

2. Point at a place on the curve. The X and Y values at that point are
displayed in the lower left corner of the display.

3. Using this technique, enter the cumulative oil, water and gas production
below. Make sure you select the desired vector first. This is important if
you have multiple Y axes to ensure the proper Y axis is used to calculate
the value.

Cumulative Oil Production

Cumulative Water Production

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 165

Exercises

Cumulative Gas Production

Viewing graph values in tabular form

A better way of obtaining the cumulative oil, water and gas production from
the plotted data is to view the graph in tabular form.

1. Select Options > Table.

The graphical data is shown in tabular form, as shown in Figure EX- 99.

Figure EX- 99 Tabular view of graph data

Exporting table data

The data in the tabular window can be exported to a file, or to the clipboard on
a PC. This is an easy way of getting data into 3rd party applications.

1. Point anywhere in the body of the table.

2. Right-click and select Table export….

The table export panel appears.

Exercises 166 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Exporting data to the clipboard (PC only)

1. Select the Clipboard radiobutton.

2. Check the Include Table Heading box.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 100.

Figure EX- 100 Export table panel (Clipboard option)

3. Press OK.

4. Start Excel.

5. In Excel, select Edit > Paste.

The table data and the heading are pasted into the proper cells in the
spreadsheet, as shown in Figure EX- 101.

6. In Excel, select File > Exit.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 167

Exercises

Figure EX- 101 Table data pasted into Excel

TIP: You can also export specific summary vectors to a file in the Run
Manager and use this same procedure to copy the data to the
clipboard.

Exporting data to a file

1. In the table export panel, select the File radiobutton.

2. Check the Include Table Headings box.

3. Press the … button.

4. Enter the name cumulatives.txt in the Browse dialog box.

5. Press Open.

Exercises 168 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 102.

Figure EX- 102 Export table panel (File option)

6. Press OK.

7. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select Util > Text Editor.

8. Select the file cumulatives.txt.

The file is displayed as shown in Figure EX- 103.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 169

Exercises

Figure EX- 103 Exported data in the Text Editor

NOTE: The data does not appear to be in proper columns. This is because
the file is written using a tab character between each table value.
This type of file may look different depending on the font and tab
setting of the current text editor.

9. Select File > Close to close the Text Editor window.

10. Press Cancel to close the panel containing the data table.

Creating a calculated plot of cumulative production

As mentioned earlier, there is another way of generating a cumulative

production plot. The second method can be used regardless of whether ***T
keywords are present. This method calculates the cumulative production based
on the production rate data.

1. Select Tools > Calculate Totals > Field Production.

2. Select SNARK_HM-3 from the Select Data Names panel.

Exercises 170 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

A plot of cumulative production, along with historical data is constructed, as

shown in Figure EX- 104.

Figure EX- 104 Calculated Field Production Total graph

NOTE: The historical data is only plotted if the ***RH summary vectors
are present in the run and loaded into the Results Viewer.

Calculating the total of a range of data

Still another method could be used to determine the cumulative production.

The cumulative production to any point in time is equal to the area under the
rate versus time curve from time = 0 to time = t.

1. Select LinePlot > User.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 171

Exercises

2. In the User Templates plot, select SNARK_HM-3_E100 in the Names

column.

3. Select TIME in the X-Axis Vectors column.

4. Select FOPR in the Y-Axis Vectors column.

5. Press Add To List.

6. Enter Selection Example in the Graph Title field.

7. Press OK.

A plot of Field Oil Production Rate (FOPR) is displayed.

8. Select Edit > Range > Select.

9. Drag a range from Time = 0 to Time = 3000 days.

The selected range will be shown by highlighting the selected curve as shown
in Figure EX- 105.

TIP: It is easier to select the endpoint first, and then drag to the Y-Axis.
This ensures the early time data is selected.

10. Select Tools > Calculate Totals > Calculate Area.

A dialog box appears showing the calculated area under the curve, similar to
Figure EX- 106.

Exercises 172 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 105 Plot of FOPR vs. TIME with Selected range

Figure EX- 106 Totals dialog box for first 3000 days

11. Press OK.

12. Drag a new range from the beginning of the simulation to the end.

13. Select Tools > Calculate Totals > Calculate Area.

A dialog box appears showing the calculated area under new selection, as
shown in Figure EX- 107.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 173

Exercises

Figure EX- 107 Totals dialog box for full simulation

14. Press OK.

Manipulating pictures

At this point, all of the small graphs and the main graph contain pictures.
There are also several pictures that are not currently visible.

Toggling between pictures

1. Select View > Next Picture.

2. Repeat step 1 until the Field Production Total graph is visible as shown
in Figure EX- 108. Be careful, there are two Field Production Total
graphs, you should select the one that does NOT contain historical data.

Exercises 174 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 108 Field Production Total plot (from default LinePlot template)

Deleting Pictures

There are two easy ways to delete pictures, as illustrated below.

1. Select Edit > Remove Main Plot.

The Field Production Total graph in the main display is deleted.

2. Toggle through the pictures until the Selection Example plot containing
FOPR vs. TIME is the in the main display, as shown in Figure EX-
109.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 175

Exercises

Figure EX- 109 Untitled FOPR vs. TIME plot

3. Point anywhere in the graph body and right-click.

4. Select Remove Graph.

Viewing multiple solutions in the 3D Viewer.

It is possible to view multiple properties at the same time in the 3D Viewer.

This can be done using a Slave Viewer. The Slave Viewer allows you to link
the rotation, zooming, animation and other features so that changes to the
master viewer are automatically made to the slave viewer.

1. Select View > 3D.

2. In the Select Grid panel, the first grid (SNARK_HM-3_E100) is already

selected.

3. Press OK.

4. In the 3D Viewer window, select File > Slave Viewer.

Exercises 176 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

The Slave Viewer Controls panel appears. In the upper section, you select
those properties that are to be independent in the Slave Viewer. In the lower
section, you select start options for linked rotation, zooming and translation. In
this exercise, you will make the Slave Viewer be fully linked in geometry,
movement and time, but independent in property.

5. In the Slave Viewer Controls panel, select Property in the Master

Viewer list.

6. Press the > button to move the item to the Slave Viewer list.

7. Check all three of the link movement checkboxes, as shown in Figure EX-
110.

Figure EX- 110 Slave Viewer Controls dialog box

8. Press OK.

A new 3D Viewer window opens. You can now rotate, zoom or move the
either display and the other does the same.

9. In the Slave Viewer, select Grid > Property > Display.

10. Select the Recurrent radiobutton.

11. Select Ternary from the property list.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 177

Exercises

12. Press Close.

The display now shows a ternary plot based on the cell saturation values.

Changing the 3D Color legend

Because the initial water saturation is so high in this model, the coloration of
the ternary diagram is not very good. It might be better if the color range was
constrained to 1-Swc.

1. Click on the Color Legend in the Slave Viewer.

2. Select Edit.

3. In the Ternary Color Map Editor panel, uncheck the Override box. This
sets the limits to the actual minimum and maximum values found in the
simulation. The ternary display only allows a single override value. For
other types of displays, you can override the limits to whatever values you
choose.

4. Press Close.

The Slave Viewer should now look similar to Figure EX- 111.

Exercises 178 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 111 3D Slave Viewer showing Ternary display

Manipulating objects in the master and slave viewers

1. In the Master Viewer panel, select Grid > IJK Slice.

2. Select the IJ Slicing tab.

3. In the I-Direction column, select 9.

4. In the J-Direction column, select 9.

5. Press Close.

6. Select Grid > Property > Display.

7. Select the Recurrent radiobutton.

8. Select PRESSURE from the property list.

9. Press Close.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 179

Exercises

Both displays now show a cross section through PRODUCER and PROD1
with PRESSURE as the property in the master and Ternary as the property in
the slave.

10. In the Master viewer, select Display > XYZ Exaggeration….

11. Set the Z Factor to 5.

12. Press Apply.

13. Press Close.

14. In the 3D Master Viewer, select Display > Rubber Band Zoom.

15. Drag a box around well PRODUCER.

The Master display should look similar to Figure EX- 112.

Figure EX- 112 Master Viewer showing zoom around well PRODUCER

Exercises 180 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Note that the other display zooms to the same location.

16. Press the > button on the toolbar of the 3D Master Viewer to animate
the display.

Observe the growth of the cone, even though the pressure has changed very
little. The majority of the pressure decline occurs later in time.

17. In the 3D Slave Viewer, select File > Close.

18. In the 3D Master Viewer, select File > Close.

19. In the Results Viewer main window, select File > Close.

20. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select File > Save Project.

At this point, your main window should look like Figure EX- 113.

Figure EX- 113 ECLIPSE Office main window after history matching

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 181

Exercises

Discussion

The match of well pressures is now very good. Water production is still a little
low, mostly due to PROD3. Gas production is also a little low, due mostly to
PROD1.

The coning around well PRODUCER is still present, but the well is now
producing much less water due to movement of the aquifer connection.

Additional effort could be expended to improve the match, however for the
purpose of this exercise, this case will be considered the final history match.

Exercises 182 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Exercise 9 – Restarts and Prediction; Case Snark_

Pred_Base

Introduction

This exercise begins the prediction phase of the study. You will create a restart
case in which you will examine the future production of the field under
normal depletion. The data set used as the base case for the restart the
Snark_HM-3 case that was built in Exercise 8.

In this exercise, you will create a restart case and create a new Schedule
section for the prediction. As in the previous exercises, you will use the Run
Manager to control the simulation and the Results Viewer and Report
Generator to analyze the results. A new set of plots will be created for the
prediction case and a new GRF will be saved for use in future exercises.

If you are continuing from Exercise 8, start with Step 1 under Case
Management.

Open existing project

1. To begin, start ECLIPSE Office using one of the procedures described in

Chapter 1. Make sure that ECLIPSE Office is started in the office sub-
directory created in Exercise 1.

2. Select File > Open Project.

3. Select the file snark\office\snark.off.

Case Management

Creating a restart case

4. In the Case Manager panel of the ECLIPSE Office main window, select
the final history match case, Snark_HM-3.

5. Select Case > Add Case > Restart.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 183

Exercises

A panel appears listing all the available restart files for the parent case.

6. Select the last time step (251) 1 Dec 2000.

7. Press OK.

A restart case is created as a child of case SNARK_HM-3. The case is easily

identifiable as a restart case by the ‘r’ on the folder icon in the Case
Manager. In addition, when selected, the restart file name and restart report
number are shown on the lower right of the main window.

Changing the case name/comments

8. Click on the Snark_HM-3-0 node.

9. Double-click on the node name.

The Case Information panel appears.

10. Change the Case Name to Snark_Pred_Base.

11. Add the following comment to the bottom of the comments window:
Base prediction case.
All wells on drawdown control (300 psi)
Added oil, WCT and GOR economic limits.
INJECTOR is used for 100% reinjection.
12. Press OK.

The Case Manager should now look like Figure EX- 114.

Exercises 184 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 114 Main Window showing first prediction (restart) case

Adding Restart data

ECLIPSE supports two types of restarts, referred to as the Flexible and the
Fast restart, respectively.

The Flexible restart uses the entire dataset of the base run. The user simply
replaces the equilibration data with the RESTART keyword and replaces the
Schedule section with a well schedule beginning at the restart time. This
method is the easiest and most flexible to use.

The Fast restart uses a SAVE file, which contains all the reservoir data as of
the restart time. The user simply adds a new schedule section. This has the
advantage of not requiring the grid to be re-initialized before the restart.

The current version of ECLIPSE Office only supports the Flexible restart.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 185

Exercises

Examining the changes made to the data

When you create a restart case in ECLIPSE Office, the program does much
of the work for you. This includes adding the restart file and deleting any
unnecessary Initialisation and Schedule section keywords.

1. Press the Data button to open the Data Manager.

You may be warned about the Schedule section being newer than the Grid
section, and asking if you want to recalculate the well positions for the
display. If such a warning appears, press Yes. This warning relates to the
display of the grid in the Data Manager and Grid section panels and will not
occur if these options are turned off.

2. In the Data Manager main window, press Initialisation.

The Initialisation Keyword Editor panel appears as shown in Figure EX-

115.

Figure EX- 115 Initialisation Keyword Editor panel for the first restart case

Exercises 186 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Note that the EQUIL and RSVD keywords that we present in the base case are
replaced with the single keyword, RESTART.

3. Select File > Close.

4. In the Data Manager main window, press Schedule.

Note that only the RPTSCHED and RPTRST keyword are present, and the only
time listed is the restart time (1 DEC 2000).

Adding production well controls

The next step is to define controls for the existing production wells. If no
control data is supplied the well will use the last specified control data (which
is usually not desirable).

1. Select Event > New….

2. In the New Events panel, select Well Controls and Limits from the
Event Type list.

3. Select Production Well Control (WCONPROD) in the Events list as

shown in Figure EX- 116.

Figure EX- 116 New Event panel

4. Press Apply.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 187

Exercises

5. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

Item Value
Well P*

Open/Shut Flag Open

Control BHP

Oil Rate 5000 STB/Day

Liquid Rate 10000 STB/Day

BHP Target 1000 psia

6. Enter the following comment in the keyword comment section above the
keyword:
Abandonment BHP = 1000 psia for all wells
Oil and Liquid rate limits based on battery capacity

The window should now look like Figure EX- 117.

Exercises 188 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 117 WCONPROD keyword for first restart case

7. Press Apply.

8. In the New Events panel, select Production Well Max Drawdown

(WELDRAW).

9. Press Apply.

10. Enter PRODUCER in the Well field.

11. Enter 238.9 psia in the Maximum Allowable Drawdown field.

Leave the other field set to their defaults.

12. Enter Maximum drawdown from well test data in the

comments field.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 189

Exercises

13. Press Apply.

14. Repeat steps 8 through 13 for the remaining wells (PROD1, PROD2 and
PROD3). Enter the following values for the maximum drawdown.

Well Maximum Allowable Drawdown

PROD1 147.7 psia
PROD2 260.3 psia
PROD3 349.3 psia

TIP: A common problem with restart cases is that there is a discontinuity

in production and/or BHP at restart time. This can be alleviated by
applying a drawdown limit equal to the drawdown just before the
restart time during the history match. Another common method is to
apply a productivity index multiplier. Both of these methods are fine
for depletion studies, but should be used with care in pressure
maintenance and IOR processes.

Adding Injection well controls

In this study, it is assumed that all the produced water will be disposed of into
the well INJECTOR. One of the goals of the study is to determine if additional
injection/disposal wells are needed.

1. In the New Events panel, select Well Controls and Limits from the
Event Type list.

2. Select Injection Well Control (WCONINJE) in the Events list.

3. Press Apply.

Exercises 190 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

4. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

Item Value
Well I*

Injector Type WATER

Open/Shut Flag Open

Control GRUP

Liquid Surface Rate 10000 STB/Day

BHP Target 6000 psia

5. Enter the following comment in the keyword comment section above the
keyword:
Injector under group control for re-injection
Rate constraint from tubing limits
BHP target is 200 psi below min parting pressure
6. Press Apply.

7. In the New Events panel, select Group Controls and Limits from the
Event Type list.

8. Select Group Injection Controls/Limits (GCONINJE) in the Events list.

9. Press Apply.

10. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

Item Value
Group INJ

Phase WATER

Control Mode REIN

Re-injection Fraction Upper Limit 1.0

Group for Re-injection Fraction FIELD

11. Press Apply.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 191

Exercises

Adding economic limits

In this study, the economic limits have been determined to be an oil rate of
100 STB/day, water cut of 0.98 and/or a gas-oil ratio of 3000 scf/stb. If any of
these limits are violated the well will be shut-in.

1. In the New Events panel, select Well Economic Limits and Coning
Control from the Event Type list.

2. Select Production Well Economic Limits (WECON) in the Events list.

3. Press OK.

4. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

Item Value
Well P*

Minimum Oil Rate 100 STB/DAY

Maximum Water Cut 0.98

Maximum Gas-Oil Ratio 10000 scf/stb

Workover Procedure WELL

Note the non-standard units for the GOR limit. Make sure you select the
correct unit from the drop down list.

5. Press Apply.

Forcing a small time step

In ECLIPSE, the user can specify the size of the next time step after a report
without having to specify another report. This is done using the NEXTSTEP
keyword.

BEST PRACTICE: It is always best to start a restart case with a small

time step, then allow it to grow naturally. This often
aids in smoothing the discontinuity between the
base and restart cases and often improves the
overall stability and performance of the run.

Exercises 192 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

1. In the New Events panel, select Simulator Controls from the Event
Type list.

2. Select Max Value for Next Time Step (NEXTSTEP) in the Events list.

3. Press OK.

4. In the Keyword Editor panel, enter 0.1 in the Next Time Step Length
field.

5. Press Apply.

Adding report steps

The next step is to define the report steps for the restart case. Note that this is
not the same as time steps. ECLIPSE will determine the proper time step
size; you only need to tell ECLIPSE at what time to generate reports.

In this case, you will request reports every quarter for 25 years (100 reports),
or until all the wells are shut-in. Later in this exercise, you will interpolate
monthly reports of the data.

1. From the Schedule section main window, select Time > Insert….

2. In the New Time panel, select the Time Step radiobutton in the Time
Entry Choice field.

3. Set the Time Step to 3 months.

4. Set the Num field to 100.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 118.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 193

Exercises

Figure EX- 118 New Time panel for prediction case

5. Press OK.

Note that the times are entered, as shown in Figure EX- 119.

Exercises 194 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 119 Schedule section main panel with report times added

It is apparent that this method of adding time steps does not account for the
variable lengths of a month or for leap years. An average month is used, as
becomes apparent if you select Time > View > Time Steps.

In this case, you have decided that you want to make your run terminate at the
end of 2025, so manually enter the last time step.

6. Select the last time step in the Time-Dates list (25 NOV 2025).

Note that the panel to the right is blank since there are no keywords entered
for this time step.

7. Select Time > Insert….

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 195

Exercises

8. In the New Time panel, select the Date radiobutton in the Time Entry
Choice field.

9. Set the Date to 1 JAN 2026.

10. Press OK.

Why do we set the date to 1 JAN 2026 instead of 31 DEC 2025?

Saving the well schedule

1. Select File > Save As….

2. Press OK in the Schedule File Save As… dialog box, accepting the
default file name.

3. Select File > Close to close the Schedule section.

Controlling summary vector output

By default, the requested summary vectors are written to the summary file at
each time step. You can limit the frequency of summary output to only the
requested report times in the Schedule section. This can be useful if you later
want to perform calculations between cases, since the vectors must all be of
the same length. This procedure will be illustrated in the next exercise.

1. In the Data Manager main window, press Summary.

2. Under the General tab, select RPTONLY.

3. Press Add to List.

4. Select File > Save.

5. Press OK, accepting the default filename.

6. Answer Yes when warned that this will change the parent case.

Exercises 196 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

TIP: Only change the parent case when making changes that will
generally not affect the model response and that are desired if the
other cases are to be re-run. You will have to re-run any parent
cases and other children using the data in order for the changes
made to the parent case file in order for the changes to be
recognized by those cases.

7. Select File > Close to close the Summary section window.

8. In the Data Manager main window, select File > Close.

Running the case

1. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, press the Run button.

2. Select Submit > Runs (or press the button on the toolbar).

3. Select Yes if prompted to overwrite the .DATA file.

Wait until the run completes until proceeding.

4. In the Run Manager window, select File > Close.

Analyzing the results

In this example, you will create a new set of plots for analysis. After creating
the plots, a GRF will be saved for use in future exercises.

Reviewing the simulation

1. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, select Report to enter the
Report Generator.

2. Select File > Open Current Case > PRT.

3. Select Errors, ... from the Report drop-down.

4. Check the MESSAGES checkbox.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 197

Exercises

5. Press Generate Report.

6. Press the Output button.

7. Select Report 1 from the list of reports. The report should look like Figure
EX- 120.

Figure EX- 120 MESSAGES report for the first restart case

8. Carefully examine all the messages.

What control mode are the wells using in this case?

Do any of the wells shut-in prematurely due to an economic limit violation? If

so, which wells, when and why?

Exercises 198 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Loading Summary vector data in the Report Generator

1. Select File > Open Current Case > Summary.

2. Press Load in the Load/Extract Summary Vectors panel.

3. Press the Input button.

4. Select Summary from the Report drop down list.

The Summary Vector report panel appears as shown in Figure EX- 121.

Figure EX- 121 Summary report input panel in Report Generator

Calculating drawdown using the Report Generator

Wells on drawdown control are actually controlled by calculating the flow rate
of the preferred phase at the specified maximum allowable drawdown. If the
calculated rate is less than the specified constraint, then the well target rate is
changed to the calculated value and the well is placed on rate control.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 199

Exercises

The drawdown over time is not available as a summary vector. However, you
can calculate this value in either the Report Generator or the Results
Viewer. This procedure demonstrates the technique in the Report Generator.
The equivalent technique in the 2D line plot viewer is demonstrated later.

The drawdown is equivalent to WBP – WBHP. If these two vectors are

available in the Summary data then the drawdown can be calculated.

1. Select Utility > Calculator.

The Calculator panel appears. This panel allows you to enter equations and
other programming logic to calculate new vectors based on existing data. The
language is detailed in the ECLIPSE Office Users Guide.

Before you can write a script to calculate drawdown, you must first identify
the vectors you wish to use.

2. Select Calculator > Show > Vectors.

A new window opens showing the names of all the available vectors.

3. Find the WBHP and WBP vectors. Note that the Short Name is the proper
variable name to use in Calculator scripts.

4. Select File > Close to close the Variables window.

5. In the main Calculator window, select File > Open.

6. Select the file \snark\data\exercise_9\calc_drawdown.cal.

7. Press Open.

The Calculator now displays the pre-built calculator script, as shown in

Figure EX- 122.

Exercises 200 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 122 Calculator panel showing drawdown script

8. Select Calculator > Run Program.

The results will be written to a file called wdd_pred_base.txt. An output

window appears where processing messages are displayed. The output file can
be found in the same directory as the calculator script.

9. Select File > Close in the Calculator output window.

10. Answer No to the question about saving the output file.

11. Select File > Close in the Calculator main window.

12. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select Utility > Text Editor.

13. Select the file \snark\data\exercise_9\wdd_pred_base.txt.

14. Press Open.

The results of the calculation are displayed.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 201

Exercises

What is the initial drawdown of each well?

Why is the drawdown so high in late time for PROD2 and PROD3?

15. Select File > Close to close the Text Editor window.

Interpolating Summary data

The quarterly production data stored in the summary file can be interpolated to
provide a new vector with uniform time increments of your choice. In this
exercise, you will create an interpolated vector with monthly production.

1. In the Report Generator main window, press Input.

2. Set the Report type to Summary.

3. Select the Interpolate button.

4. Select the Months button.

5. Enter a 1 in the Time Interval field.

6. In the Selected Vectors list, select FOPR.

7. Hold down the Ctrl key and select FGPR.

8. Hold down the Ctrl key and select FWPR.

9. Press the >> button to move the selected vectors to the Vectors to
Report list, as shown in Figure EX- 123.

10. Press Generate Report.

11. Press the Output button.

12. Select the Summary radiobutton.

Exercises 202 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 123 Interpolation report setup

The Interpolation report should be highlighted in listed in the Reports list

and the report should be visible in the panel, as shown in Figure EX- 124.

Note that the new vector reports the interpolated production rates at the 1st day
of each month.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 203

Exercises

Figure EX- 124 Interpolation report output

Plotting Summary data in the Report Generator.

1. Press the Plot button.

A line plot display similar to the Results Viewer appears with the reported
data in graphical form, as shown in Figure EX- 125.

2. Select File > Close in the plot window.

Exercises 204 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 125 Graphical view of interpolated data

Exporting Summary data

There are two ways to export summary data. These methods differ only in the
format of the report.

1. In the Report Generator main window, press the Write button.

2. Enter the filename base_pred_interp.txt.

3. Press Save.

A report formatted exactly as shown in the display is written to a file.

It is also possible to use copy and paste, or save the data to a format that is
compatible with Observed data in the Results Viewer. You will use this file
in later exercises to calculate incremental recovery.

4. Press the Table button.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 205

Exercises

A standard table window of the data is displayed.

5. Point anywhere within the data area and right-click.

6. Select Table export….

The Export Table panel appears.

7. Select the File radiobutton in the Export To group.

8. Check the Include Table Headings box.

9. Press the … button.

10. Enter the file name base_pred_interp_user.txt.

11. Press OK.

12. Press Cancel in the Summary Table panel.

Displaying the report in a separate window.

1. In the Report Generator main window, press New Window.

The selected report is displayed in a separate Text Editor window. This

allows you to edit and save the report, or display the report alongside another
report for comparison. You can open as many separate report windows as you
need.

2. In the Text Editor window, select File > Close.

3. In the Report Generator main window, select File > Close.

Creating line plots for a restart case.

The present version of ECLIPSE Office does not automatically load the base
case data for restart cases. Therefore, you will create standard diagnostic plots
for the restart case and add the base case data.

1. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, press the Result button.

2. Select File > Open Current Case > Summary.

Exercises 206 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

3. Press Load in the Load/Extract Summary Vectors panel.

4. Select File > Open > Summary.

5. Select SNARK_HM-3_E100.SMSPEC.

6. Press Open.

7. Press Load in the Load/Extract Summary Vectors panel.

8. Select LinePlot > Field > Production Rate.

9. Select All in the Select Data Names panel.

10. Press OK.

A line plot of Field Production Rate with the historical data, history match,
and prediction is displayed.

11. Select LinePlot > Well > Production Rate.

12. In the Select Well/Group Names panel, select All in the Names column.

13. Select PROD1 in the WGNames column.

14. Press Add to List.

15. Press OK.

A line plot of the Well Production Rate with the historical data, history
match, and prediction is displayed.

In this example, you will now clear all the pictures, and re-create them using a
GRF with customizations that provides a better visualization of the data.

16. Select Edit > Clear > Clear Pictures.

17. Select File > Open GRF….

18. Select \snark\data\exercise_9\analyse_base_pred.grf.

19. Press Open.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 207

Exercises

The display should now look like Figure EX- 126.

Figure EX- 126 Line plots for first restart case

20. Carefully examine each of the plots. Use the toggle as shown in previous
exercises to view each of the well plots.

21. Select File > Close to close the Results Viewer.

Discussion

All the plots how excellent agree at restart time. This would most likely not be
the case if you did not include a drawdown limit or well PI multiplier.

The next exercise will create another restart case that will be compared to this
case to determine incremental recovery.

Exercises 208 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Exercise 10 – Restarts and Prediction; Case Snark_

Pred_New

Introduction

This exercise completes the prediction phase of the study. You will create
another restart case in which you will examine the future production of the
field under a proposed new operating scheme. The data set used as the base
case for the restart the Snark_HM-3 case that was built in Exercise 8.

In this exercise, you will create a restart case and create a new Schedule
section for the prediction. As in the previous exercises, you will use the Run
Manager to control the simulation and the Results Viewer and Report
Generator to analyze the results. The GRF from Exercise 9 is used to
generate a set of line plots, to which you will add several new plots. In
addition, more features or the 2D and 3D viewers are examined.

If you are continuing from Exercise 9, start with Step 1 under Case
Management.

Open existing project

1. To begin, start ECLIPSE Office using one of the procedures described in

Chapter 1. Make sure that ECLIPSE Office is started in the office sub-
directory created in Exercise 1.

2. Select File > Open Project.

3. Select the file snark\office\snark.off.

Case Management

Creating a restart case

1. In the Case Manager panel of the ECLIPSE Office main window, select
the final history match case, Snark_HM-3.

2. Select Case > Add Case > Restart.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 209

Exercises

A panel appears listing all the available restart files for the parent case.

3. Select the last time step 251 (1 Dec 2000).

4. Press OK.

A restart case is created as a child of case SNARK_HM-3.

Changing the case name/comments

1. Click on the Snark_HM-3-1 node.

2. Double-click on the node name.

The Case Information panel appears.

3. Change the Case Name to Snark_Pred_New.

4. Add the following comment to the bottom of the comments window:

Prediction case assuming a new well is added.
Well location selected based on Oil Index value.
Existing wells on drawdown control (300 psi)
Added oil, WCT and GOR economic limits.
INJECTOR is used for 100% reinjection. Existing
wells are converted to injection when the economic
limit is violated.
5. Press OK.

The Case Manager should now look like Figure EX- 127.

Selecting the new well location

First, you will determine the best location for the new well using an indicator
known as the Oil Index. This value is calculated by FOI = φ*h*SOIL. The oil
Index illustrates where the most remaining oil is located.

The Oil Index can be calculated using either the 2D or 3D Viewers. Both
methods are illustrated below.

Exercises 210 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 127 ECLIPSE Office main window showing second restart case

1. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select the case SNARK_HM-3.

2. Press the Result button.

3. In the Results Viewer main window, select File > Open Current Case >
Solution.

4. Press Load in the Load/Extract Solution data panel.

Creating the Oil Index display in the 2D Viewer.

1. In the Results Viewer main window, select Tools > Create New >
Solution.

2. In the Create New Property panel, enter FOI in the New Solution field.
You can make up any name, up to characters, for the vector.

CAUTION: Make sure your new vector or solution name is not that
same as any vector or solution already loaded.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 211

Exercises

3. Enter stb in the Unit field.

4. Select the All Steps radiobutton.

5. Enter A=B*C*D*E in the Type expression text box.

6. Press the Parse Expression button.

The expression is parsed and the result is displayed in the panel below the
button. The user now associates the parsed expression variables with actual
simulation variables.

7. In the Identifiers column, select B.

8. In the Properties list, select PORO.

9. In the Identifiers column, select C.

10. In the Properties list, select DZ.

11. In the Identifiers column, select D.

12. In the Properties list, select NTG.

13. In the Identifiers column, select E.

14. In the Properties list, select SOIL.

15. In the Reports list, select All.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 128.

16. Press OK.

The solution is calculated for every time step. This may take a few minutes
since there are 251 time steps in this run.

Analyzing the Oil Index in the 2D Viewer

1. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select View > 2D.

2. Select 2D > Property….

Exercises 212 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

3. In the Property Selector panel, select Recurrent Property.

4. Select FOI in the property list.

5. Press OK.

The newly created property FOI is now shown in the display.

Figure EX- 128 Create New Solutions panel for Oil Index

6. Select Tools > Timestep….

7. In the Timestep Selector panel, select the last time step (251) 01-
Dec-2000.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 213

Exercises

8. Press OK.

Note that there appears to be two areas that are less depleted than the rest.
These areas are northwest of PROD1 and southeast of PRODUCER.
However, from this view it is difficult to determine which cell is the best to
place the new well.

It may help to determine the location by creating a contour plot of the data.

Viewing the data as contours

1. Select 2D > Display Control….

The Display control panel appears. Note that display contains three objects,
the grid, contour map and wells. The way each of these items is displayed can
be controlled via this panel.

2. For the Grid object, set the Render mode to Lines.

3. For the Contour Map object, set the Visibility to Show and the Render
Mode to Lines and Color fill.

4. Press OK.

The display is changed to a contour map with the grid lines overlaid, as shown
in Figure EX- 129.

5. Point at the cell with the highest FOI value located to the northwest of
PROD1.

6. Note the cell’s I and J values

The next step in a 2D analysis of FOI is to examine the layers below to

determine the proper completion intervals.

7. Select 2D > Cross Section > Generate.

A cross section display is added alongside the areal display.

Exercises 214 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

8. Drag the cross section line in the areal display so that it passes through the
high FOI cells to the northwest of PROD1.

Note that the high FOI value extends through the first 5 layers, and then there
is an abrupt decrease in the FOI value. Therefore, you will limit the
completion of the new well to the upper layers.

Figure EX- 129 2D Viewer showing contour map of FOI with grid lines

Creating the Oil Index display in the 3D Viewer

The FOI property created earlier is available for display as a normal recurrent
property and can be selected using Grid > Property > Display…. However,
for this exercise, you will create the variable again using the functionality of
the 3D Viewer.

1. Select View > 3D….

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 215

Exercises

2. Select Grid > Property > Edit….

3. In the Simulation Property Editor panel, press the Create Property

Type button.

4. In the Create Property Type panel, enter FOI3D in the Property Type
field.

5. Select volume in the Select quantity field.

6. Select Recurrent in the Select families list.

7. Select the Real radiobutton.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 130.

Figure EX- 130 Create New Property panel for FOI3D

8. Press Apply.

9. Press Close.

10. In the Simulation Property Editor panel, select FOI3D in the Type field.

11. Enter FOI_v0 in the Version field.

TIP: You can create multiple versions of the same Property Type.

Exercises 216 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

12. Check the New Property button.

13. Press the Advanced tab.

14. In the Building Expression for FOI3D panel, enter

SOIL*PORO*DZ*NTG

TIP: The type of property (Initial or Recurrent) is determined by the first

variable listed in the expression. Since you want this property
calculated at every time step, make sure you enter SOIL as the first
variable.

15. Press Apply.

If the expression is correct, it will now appear in the Simulation Property

Editor panel. If there are any errors, they are displayed in the Log Window
and the expression is not accepted.

16. Press Close.

17. In the Simulation Property Editor panel, press Apply.

18. After the property is created, press Close.

Analyzing the Oil Index in the 3D Viewer

1. In the 3D Viewer panel, select Grid > Property > Display….

2. In the Property Display panel, press the Recurrent radiobutton.

3. Select FOI_v0 in the property display.

The FOI_v0 property is now shown in the display.

4. Select Display > XYZ Exaggerate….

5. Set the Z Factor to 5.

6. Press Apply.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 217

Exercises

7. Press Close.

8. In the 3D Viewer panel, press the ►► button to advance to the last time
step.

9. Examine the high FOI areas.

Creating boundaries in the 3D Viewer.

In the 3D Viewer it is possible to view any arbitrary volume or volumes of

interest. You will use this function to view just the cells in the areas of
interest.

1. Select Editor > Boundaries….

The Edit Boundaries panel appears.

2. Press the Create button.

3. In the Create Boundary panel, enter the name NW FOI Areal.

4. Select Polygon in the Boundary Type selection box.

5. Select XY and Top in the Projection Plane selection box.

6. Press OK.

The 3D Viewer changes to a Top view and is now in Edit mode.

7. Digitize an area around the high FOI region to the northwest of PROD1,
as shown in Figure EX- 131. You do not have to complete the polygon.
The polygon will automatically be closed when you commit the edit.

8. Press the ! button on the toolbar to complete the editing operation.

The 3D Viewer returns to normal viewing mode and the boundary is shown.

9. In the 3D Viewer main window, select Display > Object Appearance….

10. For the NW FOI Areal object, set the Visibility to Hide.

11. Press Apply.

Exercises 218 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

12. Press Close.

13. Select Grid > IJK Slice….

14. In the IJ Slicing tab, select 6 in the J-Direction list.

Figure EX- 131 3D Viewer showing areal boundary editing

15. Press Close.

16. In the Edit Boundaries panel, press the Create button.

17. In the Create Boundary panel, enter the name NW FOI Vertical.

18. Select Polygon in the Boundary Type selection box.

19. Select XZ and Front in the Projection Plane selection boxes.

20. Press OK.

The 3D Viewer changes to a cross section view and is now in Edit mode.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 219

Exercises

21. Digitize an area around the high FOI region to the northwest of PROD1,
as shown in Figure EX- 132.

Figure EX- 132 3D Viewer showing digitized XZ boundary

22. Press the ! button on the toolbar to complete the editing operation.

The 3D Viewer returns to normal viewing mode and the boundary is shown.

23. In the Edit Boundaries panel, select Close.

24. In the 3D Viewer main window, select Display > Object Appearance….

25. For the NW FOI Vertical object, set the Visibility to Hide.

26. Press Apply.

27. Press Close.

Exercises 220 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Using Volumes of Interest to control the view

1. Select Grid > IJK Slice….

2. Press the Reset All Domains button.

3. Press Close.

4. Select Grid > Volume of Interest > Boundaries….

5. If the Apply button is active, right-click on the background of the panel

and select AutoApply is Off. This will switch AutoApply from Off to
On.

6. In the Create VOI from Boundary panel, select NW FOI Areal.

7. Examine the 3D Viewer, it now shows only the cells in within the
boundary.

8. In the Create VOI from Boundary panel, select NW FOI Vertical.

The 3D Viewer now changes to view the cells in the new boundary.

9. Use these boundaries and the other techniques illustrated in earlier

exercises to determine the best location for the new well. Limit your
prospective locations to the area northwest of PROD1.

What are the I and J cell indices of your selected cell?

10. In the 3D Viewer panel, select File > Close.

Creating templates in the 2D LinePlot Viewer.

Templates are another method of easily creating the same plot for different
cases and projects. In this exercise, you will create templates that will then be
used in the next exercise.

1. In the Results Viewer window, select File > Open Current Case >
Summary….

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 221

Exercises

2. Press Load.

3. Select LinePlot > User….

4. In the User Templates panel, select TIME in the X-Axis Vectors column.

5. Select FOPR in the Y-Axis Vectors column.

6. Press the Ctrl button and select FGOR.

7. Press the Ctrl button and select FWCT.

8. Press Add to List.

9. Select FPR from the Y-Axis Vectors column.

10. Press Add to List.

11. Enter Field Rates and Ratios in the Template Title field.

12. Check the Save Template box.

13. Enter Field Performance Plot in the Graph Title field.

14. Press Apply.

The user-specified plot appears in the main viewer.

15. In the User Templates dialog box, select TIME in the X-Axis Vectors
column.

16. Select WOPR:PROD1 in the Y-Axis Vectors column.

17. Press the Ctrl button and select WGOR:PROD1.

18. Press the Ctrl button and select WWCT:PROD1.

19. Press the Ctrl button and select WBP9:PROD1.

20. Press Add to List.

21. Enter Well Rates and Ratios in the Template Title field.

22. Check the Save Template box.

Exercises 222 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

23. Enter Well Performance Plot in the Graph Title field.

24. Press OK.

25. In the Results Viewer main window, select File > Save Templates.

26. Enter the file name ratios.tpl.

27. Press Save.

These templates can now be used for later cases, much the same as a GRF.
However, templates are not automatically created when they are loaded,
allowing the user to decide whether or not to create a particular plot.

28. Select File > Close in the Results Viewer main window.

Creating the new well schedule

This prediction case was created as a restart file of the SNARK_HM-3 history
match case. Therefore, it does not contain the well schedule and time steps
created in the previous exercise. You could have created this case as a clone
case of SNARK_PRED_BASE and thus inherited the existing prediction
schedule, or you could create the restart at a higher level and replace the
schedule section with the one from the base prediction case, as is illustrated
below.

1. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select the case

SNARK_PRED_NEW.

2. Press the Data button to open the Data Manager.

3. You may be warned about the Schedule section being newer than the
Grid section, and asking if you want to recalculate the well positions for
the display. If such a warning appears, press Yes. This warning relates to
the display of the grid in the Data Manager and Grid section panels and
will not occur if these options are turned off.

4. Press Schedule.

A new Schedule section for the restart is created and displayed. Note the
RPTSCHED and RPTRST keywords are the only ones inherited from the base

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 223

Exercises

case. Since these keywords are also in the Schedule section we will import,
they can be deleted here.

BEST PRACTICE: Although many keywords can be overwritten by re-

declaring them later in the dataset, it is better to
delete duplicate keywords to aid in debugging
problems with the run.

5. Select the RPTSCHED keyword.

6. Select Event > Delete.

7. Select the RPTRST.

8. Select Event > Delete.

9. Select File > Import > Append.

10. Select the file \snark\office\snark_pred_base_sch.inc.

11. Press Open.

12. Answer Yes when asked to read the file.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 133.

Defining new wells

1. Select 1 JUN 2002 in the Time-Dates list.

2. Select Event > New….

3. In the New Events panel, select Define Wells, Groups & Connections
from the Event Type list.

Exercises 224 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 133 Schedule section for second restart case after import

4. Select Well Specification (WELSPECS) in the Events list.

5. Press Apply.

6. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

Item Value
Well PROD4

Group EAST

I Location 7

J Location 6

Leave the rest of the fields to their defaults.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 225

Exercises

7. Press Apply.

NOTE: Earlier in this exercise you determined your own optimum location
for a new well. You can use this location is you like, but then your
results may differ.

The display should now look similar to Figure EX- 134.

Figure EX- 134 Well Specification for well PROD4

8. In the New Events panel, select Define Wells, Groups & Connections
from the Event Type list.

9. Select Well Connection Data (COMPDAT) in the Events list.

Exercises 226 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

10. Press OK.

11. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

Item Value
Well PROD4

K Upper 1

K Lower 5

Well Bore ID 0.5 ft

Leave the rest of the fields to their defaults.

12. Press Apply.

The display should now look similar to Figure EX- 135.

Converting wells to injection

In this example, you will convert any wells to injection that are shut in due to
violation of an economic oil rate limit. The well INJECTOR will be shut in
and the re-injection will be allocated to the converted well or wells based on
the well’s injectivity index.

There are many ways to convert a well to injection in ECLIPSE. The simplest
method is simply to stop specifying WCONPROD or WCONHIST for the wells
and instead specify WCONINJE. You can also easily change the group the well
belongs to by using the keyword WREGROUP. This method has one drawback,
however. In the WELSPECS keyword, you specify the preferred phase for the
PI calculation. If this is not re-specified, then the reported PI and BHP values
may be inaccurate when the wellbore is filled entirely with water.

Another method uses the WECON keyword to open an injector in the same
location when an economic limit is violated.

A third method uses the ACTIONW keyword to specify a triggering action to

cause a new well to be drilled at the same location and placed on injection.
This method also allows the well to be renamed and regrouped easily and can
accommodate the automatic shut in of the well INJECTOR.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 227

Exercises

1. Select 2 MAR 2001 in the Time-Dates column.

Figure EX- 135 Well Specification and completion data for well PROD4

2. Select Event > New….

3. In the New Events panel, select Action Keyword Facility from the Event
Type list.

4. Select Well Action Condition (ACTIONW) in the Events list.

5. Press Apply.

6. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

Exercises 228 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Item Value
Action ACT1

Well PROD1

Quantity WOPR

Operator <

Number of Times 1

Liquid Rate 100 stb/day

Leave the rest of the fields to their defaults.

7. Press Apply.

8. In the New Events panel, select Well Controls and Limits from the
Event Type list.

9. Select Shut/Re-open Well Connections (WELOPEN) in the Events list.

10. Press Apply.

11. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

Item Value
Well INJECTOR

Open/Shut Flag SHUT

Leave the rest of the fields to their defaults.

12. Press Apply.

13. In the New Events panel, select Well Controls and Limits from the
Event Type list.

14. Select Shut/Re-open Well Connections (WELOPEN) in the Events list.

15. Press Apply.

16. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 229

Exercises

Item Value
Well PROD1

Open/Shut Flag SHUT

Leave the rest of the fields to their defaults.

17. Press Apply.

18. In the New Events panel, select Define Wells, Groups & Connections
from the Event Type list.

19. Select Well Specification (WELSPECS) in the Events list.

20. Press Apply.

21. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

Item Value
Well INJ1

Group INJ

I Location 9

J Location 9

Leave the rest of the fields to their defaults.

22. Press Apply.

23. In the New Events panel, select Define Wells, Groups & Connections
from the Event Type list.

24. Select Well Connection Data (COMPDAT) in the Events list.

25. Press Apply.

26. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

Exercises 230 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Item Value
Well INJ1

K Upper 1

K Lower 5

Well Bore ID 0.5 ft

Leave the rest of the fields to their defaults.

27. Press Apply.

28. In the New Events panel, select Well Controls and Limits from the
Event Type list.

29. Select Injection Well Control (WCONINJE) in the Events list.

30. Press Apply.

31. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

Item Value
Well INJ1

Injector Type WATER

Open/Shut Flag OPEN

Control Mode GRUP

Leave the rest of the fields to their defaults.

32. Press Apply.

33. In the New Events panel, select Action Keyword Facility from the Event
Type list.

34. Select End of ACTION (ENDACTIO) in the Events list.

35. Press OK.

36. In the Keyword Editor panel, press Apply.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 231

Exercises

The next step is to copy the ACTIONW block for PROD1 to create similar
actions for the other production wells.

37. In the Events list, select the ACTIONW keyword.

38. Press the Shift key and select the ENDACTIO keyword.

All the keywords between ACTIONW and ENDACTIO should be selected.

39. Select Event > Copy….

40. In the Select Time panel, the first time is automatically selected. Press
OK.

Note that the group of keywords has been copied to the end of the list.

41. Select the last ACTIONW keyword.

42. Change the Action Name to ACT2.

43. Change the Well Name to PROD2.

44. Press Apply.

45. Select the last WELOPEN keyword.

46. Change the Well to PROD2.

47. Press Apply.

48. Select the last WELSPECS keyword.

49. Change the Well name to INJ2.

50. Change the I Location to 7.

51. Change the J Location to 20.

52. Press Apply.

53. Answer Yes when asked to change the well name in all keywords.

54. Select the last COMPDAT keyword.

Exercises 232 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

55. Change the Well name to INJ2.

56. Press Apply.

57. Select the last WCONINJE keyword.

58. Change the Well name to INJ2.

59. Press Apply.

60. Use the Event > Move > Up and Event > Move > Down functions to
ensure the keywords are in this order:
ACTIONW (PROD2)
WELOPEN (INJECTOR)
WELOPEN (PROD2)
WELSPECS (INJ2)
COMPDAT (INJ2)
WCONINJE (INJ2)
ENDACTIO
61. Repeat Steps 37 through 60 to create the ACTION block for well PROD3.
Enter values as indicated in the following table:

Keyword Item Value

ACTIONW Action ACT3

Well Name PROD3

WELOPEN Well PROD3

WELSPECS Well INJ3

I Location 12

J Location 17

COMPDAT Well INJ3

WCONINJE Well INJ3

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 136.

Another ACTIONW block also needs to be created for well PROD4. However,
you cannot declare an ACTION* keyword before the object for the action
exists. Therefore, you must put the ACTIONW block for well PROD4 at or
after the time the well is drilled.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 233

Exercises

62. In the Events list, select the last ACTIONW keyword.

63. Press the Shift key and select the last ENDACTIO keyword.

64. Select Event > Copy….

65. Select 1 JUN 2002.

66. Press OK.

67. Select 1 JUN 2002 in the Time-Dates list.

Note that the keywords have been copied to the selected time step.

Figure EX- 136 Schedule section showing ACTIONW blocks

68. Enter values as indicated in the following table:

Exercises 234 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Keyword Item Value

ACTIONW Action ACT4

Well Name PROD4

WELOPEN Well PROD4

WELSPECS Well INJ4

I Location 7

J Location 6

COMPDAT Well INJ4

WCONINJE Well INJ4

69. Use the Event > Move > Up and Event > Move > Down functions to
ensure the keywords are in this order:
ACTIONW (PROD4)
WELOPEN (INJECTOR)
WELOPEN (PROD4)
WELSPECS (INJ4)
COMPDAT (INJ4)
WCONINJE (INJ4)
ENDACTIO
70. Select File > Save As….

71. In the Schedule File Save As panel, press OK, accepting the default file
name.

Using Multiple Sensitivities

In the example, we will conduct a series of sensitivities on the BHP value for
the new well.

1. Select 1 JUN 2002 from the Time-Dates column.

2. Select ENDACTIO from the Events-All list.

3. Select Event > New ….

4. In the New Events panel, select Well Controls and Limits from the
Event Type list.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 235

Exercises

5. Select Production Well Control (WCONPROD) in the Events list.

6. Press OK.

7. In the Keyword Editor panel, set the following constraints:

Item Value
Well PROD4

Open/Shut Flag OPEN

Control Mode BHP

Oil Rate 5000 stb/day

Liquid Rate 10000 stb/day

BHP Target 2500 psia

Leave the rest of the fields to their defaults.

8. Press Apply.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 137.

9. Press the Sensitivities button.

The Production Well Control (WCONPROD) sensitivity panel appears.

10. Enter 3 in the Number of Runs field.

11. Enter 2000 psia in the Lower column for BHP.

12. Enter 3000 psia for the Upper column for BHP.

Since the oil rate and BHP are inversely proportional, we will allow the Oil
Rate to change inversely to BHP.

13. Enter 10000 stb/day in the Lower column for Oil Rate.

14. Enter 5000 stb/day in the Upper column for Oil Rate.

15. Enter 15000 stb/day in the Lower Column for Liquid Rate.

Exercises 236 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

16. Enter 15000 stb/day in the Upper Column for Liquid Rate.

The panel should now look like Figure EX- 138.

Figure EX- 137 Schedule section showing ACTIONW block for well PROD4

Figure EX- 138 Sensitivities panel for the WCONPROD keyword

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 237

Exercises

17. Press OK.

NOTE: You can also specifically define values for sensitivity runs using the
Multiple Runs function.

18. Select File > Save.

19. Press OK in the Schedule File Save panel, accepting the default file
name.

Since the run contains multiple sensitivities, a multiple sensitivities include

file (*_MULT.INC) is created.

20. Press OK in the Multiple Sensitivities File Save panel, accepting the
default file name.

21. Select File > Close to close the Schedule section.

22. In the Data Manager main window, press the Multiple Sensitivities
button.

The Multiple Sensitivities panel appears as shown in Figure EX- 139.

Each of the sensitivity runs is shown in the leftmost column. The keywords
that are used in the sensitivity are shown the second column and the sensitivity
values are shown in the right-hand column.

23. Examine each of the sensitivity cases, making a note of how the rates and
BHP values are varied.

24. Select File > Close in the Multiple Sensitivities panel.

25. Select File > Close in the Data Manager window.

26. Select File > Save Project in the ECLIPSE Office main window.

Exercises 238 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 139 Multiple Sensitivities section main window

Running the Cases

When using Multiple Sensitivities on UNIX, the user can elect to run the
simulation concurrently (if enough licenses are available) or consecutively. On
the PC, only consecutive runs are allowed.

1. Press the Run button to open the Run Manager.

Note the Number of Simulations is now set to 3.

NOTE: To run jobs concurrently on UNIX systems, enter the number of total
jobs to run concurrently in the Add Job Streams field. Any
additional jobs will be started after as job streams become
available.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 239

Exercises

2. Select Submit > Runs (or press the button on the toolbar).

3. Select Yes when prompted to overwrite the .DATA file.

The runs will now run consecutively. Wait until all three runs are complete
before proceeding.

4. In the Run Manager main window, select File > Close.

Analyzing the Runs

The first step in analyzing the run is to check the errors and warnings, and
check to see if any of the ACTIONW blocks were used.

Reviewing the simulation

1. From the ECLIPSE Office main window, select Report to enter the
Report Generator.

2. Select File > Open Current Case > PRT.

Since this case is a multiple sensitivities run, a panel will appear in which you
can select the sensitivity run to examine.

3. Select the case SNARK_PRED_NEW_E100_1.

4. Hold down the Shift key and select the case

SNARK_PRED_NEW_E100_3. All three cases should now be selected.

5. Press OK.

6. In the Report Generator main window, select the case

SNARK_PRED_NEW_E100_1 in the Case Name drop down list.

7. Select Errors, ... from the Report drop-down.

8. Check the MESSAGES checkbox.

9. Press Generate Report.

10. Select the case SNARK_PRED_NEW_E100_2 in the Case Name drop

down list.

Exercises 240 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

11. Select Errors, ... from the Report drop-down.

12. Check the MESSAGES checkbox.

13. Press Generate Report.

14. Select the case SNARK_PRED_NEW_E100_3 in the Case Name drop

down list.

15. Select Errors, ... from the Report drop-down.

16. Check the MESSAGES checkbox.

17. Press Generate Report.

18. Press the Output button.

19. Select Report 1 from the list of reports. The report should look like Figure
EX- 140.

Figure EX- 140 Report Generator output for multiple sensitivity case

20. Carefully examine all the messages.

21. Repeat Steps 19 and 20 for each report in the list.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 241

Exercises

What control mode is well PROD4 using in each case?

Do any of the wells shut-in prematurely due to an economic limit violation? If

so, which wells, when and why?

Are any of the wells converted to injection? If so, which wells and when?

22. Select File > Close to close the Report Generator.

Comparing the cases

1. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, press the Result button.

2. In the Results Viewer main window, select File > Open Current Case >
Summary.

The Select Run panel appears.

3. Select the case SNARK_PRED_NEW_E100_1.

4. Press the >> button to move the selected cases to the Selected list.

5. Press OK.

Exercises 242 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

NOTE: In the current version (2001a), the multiple file-loading feature is

not working properly. You should import each case separately to
insure that all the data is read.

6. Press Load in the Load/Extract Summary Vectors panel.

7. In the Results Viewer main window, select File > Open Current Case >
Summary.

8. Select the case SNARK_PRED_NEW_E100_2.

9. Press the >> button to move the selected cases to the Selected list.

10. Press OK.

11. Press Load in the Load/Extract Summary Vectors panel.

12. In the Results Viewer main window, select File > Open Current Case >
Summary.

13. Select the case SNARK_PRED_NEW_E100_3.

14. Press the >> button to move the selected cases to the Selected list.

15. Press OK.

16. Press Load in the Load/Extract Summary Vectors panel.

17. Select LinePlot > Field > Production Rate.

18. Select All in the Select Data Names panel.

19. Press OK.

A plot of Field Production Rate appears as shown in Figure EX- 141. Note
that the legend is too small to show all the vectors. In addition, there is so
much data that it is hard to understand. Part of this problem can be alleviated
by removing the historical data vectors, which have no relevance in this
prediction case. In previous exercises it was shown how to remove vectors

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 243

Exercises

from graphs, however, it might also be desirable to prevent the vectors from
being plotted at all.

Figure EX- 141 Field Production Rate plot for multiple sensitivity case

Editing default templates

You can edit the default templates before using them to prevent unwanted data
from being plotted.

1. Select Edit > Templates > Default….

The Show/Change/Plot Default Templates panel appears, as shown in Figure

EX- 142.

2. In the Templates list, select Field Production Rate.

3. In the Template List select FOPRH.

Exercises 244 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

4. Hold down the Ctrl key and select FWPRH.

Figure EX- 142 Show/Change/Plot Default Templates panel

5. Hold down the Ctrl key and select FGPRH.

6. Press the << key to remove the vectors from the template.

7. Press Apply.

8. Press Plot.

9. Select all in the Select Data Names panel and press OK.

A new Field Production Rate plot is created without the historical data.

10. In the Show/Change/Plot Default Templates panel, press Cancel.

11. Use the editing techniques illustrated in the previous exercises to make the
plot look like Figure EX- 143.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 245

Exercises

Figure EX- 143 Field Production Rate plot after editing

12. Create other plots and use the other tools demonstrated in the previous
exercises to examine the production from each case.

Which case has the highest ultimate recovery?

13. Select File > Close to close the Results Viewer.

Converting a multiple sensitivity case to a regular case

You may decide that you would like to extract one sensitivity case and make it
a regular case, perhaps to perform another restart or create additional
sensitivities. In this example, you will take the first sensitivity case and make
it a regular case. This is easily done using the Data Manager.

Exercises 246 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

1. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, press the Data button.

2. In the Data Manager main window, press the Multiple Sensitivities

button.

3. Select 1 in the Run column.

4. Press the Create Case button.

A new case is created as a child of the multiple sensitivity case

Snark_Pred_New.

5. Select File > Close to close the Multiple Sensitivities panel.

6. Select File > Close to close the Data Manager.

7. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select the new case

Snark_Pred_New_0.

Note the comments automatically added to the file.

8. Double click on the case Snark_Pred_New_0 to open the Case

Information panel.

9. Change the case name to Snark_Pred_Final.

10. Press OK.

The main window should now look like Figure EX- 144.

NOTE: When a case is created from a sensitivity case, it must be re-run in

order to view the results or create a restart.

11. Press the Run button to open the Run Manager.

Note the Number of Simulations is now reset to 1.

12. Select Submit > Runs (or press the button on the toolbar).

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 247

Exercises

Figure EX- 144 ECLIPSE Office main window showing the converted multiple
sensitivity case

13. Select Yes when prompted to overwrite the .DATA file.

14. After the run is completed, select File > Close to close the Run Manager.

Comparing to the Base prediction

It is common to compare the results of a new production scenario to those of a

base prediction in order to determine the incremental oil recovery.

Creating a plot of incremental recovery

1. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, press Result.

2. Select File > Open Current Case > Summary.

3. Press Load.

4. Select File > Open > Summary.

5. Select the file SNARK_PRED_BASE_E100.SMSPEC.

Exercises 248 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

6. Press Open.

7. Press Load.

Calculating Incremental Oil Recovery

1. Select Tools > Create New > Summary Vector….

2. Enter FIOR in the New Vector field.

3. Enter STB/DAY in the Unit field.

4. Enter A=B-C in the Type Expression field.

5. Press Parse Expression.

6. Select B in the Identifiers column.

7. Select SNARK_PRED_FINAL_E100 in the Cases column.

8. Select FOPR in the Vectors column.

9. Select C in the Identifiers column.

10. Select SNARK_PRED_BASE_E100 in the Cases column.

11. Select FOPR in the Vectors column.

12. Press OK.

The new vector of incremental oil production rate is created. This vector will
be used later in this exercise.

Importing and using user templates

Earlier in this exercise, you created two plot templates. Now you will import
those templates and use them to analyze the case.

1. Select File > Open > Templates….

2. Select the file \snark\office\ratios.tpl.

3. Press Open.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 249

Exercises

4. Select Edit > Templates > User….

The Show/Change/Plot User Templates panel appears, as shown in Figure

EX- 145.

Figure EX- 145 Show/Change/Plot User Template panel

5. Select Field Rates and Ratios in the Templates panel.

6. Press Plot.

A plot of the Field Rates and Ratios for the first case is displayed.

7. Select Well Rates and Ratios in the Templates panel.

8. Press Plot.

A plot of the Well Rates and Ratios for the first case is displayed.

9. Press Cancel to close the Show/Change/Plot User Templates panel.

Using Fill to highlight vector data

1. Select LinePlot > User….

2. Select SNARK_PRED_FINAL_E100 in the Names column.

3. Select TIME in the X-Axis Vectors column.

Exercises 250 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

4. Select FOPR in the Y-Axis Vectors column.

5. Press Add to List.

6. Select SNARK_PRED_BASE_E100 in the Names column.

7. Select TIME in the X-Axis Vectors column.

8. Select FOPR in the Y-Axis Vectors column.

9. Press Add to List.

10. Select SNARK_PRED_FINAL_E100 in the Names column.

11. Select TIME in the X-Axis Vectors column.

12. Select FIOR in the Y-Axis Vectors column.

13. Press Add to List.

14. Press OK.

A plot is displayed showing the Oil Production Rate comparison between the
cases, along with the incremental oil recovery. In order to make a more
meaningful graph, you can add fill to the incremental recovery curve.

15. Double-click on the FIOR vs. TIME

(SNARK_PRED_FINAL_E100) trace in the legend of the main graph.

The Data Style Property Editor panel appears.

16. In the Line Style tab, change the color to Dark Green.

17. In the Plot Style tab, set the Plot Type to Left Histogram.

18. Check the Fill checkbox.

19. Select Solid fill.

20. Select the Data tab.

21. Change the Legend Text to Incremental Oil Rate.

22. Press OK.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 251

Exercises

The display should now look like Figure EX- 146.

Figure EX- 146 Line Plot with filled vector

TIP: You can control which items are in front and behind by clicking on
them in the Legend in back-to-front order.

23. Select File > Close to close the Results Viewer.

Generating an Economics report

ECLIPSE Office can also generate reports for use in economic evaluation
using Peep. These reports are written in .CIP format for easy importing into
Peep.

1. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, press the Report button.

Exercises 252 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

2. Select File > Open Current Case > Summary….

3. Press Load.

4. In the Report field, select Economics.

The Economics report input panel appears as shown in Figure EX- 147.

Figure EX- 147 Report Generator Economics report panel

5. Select the Production tab.

Note that the available vectors have been automatically selected. There is no
entry for the number of production and injection wells since these vectors
were not requested in the Summary section.

6. Select the Price tab.

7. Set the Oil Price Method to Single Value.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 253

Exercises

8. Enter a value of $20/stb.

9. Set the Gas Price Method to Name.

10. Change the Name to Gas Price 2001.

This method refers to a named price stream previously stored in the Peep
database.

11. Leave the OpCost and CapEx tab data set to their defaults. This will
prevent their output to the .CIP file.

12. Press Generate Report.

NOTE: In the 2001a version you will experience a number of Symbol Error
message boxes. Press OK at each of these until the report is
generated. In addition, the report will be truncated after 25 years.
This is due to a limit on the vector length in the 2001a version.

13. Press the Output button.

At this point, the report has not yet been written to file. You can examine the
data to be written to the report by selecting the various tabs.

14. Press the Write button.

15. Press Save, accepting the default filename.

16. Select File > Close to close the Report Generator.

Discussion

This concludes the study portion of the exercises. You have now created a
history match, made a base prediction, created a new well production
schedule, generated a report for economics, and compared the cases to
determine the incremental oil recovery. The final steps of a typical simulation

Exercises 254 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

study are to create the final report and graphics, and save and archive the
project data. These are illustrated in the next exercise.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 255

Exercises

Exercises 256 ECLIPSE Office User Course

Exercise 11 – Completing the Study

Introduction

This exercise examines the tasks that are typically taken at the end of the
study, preparation of presentation quality graphics for reporting and archiving
the study.

In addition to the editing features illustrated in the previous exercises, the 2D

and 3D Viewers offer a number of features that can be used to easily create
high quality graphics.

In this exercise, you will use a GRF to create a set of graphs similar to those
created in earlier exercises. These graphs will act as a basis for additional
customization and printing. You will learn how to add annotations, create
floating legends, change axis units and add captions to plots. Printing options
and copy and paste operations are shown.

In the 3D Viewer, you will learn how set hardcopy colors, add titles and
borders, control lighting and change units. The various printing options are
illustrated.

Lastly, you will create a backup of the project that can be used as an archive or
for moving the project to a different disk structure.

If you are continuing from Exercise 10, start with Step 1 under Running the
GRF.

Open existing project

1. To begin, start ECLIPSE Office using one of the procedures described in

Chapter 1. Make sure that ECLIPSE Office is started in the office sub-
directory created in Exercise 1.

2. Select File > Open Project.

3. Select the file snark\office\snark.off.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 257

Exercises

Running the GRF

1. Press the Result button.

2. In the Results Viewer main window, select File > Open GRF.

3. Select the file \snark\data\exercise_11\final_plots.grf.

4. Press Open.

Wait for the GRF to be processed.

A set of plots created from the results of the previous exercises is displayed.

Creating hardcopy in the 2D Viewer

1. If the Field Production Rate plot is not the main graph, drag it into the
main display.

Changing the X-Axis of TIME-based plots

You can change the display to show the X-Axis in DAYS, YEARS, or calendar
date.

1. Select View > X-Axis As….

2. Select DATE.

3. Press OK.

The X-Axis now displays a calendar date.

BEST PRACTICE: Although it is possible to define plots using DATE

or YEARS at creation time, it is best always use
TIME, then use the View > X-Axis As… feature to
change the display. This is because plots created
with DATE or YEARS cannot be converted.

Exercises 258 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Changing the Y-Axis units

1. Double-click on the Y-Axis on the right side of the plot (Gas).

2. In the Axis Property Editing panel, select the General tab.

3. In the Unit drop down list, select MMSCF/day.

4. Press OK.

Note that the axis is converted to the selected unit.

Creating a floating legend

An alternate form of the legend is available. This form presents the legend in a
box that can be moved over the display.

1. Select Options > Add/Remove Components.

Note that the Legend and Caption are hidden.

2. Select Legend:Legend in the Hidden Components list.

3. Hold the Ctrl key and select Caption:Caption in the Hidden

Components list.

4. Press the >> button to move the selected items to the Visible
Components list.

5. Press Close.

The Legend and Caption boxes are now visible in the main window, as
shown in Figure EX- 148.

6. Select Options > Graph Legend Style.

7. Un-check the Legend Visible box.

8. Press OK.

The default legend is now removed.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 259

Exercises

Figure EX- 148 Results Viewer main window with Legend and Caption boxes

9. Click on the Legend window in the title area at the top of the box.

10. Drag and drop the Legend box onto the main display.

11. Click on either of the lower corners of the Legend Box and drag the box
to a new size that shows all the legend text.

12. Right click on the title bar area of the Legend Box.

13. Select Hide Title.

The display should now look like Figure EX- 149.

Exercises 260 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 149 2D Viewer with floating legend

Annotating plots

You can add your own annotations to plots prior to printing them.

NOTE: Annotations are not saved to a GRF.

1. Select Options > Annotate.

2. Click near the abrupt drop in water production in the base case at about
10,000 days.

3. Enter PROD3 converted to injection.

4. Press Enter.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 261

Exercises

5. Click near the second abrupt drop in water production in the base case at
about 12,400 days.

6. Enter PROD2 converted to injection.

7. Press Enter.

8. Move the annotations by clicking on them and dragging them into

position, as shown in Figure EX- 150.

Figure EX- 150 Annotations shown on the main display

TIP: Annotations can be edited by double-clicking on them. Annotations

can be deleted by clicking on them and dragging them to the trash
can.

Adding a Caption to the plot

1. Select Options > Write Caption….

Exercises 262 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

2. In the Write Caption panel, enter

Comparison of continued
operations to adding a new well.
3. Press OK.

4. Drag the Caption window to the main display.

5. Right-click on the Caption Box and select Hide Title.

6. Size the Caption box so that the text is properly displayed.

7. Double-click on the caption window.

8. Set the background color to grey.

9. Press OK.

The display should now look similar to Figure EX- 151.

Figure EX- 151 Floating caption in the main display

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 263

Exercises

Creating hardcopy output of 2D results

ECLIPSE Office can create hardcopy in a number of formats. The 2D

Viewer can create hardcopy in Black and White Postscript, Color Postscript
and CGM. In addition, for PCs, there is also an option to print directly to the
Windows printer or to copy the picture to the Windows clipboard to be pasted
into other applications.

Using Copy and Paste (PC only)

1. Select View > Next Picture until the areal and cross-sectional picture is
the main graph, as shown in Figure EX- 152.

Figure EX- 152 Areal and Cross sectional view

2. Select Edit > Copy to Clipboard > Main Graph.

3. Start Microsoft Word or any other application capable of pasting pictures

from the Windows clipboard.

4. In Microsoft Word, select Edit > Paste.

Exercises 264 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Note that both graph in the picture are pasted into the document.

5. In the ECLIPSE Office Results Viewer main window, select Edit >
Copy to Clipboard > Active Graph.

6. In Microsoft Word, select Edit > Paste.

Note that only the graph with the yellow border is pasted. Also note that the
aspect ratio of the graph as it appears in the window is preserved.

7. In the ECLIPSE Office Results Viewer main window, select Edit >
Copy to Clipboard > Whole Picture.

8. In Microsoft Word, select Edit > Paste.

The entire Result Viewer window is pasted into the document.

9. Close Microsoft Word.

Controlling hardcopy output

1. Select File > Print Type….

2. Set the Print Type to CGM Binary.

3. Press OK.

4. Select File > Print Preview….

5. Press Change Mode.

The preview display toggles between the main graph and the entire window.

6. Press Edit Layout.

7. In the Print Layout panel, set all four columns of the Datestamp section
to None.

8. In the Custom Plot Title field, enter Figure 1 – Oil Saturation

at end of History Match.

9. Press OK.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 265

Exercises

The preview display should now look like Figure EX- 153.

Figure EX- 153 Print Preview panel in the 2D Viewer

10. Press Print.

Note that the default extension is .cgm. This will change depending on the
print type.

CAUTION: You cannot change the print format by changing the

extension. This will simply make an unreadable file. Use
File > Print Type to change the print type prior to printing.

11. Enter Figure_1.cgm in the File Name field.

Exercises 266 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

12. Press Save.

Printing multiple pictures

1. Select File > Print Type….

2. Select Seiko Color PS Landscape.

3. Press OK.

4. Select File > Print > Print Pictures….

5. Select Picture 1.

6. Hold the Shift key and select Picture 3.

7. Hold the Ctrl key and select Picture 7.

8. Press OK.

9. Enter the file name plots.eps.

10. Press OK.

Wait while the pictures are printed to the file.

NOTE: The multiple pictures option in CGM format is not supported in the
2001a version.

TIP: All pictures are printed exactly as seen on the display. You should
manipulate the window size to obtain the proper view prior to
printing.

Creating hardcopy in the 3D Viewer

1. Select View > 3D….

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 267

Exercises

Controlling hardcopy colors

1. In the 3D Viewer main window, select File > HardCopy Colors.

Note that the black and white colors in the display are reversed.

Controlling Lighting

Lighting can be added from various directions if supported by the graphics

card.

1. Select Display > Lights….

2. Experiment with various combinations of lights to see the effect supported

by your graphics card.

3. Press Close to close the Lighting panel.

Editing Axes

1. In the 3D Viewer window, select Display > Axes….

2. Check the Axes checkbox.

3. Uncheck the Bounding Box checkbox.

4. Select Bottom, Right and Front in the Position box.

5. Check the Tick Marks checkbox.

6. Select the Z-Axis tab.

7. Set the Primary tick mark to 500 feet.

8. Set the Secondary tick mark to 250 feet.

9. Press Apply.

10. Press Close.

The location and labeling of the axis is changed.

Exercises 268 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Using Perspective

1. Select Display > Perspective.

2. Use Zooming, Translation and Z-Exaggeration as illustrated in previous

exercises, until the display looks similar to Figure EX- 154.

Figure EX- 154 3D Viewer with Perspective and Axis Labels

Adding a border

1. Select Display > Picture Border….

2. In the Picture Border dialog box, check the Show checkbox.

3. Set the Top Gap Settings to 0.01.

4. Press Apply.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 269

Exercises

A border is added around the picture.

5. Press Close.

Adding and editing titles

1. Select Display > Titles > Edit Titles….

2. In the Edit Titles dialog box, enter Figure 2 – Snark Reservoir

Simulation Project.

3. Set the Vertical Position to 0.85.

4. Set the Font Height to 17.

5. Press Apply.

6. Press Add Title.

7. Enter Time: in the Contents field.

8. From the drop down list, select &timestep.

9. Set the Vertical Position to 0.77.

10. Set the Font Height to 14.

11. Press Close.

The display should now look similar to Figure EX- 155.

Exercises 270 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 155 3D Viewer showing multiple titles

Changing Units in the 3D Viewer

1. Select Preferences > Set External Units….

2. Select ECLIPSE-METRIC.

3. Press OK.

The axes are changed to metric units.

CAUTION: Changing units in the 3D Viewer also changes the units of

solution displays in the 2D Viewer.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 271

Exercises

Using Grid Distortion

Grid Distortion is another method of exaggerating one or more of the

directions of the grid for better viewing. You can thicken and/or flatten the
grid. Thickening is most useful for grids with very thin layers compared to
surface area. Flattening is useful if the surface relief prevents a good view of
the cells

1. Select Grid > Distortion….

2. In the Grid Distortion panel, check the Thicken checkbox.

3. Press Apply.

Note that the grid is proportionally thickened without changing the X-Y view.
The axes tick marks disappear because they are not valid in this view.

4. Press Close.

Creating hardcopy output in the 3D Viewer

The 3D Viewer in ECLIPSE Office is capable of creating hardcopy in

Postscript, TIFF, JPEG, PBM and VRML formats. In this exercise, you will
use the TIFF format, since it is generally the best choice for portability, file
size and quality.

1. Select File > Save As > Image….

2. The Write Image panel appears, as shown in Figure EX- 156.

3. Select TIFF in the Image Type section.

4. Press the … button.

5. Change the directory to \snark\office.

6. Enter the file name Figure_2.tif.

7. Press Open.

8. Press Write Image.

The picture is written to the file exactly as it looks in the display.

Exercises 272 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

9. Press Close.

10. Select File > Close to close the 3D Viewer.

11. Select File > Close to close the Results Viewer.

Figure EX- 156 Write Image dialog box

Backing up the project

You can create a backup of your project that can be used as an archive or to
move the project to a different machine or directory structure.

1. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select File > Backup Project.

2. Change the directory to the \snark directory.

3. Enter the file name snark.bck.

4. Press Open.

The Backup dialog box appears as shown in Figure EX- 157.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 273

Exercises

Figure EX- 157 Backup dialog box

NOTE: The display may appear to freeze for some time if the project
contains many files. Wait for the Backup dialog box to appear
before pressing any buttons or clicking on the display.

By default, all the input files used by the cases in the project are selected. You
may select to include the output file as well by selecting the Simulation
Output checkbox. You can also choose any other files to add to the backup
set. In this example, you will include the GRF files created in the pervious
exercises.

WARNING: Including simulator output can result in a very large

backup file.

Exercises 274 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

5. Press the Insert… button.

6. Change the directory to \snark\office.

7. Enter *.grf in the File Name field and press Enter.

Only the files with an extension of .GRF are shown.

8. Select the first file in the list.

9. Press Shift and select the last file in the list.

10. Press Open.

11. In the Backup panel, press OK.

Wait while the backup is created.

12. Select File > Save Project.

Discussion

This exercise demonstrates the powerful editing and printing capabilities of

ECLIPSE Office for creating presentation quality graphics, and how to
backup and project for storage or transfer.

This completes the Snark study. You have now created and performed an
entire simulation study using the many features of ECLIPSE Office as a
simulation desktop. The remainder of the exercises in this course are optional
and may only be applicable under certain conditions. Your instructor will
advise whether to proceed with the remaining exercises.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 275

Exercises

Exercises 276 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Exercise 12 – Using the Unstructured Gridder

Introduction

This exercise examines the use of the optional Unstructured Gridder

(PetraGrid) in the Data Manager.

The Unstructured Gridder can be used to create Perpendicular Bi-sector

(PEBI) grid based on existing Cartesian grids, maps, or by digitizing contours
on the display. In this exercise, you will begin by creating a clone case of the
final history match, then creating a PEBI grid based on the existing grid. Next,
you will create a second clone case and create a PEBI grid based on map data.
The first part of the exercise demonstrates only the gridding procedure. A
complete simulation dataset is created for the second part.

If you are continuing from Exercise 11, start with Step 1 under Case
Management.

Open existing project

1. To begin, start ECLIPSE Office using one of the procedures described in

Chapter 1. Make sure that ECLIPSE Office is started in the office sub-
directory created in Exercise 1.

2. Select File > Open Project.

3. Select the file snark\office\snark.off.

Case Management

Creating a creating a clone case

1. In the Case Manager panel of the ECLIPSE Office main window, select
the final history match case, Snark_HM-3.

2. Select Case > Add Case > Clone.

3. Select Case > Add Case > Clone.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 277

Exercises

Changing the case name/comments

1. Click on the Snark_HM-3-2 node.

2. Double-click on the node name.

3. Change the Case Name to Snark_PEBI_1.

4. Press OK.

5. Click on the Snark_HM-3-3 node.

6. Double-click on the node name.

7. Change the Case Name to Snark_PEBI_2.

8. Press OK.

The Case Manager should now look like Figure EX- 158.

Figure EX- 158 Case Manager after adding two PEBI cases

Exercises 278 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Creating a PEBI grid from an existing Cartesian grid

When an existing Cartesian model is converted, the Unstructured Gridder

assumes that each simulation layer is a geological layer. This is fine in most
cases, but in this example, you will import a coarse (5 layer) grid and use the
Unstructured Gridder to create sub-layers in the grid.

NOTE: You can split existing layers but you cannot combine layers in the
Unstructured Gridder.

BEST PRACTICE: It is better to re-create the geological model from

maps than to use a converted grid.

1. Select case Snark_PEBI_1.

2. Press the Data button to open the Data Manager.

3. In the Data Manager window, press the Grid button.

Importing the coarse grid and revising the dataset

Importing the new coarse layer model requires that you import a new grid
geometry and properties in the Grid section, new regions in the Regions
section and new well connections in the Schedule section.

1. Select File > Import > New.

2. Answer No when asked to Save Current Contents.

3. Answer Yes to clear the Grid Dimensions/Grid Type.

4. Answer Yes to clear the Regions data.

5. Select \snark\data\exercise_12\snark_coarse.grdecl.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 279

Exercises

6. Press Open.

7. Select File > Save File As….

8. Press Save, accepting the default filenames.

9. Select File > Close.

10. In the Data Manager window, press Regions.

Note that the module is empty because you answered Yes when prompted to
clear the Regions data in the Grid section.

11. In the Regions section main window, select File > Import > New.

12. Select
\snark\data\exercise_12\snark_coarse_regs.grdecl.

13. Press Open.

14. Select File > Save As….

15. Press OK, accepting the default filename.

16. Answer Yes when prompted to overwrite the existing file. This file was
created when the Grid section was saved.

17. Select File > Close.

18. In the Data Manager main window, select Schedule.

The areal grid in this model is the same as the case Snark_HM-3, so only the
completions need to be changed.

19. Select Event > View > Event….

20. In the Select Events dialog box, select COMPDAT in the All Events panel.

21. Press the >> button to move the keyword to the Selected Events panel.

22. Press OK.

Exercises 280 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Note that only the first time step contains any COMPDAT keywords. This is
indicated by the asterisk (*) next to the times/dates in the Time–Dates
column.

23. Select Event > Expand COMPDATs.

The completion keywords will be reconstructed into a single table for each
well. This allows for easy analysis and editing of COMPDAT data. The display
should now look like Figure EX- 159.

24. Select Well Connection Data (PRODUCER) in the Events – Selected

Events column.

Figure EX- 159 Schedule section showing expanded COMPDATs for

PRODUCER

25. Click on any cell in the last row of the table.

26. Press Ctrl-D.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 281

Exercises

The row is deleted and the cursor moves up to the next row.

27. Press Ctrl-D again three (3) more times, until only the completion in
Layer 1 remains, as shown in Figure EX- 160.

28. Press Apply.

29. Select Well Connection Data (PROD1) in the Events – Selected Events
column.

30. Click on any cell in the last row of the table.

Figure EX- 160 COMPDAT table for PRODUCER after deleting completions

31. Press Ctrl-D four (4) times, until only the completions in Layer 1 and
Layer 2 remain, as shown in Figure EX- 161.

32. Press Apply.

Exercises 282 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

33. Repeat steps 29 through 32 for PROD2 and PROD3.

34. Select Well Connection Data (INJECTOR) in the Events – Selected

Events column.

35. Click on any cell in the last row of the table.

36. Press Ctrl-D eighteen (18) times, until only the completions in Layers 1
through 5 remain, as shown in Figure EX- 162.

37. Press Apply.

Figure EX- 161 COMPDAT table for PROD1 after deleting completions

38. Select File > Save As….

39. Press OK, accepting the default filename.

40. Select File > Close to close the Schedule section.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 283

Exercises

Figure EX- 162 COMPDAT table for INJECTOR after deleting completions

Converting the grid and properties

Now that the grid has been replaced and the dataset edited to be valid with the
new grid, you can convert the coarse grid into a PEBI grid and define the
sublayers.

1. In the Data Manager main window, press the Grid button.

2. Answer Yes if prompted to recalculate the well positions.

3. In the Grid section main window, select Subsection > Unstructured

Gridder….

4. Read the message in the pop-up dialog box carefully. Press Yes when
finished.

Exercises 284 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Which sections need to be revisited after creating a PEBI grid?

As you can see, converting to a PEBI grid has effects throughout the dataset.
ECLIPSE Office can deal with many of the changes automatically, but it is
still up to the user to verify and validate any changes.

Next, the Import Grid panel appears. This panel allows you to customize the
import and the handling of the axes.

5. In the Import Grid panel, select Geometry and Properties in the Level
of keyword import group.

6. Select No Transformation in the Type of COORD Transformation

group.

NOTE: This option refers to how X and Y coordinate data is handled. The
PEBI gridder works best if the coordinate values are less than
100000. If your grid data contains the MAPAXES keyword then No
Transformation retains this origin shift. Full Transformation
converts the coordinate values to absolute X and Y values by
including the origin shift. The MAPAXES keyword is then removed.
In this case, the grid is already in relative coordinates, so No
Transformation is the proper choice.

7. Press OK.

The importing and conversion will take some time. The screen may appear to
freeze at times, but be patient.

When the import and conversion operations are finished, the Unstructured
Gridder window should look like Figure EX- 163.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 285

Exercises

Figure EX- 163 Unstructured Gridder window after grid import

Viewing the converted data

1. Select View > Options….

2. In the Edit View Options panel, select the Colour Fill tab.

3. Select Input map from the Property display group.

4. Select Tops in the first column.

5. Select Layer 1 in the second column.

A contour display of the converted grid data is shown.

6. In the Edit View Options panel, select the Line/Text tab.

7. Check the Scatter/Contour data box.

8. Press Apply.

Exercises 286 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

The node locations sampled from the original grid are displayed as shown in
Figure EX- 164.

Figure EX- 164 Unstructured Gridder showing color fill and scatter data

Note the problem with the fault in the northeast of the model area. It is split
into two faults and is zig-zagged around the Cartesian grid cells. As a result,
the sampling/contouring algorithm is showing null cells.

9. In the Edit View Options panel, un-check the Scatter/Contour data box.

10. Select the Colour Fill tab.

11. In the Property display group, select None.

12. Press Apply.

13. Press OK.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 287

Exercises

Editing the fault using fault templates

Since a PEBI grid does not need to zig-zag around any faults, you will now
smooth this fault by using the existing faults as a template. This will also help
to eliminate any nulls in the area of interest.

NOTE: A fault that is a template is not honored during the gridding phase.

14. Select View > Highlight Active.

This feature helps you to visualize what each of the nodes in the Reservoir
Data tree represents.

15. Select each of the FAULT nodes in the reservoir tree and note the names
assigned to the two faults in the northeast of the model.

What are the names of the faults to be smoothed?

As you can see, Fault 4 is just the corner of the zig-zag. This fault can be
deleted.

16. Select Fault 4 in the Reservoir Data tree.

17. Right-click over the node and select Delete.

WARNING: This may take some time since each of the maps must be re-
contoured. Be patient.

18. Select Fault 3 in the Reservoir Data tree.

19. Right-click over the node and select Edit.

Exercises 288 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

The Edit Fault Data panel appears.

20. Check the Fault is a template box.

21. Press OK.

Wait while the maps are re-contoured again. When the process is finished, the
faults will be displayed by a thin blue or grey line.

22. Select Create > Fault.

A new fault is created in the Reservoir Data tree and the cursor becomes a
pencil.

23. Digitize a new, smoothed, fault over the old fault. Press Enter when
finished.

The display should look similar to Figure EX- 165.

Wait while the maps are re-processed.

Editing the sub-layers

1. Select the Boundary node in the Reservoir Data tree.

2. Right-click over the node and select Edit.

3. In the Edit Primary Volume Data panel, press the Z-Divisions… button.

4. In the Edit Z-Divisions dialog box, set the sub-layering for each layer as
follows:

Division Weight Subdivisions Distribution Growth

1 1 5 Equal 1

2 1 1 Equal` 1

3 1 10 Log Bot .5

4 1 3 Equal 1

5 1 4 Equal 1

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 289

Exercises

Figure EX- 165 Unstructured Gridder window showing digitized fault

NOTE: The original model was gridded using a Bottom Conforming

method. This is not available in the Unstructured Gridder. A
logarithmic grid is the closest distribution method.

5. Press OK.

6. In the Edit Primary Volume Data panel, press OK.

Generating the PEBI grid

7. Select Grid > Generate Grid.

After the grid is generated, a Grid Report panel may appear of there were any
problems with the grid generation. In this case, you will receive a message that
Faults 1 and 4 could not be fully gridded (honored).

Exercises 290 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

8. Accept the default action to Ignore the problem.

9. In the Unstructured Gridder main window, select Grid > Generate

Properties.

The property calculation may take several minutes.

10. Select View > Options….

11. In the Edit View Options panel, select the Colour Fill tab.

12. Select Initial Property.

13. Select Tops.

The display should now look similar to Figure EX- 166.

Figure EX- 166 Unstructured Gridder window showing PEBI grid with property
fill

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 291

Exercises

14. Select various properties and examine how the PEBI grid is constructed.

TIP: To view other layers, use the slider bar under the Line/Text tab.

15. Press OK in the Edit View Options dialog box.

16. Select File > Save As….

17. Press OK, accepting the default file name.

18. Select Yes to All when prompted to overwrite the files.

NOTE: You may receive several Symbol Error messages. These messages
are appearing in error in the 2001a version. Simply Press OK to
continue.

19. Select File > Close to close the Unstructured Gridder.

20. In the Grid section main window, select File > Close.

21. In the Data Manager main window, select File > Close.

This concludes the first part of the exercise. You will not complete this dataset
nor run it. This will be illustrated in the next part of the exercise.

Creating a PEBI grid from map data

1. Select case Snark_PEBI_2 in the ECLIPSE Office Case Manager.

2. Press the Data button.

3. In the Data Manager main window, press the Grid button.

4. Select File > Clear to clear the Grid data.

5. Answer Yes when asked to Clear the Grid data.

Exercises 292 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

6. Answer Yes when asked to clear the Grid Dimensions and Grid Type.

7. Answer Yes when asked to clear the Regions data.

Why can you not re-use the Regions data?

8. Select Subsection > Unstructured Gridder….

9. Press OK to the dialog box reminding you of the other sections to be

validated.

A blank Unstructured Gridder window appears as shown in Figure EX- 167.

Figure EX- 167 Unstructured Gridder panel after clearing grid

Importing volumes

1. Select File > Import ASCII > Volumes….

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 293

Exercises

2. Select the file

\snark\data\exercise_12\maps\XYName\snark_bnd.zon.

3. Press Open.

4. In the Select Volume File Format panel, select XY Name in the Volume
File Format group.

5. Press OK.

The outer boundary for the simulation should now be displayed in the
Unstructured Gridder window.

Changing the internal mesh map limits

In order to produce the best PEBI grid, it is important that the internal mesh
map area corresponds only to the area occupied by the reservoir. This can be
set as follows:

1. Select Settings > Map Limits….

The Set display and map limits panel appears.

2. Press the Reset button.

The limits are now reset to better accommodate the imported boundary.

3. Select the Mesh Map tab.

Note that the mesh map limits are set independently from the map limits.

4. Press the Set to Display button.

5. Press OK.

Creating constant properties

You need to define a constant properties table even if you override the
properties later with map data.

1. Select the Boundary node in the Reservoir Data tree.

Exercises 294 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

2. Select Create > Const. Props….

3. In the Edit Property Data panel, press the + button in the upper right
corner of the table.

4. Press the + button three (3) more times until there are five (5) rows
(layers) in the table, as shown in Figure EX- 168.

Figure EX- 168 Edit Property Data panel after creating five layers

5. Enter 0.1 in the Kv/Kh field at the top of the panel.

6. Press Apply.

7. Press OK.

Defining the layers and importing property maps

The next step in the creation of the PEBI grid is to define the layers and
import the maps for each layer.

1. Select the Boundary node in the Reservoir Data tree.

2. Select Create > Layer.

A layer node is added to the tree.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 295

Exercises

3. Select Create > Layer four (4) more times until there are five (5) layers in
the tree, as shown in Figure EX- 169.

Figure EX- 169 Unstructured Gridder window after creating five layers

4. Select the Layer1 node.

5. Select Create > Map > Tops.

A tops map node is created for Layer 1.

6. Select File > Import ASCII > Mesh Map….

7. Select the file

\snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\tops.L01.

8. Press Open.

The Select Mesh Map Format panel appears.

9. Press OK, accepting the default settings.

Exercises 296 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

10. Select Create > Map > Thickness.

11. Select File > Import ASCII > Mesh Map….

12. Select the file

\snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\thick.L01.

13. Press Open.

14. Press OK in the Select Mesh Map Format panel.

15. Select Create > Map > Perm_X.

16. Select File > Import ASCII > Mesh Map….

17. Select the file

\snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\permx.L01.

18. Press Open.

19. Press OK in the Select Mesh Map Format panel.

20. Select Create > Map > Perm_Y.

21. Select File > Import ASCII > Mesh Map….

22. Select the file

\snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\permy.L01.

23. Press Open.

24. Press OK in the Select Mesh Map Format panel.

25. Select Create > Map > Porosity.

26. Select File > Import ASCII > Mesh Map….

27. Select the file

\snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\poro.L01.

28. Press Open.

29. Press OK in the Select Mesh Map Format panel.

30. Select Create > Map > NTG.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 297

Exercises

31. Select File > Import ASCII > Mesh Map….

32. Select the file

\snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\ntg.L01.

33. Press Open.

34. Press OK in the Select Mesh Map Format panel.

The panel should now show six (6) maps beneath the Layer1 node. The M
symbol inside the icon indicates that map data has been imported, as shown in
Figure EX- 170.

Figure EX- 170 Unstructured Gridder window showing maps for Layer 1

35. Repeat steps 10 through 34 for Layers 2 through 5. The filenames for
each property are given below:

Exercises 298 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Layer Property Filename

2 Thickness \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\thick.L02

Perm_X \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\permx.L02

Perm_Y \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\permy.L02

Porosity \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\poro.L02

NTG \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\ntg.L02

3 Thickness \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\thick.L03

Perm_X \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\permx.L03

Perm_Y \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\permy.L03

Porosity \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\poro.L03

NTG \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\ntg.L03

4 Thickness \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\thick.L04

Perm_X \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\permx.L04

Perm_Y \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\permy.L04

Porosity \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\poro.L04

NTG \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\ntg.L04

5 Thickness \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\thick.L05

Perm_X \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\permx.L05

Perm_Y \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\permy.L05

Porosity \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\poro.L05

NTG \snark\data\exercise_12\maps\ASCII_mesh\ntg.L05

Importing faults

1. Select File > Import ASCII > Faults….

2. Select the file

\snark\data\exercise_12\maps\XYName\faults.flt.

3. Press Open.

4. Press OK in the Select Fault Format panel.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 299

Exercises

Importing well data

1. Select File > Import ASCII > Vertical Wells….

2. Select the file \snark\data\exercise_12\wells\wells.wel.

3. Press Open.

4. Press OK in the Select Well Format panel.

5. Select the PRODUCER node in the Reservoir Data tree.

6. Right-click over the node and select Edit.

7. In the Edit Well Data panel, press the Perforations button.

8. Enter 125 in the End field.

9. Press OK.

10. Press OK in the Edit Well Data panel.

11. Select the PROD1 node in the Reservoir Data tree.

12. Right-click over the node and select Edit.

13. In the Edit Well Data panel, press the Perforations… button.

14. Enter 145 in the End field.

15. Press OK.

16. Press OK in the Edit Well Data panel.

17. Repeat steps 5 through 16 for wells PROD2 and PROD3.

NOTE: You do not need to edit the perforations if you wish the wells to be
completed in every layer. For this reason, you do not need to edit the
perforations for INJECTOR.

Exercises 300 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Editing fault transmissibility

1. Select the Fault2 node in the Reservoir Data tree.

2. Right-click over the node and select Edit.

3. In the Edit Fault Data panel, check the Constant Transmissibility

Multiplier box.

4. Enter 0.5 in the Fault Transmissibility field.

5. Press OK.

Defining and connecting a numerical aquifer

1. Select Create > Numerical Aquifer….

2. In the Edit Numerical Aquifer panel, enter the following:

Area(ft2) Length(ft2) Poro Perm(mD) Depth(ft) Pressure(psia)

1.44e8 2000 0.3 500 3700 4300

3. Press OK.

4. Select the Boundary tab in the Reservoir Data tree.

5. Right-click over the node and select Edit.

6. In the Edit Primary Volume panel, set the Boundary type for the
boundary segment starting at 11000, -12000 to Aquifer1.

7. Press Apply.

Editing the sub-layers

1. Press the Z-Divisions… button.

2. In the Edit Z-Divisions dialog box, set the sub-layering for each layer as
follows:

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 301

Exercises

Division Weight Subdivisions Distribution Growth

1 1 5 Equal 1

2 1 1 Equal 1

3 1 10 Log Bot 1

4 1 3 Equal 1

5 1 4 Equal 1

NOTE: The original model was gridded using a Bottom Conforming

method. This is not available in the Unstructured Gridder. A
logarithmic grid is the closest distribution method.

3. Press OK.

4. In the Edit Primary Volume Data panel, press OK.

Generating the PEBI grid

1. Select Grid > Generate Grid.

After the grid is generated, a Grid Report panel may appear of there were any
problems with the grid generation. In this case, you will receive a message that
Faults 1 and 3 could not be fully gridded (honored).

2. Accept the default action to Ignore the problem.

3. Press OK.

4. Select Grid > Generate Properties.

5. Select View > Options….

6. In the Edit View Options panel, select the Colour Fill tab.

7. Select Initial Property.

8. Select Tops.

Exercises 302 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

The display should now look similar to Figure EX- 171.

Figure EX- 171 Unstructured Gridder window showing PEBI grid with property
fill

9. Select various properties and examine how the PEBI grid is constructed.

TIP: To view other layers, use the slider bar under the Line/Text tab.

Defining SATNUM using the 2D Viewer

1. In the Edit View Options panel, press the Create Properties button.

2. In the Simulation Grid Property Editor panel, select SATNUM in the

Type field.

3. Enter SATNUM in the version field.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 303

Exercises

4. Check the New Property button.

5. Select the Advanced tab.

6. In the Building Expression for SATNUM panel, press the Load

Expression button.

7. Select \snark\data\exercise_12\satnum.cal.

8. Press Open.

BEST PRACTICE: If you ever need to re-enter the Unstructured

Gridder, you will have to re-generate the grid and
properties. Your defined regions will be lost.
Therefore, it is always best to save the expression
used for creating the regions.

9. In the Building Expression for SATNUM panel, press Apply.

10. Press Close.

11. In the Simulation Property Editor panel, press Apply.

12. Answer Yes when prompted to Save property SATNUM to Keywords.

13. Press Close.

14. In the Edit View Options panel, select SATNUM in the property list.

The Unstructured Gridder should now look similar to Figure EX- 172.

Exercises 304 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 172 Unstructured Gridder showing SATNUM regions

15. Press OK in the Edit View Options dialog box.

16. Select File > Save As….

17. Press the Advanced button.

WARNING: In the 2001a version the default file names are being
improperly set for two of the Grid section include files.
These files are not used by the Unstructured Gridder, but
must exist in the dataset.

18. Select the filename listed next to the GRID PROPERTIES section. The
entire file name should be selected.

19. Press Ctrl-C.

20. Move the cursor to the GRID PARALLEL/OPERATIONAL file name

field.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 305

Exercises

21. Press Ctrl-V.

22. Change the last part of the filename from Snark_PEBI_2_gpro.INC

to Snark_PEBI_2_gopp.INC.

23. Move the cursor to the GRID OTHERS file name field.

24. Press Ctrl-V.

25. Change the last part of the filename from Snark_PEBI_2_gpro.INC

to Snark_PEBI_2_goth.INC.

26. Press Save

27. Select Yes to All if prompted to overwrite the files.

28. Select File > Close to close the Unstructured Gridder.

29. Select File > Close to close the Grid section main window.

Validating the Schedule section

1. In the Data Manager main window, press the Schedule button.

2. Answer Yes if prompted to update the well completions.

3. Examine the keywords. Note that all the WELSPECS and COMPDAT
keywords have been revised to indicate the IJK location with respect to the
PEBI grid.

TIP: PEBI grids are more difficult to solve than Cartesian grids.
Therefore, it is always best to limit the time step size.

4. Select 1 JAN 1980 in the Time-Dates column.

5. Select Simulator Control Parameters (TUNING) in the Keywords

column.

6. Enter 0.1 in the Max Length of Next Time Step field.

7. Enter 5 in the Max Length of Time Steps after Next field.

Exercises 306 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

8. Press Apply.

9. Select File > Save As….

10. Press OK, accepting the default filename.

11. Select File > Close to close the Schedule section.

12. In the Data Manager main window, select File > Close.

The dataset is now ready to run with the new PEBI grid. The run can be
controlled using the Run Manager and viewed using the Results Viewer and
Report Generator in the same way as a Cartesian grid.

NOTE: In the current version, numerical aquifers are attached to all the
layers along the specified face. There is no way to limit the aquifer
connection to specific layers as was done with the Cartesian grid.
Therefore, the results of this PEBI grid will not match the history
match.

13. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select File > Save Project.

14. Select File > Exit.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 307

Exercise 13 – Advanced Run Management

Introduction

This exercise examines the various options for running the simulator that are
available in the Run Manager. This exercise is optional, and some of the
options may not be available depending on your network configuration. Your
instructor will advise which sections of the exercise to perform.

Submitting runs using PVM

The PVM (Parallel Virtual Machine) software allows a group of computers

connected over a network to be used as a single large computer. This software
allows ECLIPSE Office to communicate directly with the simulator it is
running, providing the ability to control the simulator and view results as they
are produced.

Before beginning this exercise, you need to be sure that PVM is properly
installed on both the local and remote machines. The instructor will advise the
names of the remote machine to use and how to obtain the name of the local
machine.

Name of Local machine

Name of Remote machine

Configuration

In order to get PVM running properly be sure to set the following variables.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 308

 Exercises

1. On the Local Machine, check that the following environmental variables

are set:

PVMXDR=TRUE
PVM_ROOT is set, for example, PVM_ROOT=C:\ecl\2001a\pvm3
PVM_RSH is set, for example, PVM_RSH=C:\WINNT\system32\rsh.exe
PVM_ARCH is set, for example, PVM_ARCH=WIN32

On the PC you may need to reset PVM_RSH and/or PVM_ROOT using the
Windows Registry Editor (regedit.exe).

NOTE: For Windows 98 machines an rsh.exe must be installed. The

installation CD-ROM contains Ataman rsh in the utilities directory,
which can be used with PVM.

2. On the Local Machine, check the pvmhost.2000a (PC) or

eclpvmhost.2001a (UNIX) to ensure that it contains the correct executable
paths for the simulators. An example pvm host file follows:

pc-mjc ep=\ecl\2001a\eclipse\source;\ecl\2001a\e300\source
sg-1 ep=/ecl/2001a/eclipse/source/mips4:/ecl/2001a/e300/source/mips4

In the 2001A PVM host file, you must use a semi-colon between executable
paths for PC hosts and a colon between executable paths for UNIX hosts.
Otherwise, the application is unable to find the remote executable.

The pvmhost file is written to the \ecl\home directory on the PC and to

your home directory on UNIX machine. This file is created the first time PVM
is run.

3. On the Remote Machine check the following are set:

PVMXDR=TRUE
PVM_ROOT is set, for example, PVM_ROOT=C:\ecl\2001a\pvm3
PVM_RSH is set, for example, PVM_RSH=C:\WINNT\system32\rsh.exe
PVM_ARCH is set, for example, PVM_ARCH=WIN32
LM_LICENSE_FILE is set to the license server

If the remote machine is a UNIX machine then your login shell on the remote
machine must be a C-shell.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 309

Exercises

Starting PVM and ECLIPSE Office

1. Start PVM from the GeoQuest launcher or type @pvm on UNIX machines

It is recommended that you run the version of PVM that corresponds to the
ECLIPSE or ECLIPSE 300 version you want to run.

2. To check that your PVM setup is correct, type the command conf at the
pvm> prompt.

This produces a list machines on the coupled system. If you need to add more
machines to the system use the add command.

For example, to add a host called sun-comm2, with ECLIPSE executable in

the directory /ecl/2001a/source/ultra use the following command:

add ‘sun-comm2 ep=/ecl/2001a/eclipse/source/ultra’

3. Use the command quit to exit the PVM console program but leave the
PVM daemon running (the halt command kills the PVM daemon and exits
the PVM console program).

4. Start ECLIPSE Office from the GeoQuest launcher or by typing

@office in UNIX.

Notice in the Log Window a message reporting that PVM is running.

Importing an existing dataset

1. Select File > New Project.

2. Enter the name Run_Mgr.

3. Press Open.

4. Select Case > Add Case > New.

5. Double click on the new case and rename it to BLACKOIL.

6. Select the parent case, Run_Mgr, in the case tree.

Exercises 310 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

7. Select Case > Add Case > New.

8. Double click on the new case and rename it to COMPOS.

9. Select the parent case, Run_Mgr, in the case tree.

10. Select Case > Add Case > New.

11. Double click on the new case and rename it to ECLIPSE.

12. Select the case BLACKOIL.

13. Select Case > Import….

14. Select the file \snark\data\exercise_13\BB_20_20.DATA.

15. Answer Yes when prompted to Clear the Notes.

16. Select the case COMPOS.

17. Select Case > Import….

18. Select the file \snark\data\exercise_13\CC_20_20.DATA.

19. Answer Yes when prompted to Clear the Notes.

20. Select the case ECLIPSE.

21. Select Case > Import….

22. Select the file \snark\data\exercise_13\EE_20_20.DATA.

23. Answer Yes when prompted to Clear the Notes.

The main display should now look like Figure EX- 173.

24. Select File > Save Project.

Running the simulations

1. Select case BLACKOIL.

2. Press Run to activate the Run Manager.

3. Select PVM in the Run Environment field.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 311

Exercises

4. Set Job Streams to be added to 1.

5. Ensure that the Run Time Monitoring Summary check box is ticked.

6. Select Options > Run Environment to open the PVM Environment

panel.

Figure EX- 173 ECLIPSE Office main window showing cases for PVM exercise

7. From the drop down Hosts menu, choose the name of the machine where
you want to submit the run.

8. Check that the appropriate executable name appears, in this case

e300.exe.

NOTE: Although this case is named BLACKOIL, it is actually a

compositional dataset running in blackoil mode.

Exercises 312 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

WARNING: It is essential that the file pvmhost.2001a (on the PC) and
eclpvmhost.2001a (on UNIX machines) have the correct
executable path for the simulators on the remote machine.

9. Set the Host Temporary Path as advised by your instructor.

This is a directory on the remote machine where you have write permissions.
Temporary files are stored in this directory during the simulation run. If the
box next to Remove remote host files is ticked, then the simulation input and
output is deleted from the remote machine after the run.

The default Host Temporary Path is /tmp/.

10. Select Submit > Runs (or press the button on the toolbar).

Messages appear on the screen about the run status in the Log Window.

TIP: If the message Error:Error opening log file appears in

the Log Window, this indicates that you do not have write
permission to the Host Temporary Path specified.

11. Select case COMPOS.

12. Press Run to activate the Run Manager.

13. Select PVM in the Run Environment field.

14. Set Job Streams to be added to 1.

15. Ensure that the Run Time Monitoring Summary check box is ticked.

16. Select Options > Run Environment to open the PVM Environment
panel.

17. From the drop down Hosts menu, choose the name of the machine where
you want to submit the run.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 313

Exercises

18. Check that the executable name is e300.exe.

19. Set the Host Temporary Path as advised by your instructor.

20. Select Submit > Runs (or press the button on the toolbar).

21. Select case ECLIPSE.

22. Press Run to activate the Run Manager.

23. Select PVM in the Run Environment field.

24. Set Job Streams to be added to 1.

25. Ensure that the Run Time Monitoring Summary check box is ticked.

26. Select Options > Run Environment to open the PVM Environment
panel.

27. From the drop down Hosts menu, choose the name of the machine where
you want to submit the run.

28. Check that the executable name is eclipse.exe.

29. Set the Host Temporary Path as advised by your instructor.

30. Select Submit > Runs (or press the button on the toolbar).

You can control the runs, holding or killing the run using Monitor > Control
Simulations….

31. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select File > Save Project.

32. Select File > Close Project.

Submitting runs using Non-PVM remote

The Non-PVM Remote option for running the simulators from ECLIPSE
Office allows you to submit jobs from a PC (NT/98/2000) to the local network
environment. The requirements for getting such submission to work are
detailed below.

Exercises 314 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Configuration

Several things must be done to ensure that the ECLIPSE simulator can be run
on a remote host.

1. On the remote host, check that your login shell is a C-shell.

2. Check that you can execute ECLIPSE on the remote host by trying the
@eclipse command.

3. Create or update the .rhosts file in your home directory on the remote
host. Either add ++ to allow access to all machines on the local network or
insert the name of the specific machine you wish to allow access.

4. Make sure that no version of PVM is running on the remote machine.

It is strongly recommended that you have the same login on both the local and
remote machines. However, if you have a different login on the remote host
the following changes must be made to the WIN.INI file of the local machine:

[RCMD]
User=test
[RCP]
User=test

If this appeared in WIN.INI, the local user name would be “test" and
WinsockRCP and WinsockRCMD uses this name at the remote host.

WARNING: Making these changes on Windows 98/2000 machines may

cause serious problems and is therefore not encouraged.

Restoring a project backup

1. Copy the file \snark\data\exercise_12\NONPVM.bck to the

\snark\office directory.

2. In the ECLIPSE Office main window select File > Restore Project.

3. Select \snark\office\NONPVM.bck.

4. Press Open.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 315

Exercises

This project consists of a restart case based on the output from a previous
simulation. The current run starts from the second report step of the previous
simulation. This is indicated by the RESTART keyword in the Data Manager
Initialisation section.

5. Press the Data button.

6. Press the Multiple Sensitivities button.

You can see that this example is a multiple sensitivity case consisting of three
runs investigating the sensitivity of the well controls for the U* wells.

7. Examine the differences in the runs.

8. Select File > Close to close the Multiple Sensitivities panel.

9. Select File > Close to close the Data Manager.

Running the simulations

1. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, press the Run button.

2. Select NON-PVM REMOTE from the Environment list.

3. Set Job Streams to be added to 3 (this should not exceed number of

runs).

4. Select Options > Run Environment.

The Job Streams panel appears.

5. Specify the name of the remote host(s) for each run. Your instructor will
advise the names of the hosts to use.

6. Press the Apply button.

This opens the Non-PVM Remote Environment panel where you can set the
following parameters.

• Host Name from the drop down menu

• Executable Name
• Simulation Parameters

Exercises 316 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

• Host Temporary Path

• Whether or not to remove files from the remote host

The temporary host path is the name of the directory where ECLIPSE Office
copies all the data necessary for the simulation run. You must have write
permission in this directory. If Remove remote host files is chosen then all
the data and results for the simulation are deleted from the remote host after
the transfer back to the local machine.

7. Select Submit > Runs to set the simulations running on the remote
machine(s).

NOTE: NON-PVM Remote does not allow for runtime monitoring of

summary or solutions data.

8. In the ECLIPSE Office main window, select File > Save Project.

9. Select File > Close Project.

Submitting runs to LSF queues

The LSF Run Environment option allows you to send simulation runs to the
LSF queue. This section details the requirements to correctly set up and access
the LSF Run Environment panel in ECLIPSE Office. The limitations of
this run environment are also discussed.

Requirements

This section describes the requirements for running ECLIPSE Office on a PC

and submitting the ECLIPSE job to a LSF queue on a UNIX machine.

The ECLIPSE Office project must be in a directory that is shared by both

machines, so that the same physical disk space is used by both the PC
applications and the UNIX simulators.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 317

Exercises

This directory must contain an LSF.CONFIG file, which is described in detail

below.

Method

1. Create an LSF.CONFIG file. This file contains information about the

queues that are available and the location and versions of the simulator
executables. The LSF.CONFIG file is further explained in Appendix F of
the ECLIPSE Office User Guide.

2. Start ECLIPSE Office on the PC in a shared directory.

3. Copy the file \snark\data\exercise_12\LSF.off to the shared

directory.

4. Select File > Restore Project.

5. Select the copy of the LSF.off file in the shared directory.

6. Copy the LSF.CONFIG file into the shared directory, if it is not already
there.

The LSF.CONFIG file does not have to be in this shared directory at the time
that ECLIPSE Office is started. It can be copied there at any time during the
ECLIPSE Office session, and the LSF Run Environment panel updates
accordingly.

7. Open the Run Manager panel, and select LSF from the drop down menu
of run environments.

8. Select Options > Run Environment to open the LSF panel, as shown in
Figure EX- 174.

In the LSF.CONFIG file, each version must be unique. ECLIPSE Office

gives a warning in the Log Window if this file contains duplication of
versions.

Exercises 318 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Figure EX- 174 LSF Environment panel

LSF Environment Panel

1. In the LSF Run Environment panel, select the Queue, Version,

Architectures and Executable as advised by your instructor. All the fields
in yellow can be defaulted.

When submitting jobs from the PC you must fill in the Path section of this
panel. Here you should enter the UNIX pathname to ensure that ECLIPSE
can find the data set.

2. Press OK.

The Run Manager remembers the setting that you have chosen on the LSF
Run Environment panel. These are included in the ECLIPSE Office project
file when you next save it.

3. Select Go on the Run Manager panel.

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 319

Exercises

ECLIPSE Office writes the bsub command to the Log Window.

When submitting jobs from the PC, ECLIPSE Office first executes a
dos2unix command on all files involved in the simulation run. Then these
files can be properly run by ECLIPSE.

The ECLIPSE run should now be in the queue that has been selected. Various
LSF commands, such as bqueues can be used to monitor the run.

Limitations

There are several limitations in the use of ECLIPSE Office with LSF.

1. All runs must use a shared directory. This is because there is no facility for
moving the data between machines

2. There is no run-time monitoring of the simulation run available.

3. There is no way to kill the simulation job using the ECLIPSE Office Run
Manager panel. This can only be done using LSF commands, such as
bkill.

4. A LSF.CONFIG file must be in the shared directory. This file cannot be

kept in one central place; it has to be copied to the directory where
ECLIPSE Office is running.

Submitting runs with the External Job option

The external job option for running the simulators from ECLIPSE Office
provides open access to tailor the submitted job to the local network
environment. This tutorial provides an example scenario for typical
environments. It is important to remember that local conditions must be taken
into consideration when setting up such jobs.

Running from a PC to a UNIX machine using NFS drives and

dos2unix/dos2aix/to_unix

This describes a set-up for running the pre- and post- processors on a PC and
submitting the ECLIPSE jobs to a UNIX machine.

Exercises 320 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

Requirements

1. The UNIX machine must have dos2unix (SUN), dos2aix (IBM), or

to_unix (SGI)

2. The directory on the UNIX machine must be mapped to an NFS network

drive on the PC, so that the same physical disk space is used by both the
PC applications and the UNIX simulators.

3. The PC must have rsh.exe.

Method

First, address the problem of converting DOS files to UNIX files.

The PC writes out ASCII files that a UNIX program does not recognize. This
is due to the end-of-line character used by the PC. The
dos2unix/dos2aix/to_unix program converts text files written by a PC into text
files that are UNIX readable.

The following C-shell script is an example of performing the necessary

dos2unix commands for ECLIPSE Office files:
#!/bin/csh -f
# (-f) suppresses the .cshrc file in the new C shell...
# Avoid problems with aliases set up by users
#
unalias mv

# Run the foreach loop below with .DATA, .data, .DAT

# .dat .INC and .inc extensions (*.H* and *.h* are
# for SimOpt’s include files)
foreach i (`ls *.data *.DATA *.DAT *.INC *.inc *.H* *.h*`)
dos2unix $i > tempfile.txt
mv -f tempfile.txt $i
end

In this example, this file is called @all_dos2unix. This runs on the UNIX
machine and must be available in the PATH on that machine.

The next step is to write a DOS *.bat file to handle the arguments that
ECLIPSE Office sends to it.

As default, the following command is sent by ECLIPSE Office:

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 321

Exercises

batch_file.bat -data \\full\path\on\PC -file PROJECTNAME_E100

Where:

\\full\path\on\PC is the full path to the working directory on the PC.

PROJECTNAME_E100 is the name of the ECLIPSE data set to be run.

In this example, it is assumed that the working directory is shared as an NFS

network drive, so the -path parameter can be discarded. However, the script
needs to know the name of the machine, so a -machine parameter must be
recognized.

The following PC *.bat file parses the values ECLIPSE Office sends and
generates the correct remote shell (rsh) command to execute the run:
@echo off
REM
REM NAME:
REM $jobonunix.bat
REM
REM PURPOSE:
REM Submits jobs to UNIX machine from a PC running Office
REM via the "External Job" option
REM
REM HOW TO RUN:
REM Set the run-type to "External Job" and
REM use the -machine parameter to give the machine name
REM Set-up the UNIX filespace as an NFS drive on the PC
REM Write the Eclipse files to the UNIX filespace
REM NOTE: This script requires the presence of dos2unix
REM on the UNIX machine
REM
REM FLAGS:
REM The following flags are accepted as arguments:
REM -file the Eclipse data file
REM -ver the version of Eclipse (e.g. 99a_1)
REM -machine the UNIX machine name
REM NOTE: All other flags are read but then ignored
REM NOTE: Office writes out -ver and -file as default
REM so you only need to add -machine
REM
REM STRUCTURE:
REM This script is effectively composed of 2 parts:
REM 1. SWITCH statement block - this performs an
REM equivalent job to "switch" in C or Java. It
REM parses the command line arguments.

Exercises 322 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

EM 2. execution block - this submits the job on the

REM UNIX machine
REM (after converting the files using dos2unix)

REM =====================================
REM Start of SWITCH block
REM =====================================
REM Loop around all passed arguments
:ChkArgs
if "%1"=="" goto AllChkd

REM check for -machine

if "%1"=="-machine" goto Machine
if "%1"=="-MACHINE" goto Machine
goto NotMachine
:Machine
shift
if NOT "%1"=="" set machine=%1
shift
goto ChkArgs
:NotMachine

REM check for -ver

if "%1"=="-ver" goto Version
if "%1"=="-VER" goto Version
goto NotVersion
goto NotVersion
:Version
shift
if NOT "%1"=="" set version=%1
shift
goto ChkArgs
:NotVersion
RREM check for -file
if "%1"=="-file" goto File
if "%1"=="-FILE" goto File
goto NotFile

:File
shift
if NOT "%1"=="" set file=%1
shift
goto ChkArgs
:NotFile

REM Cover ourselves by handling any unexpected arguments

REM by ignoring them - they are put to into the ignore variable
set ignore=%1
shift
goto ChkArgs

REM
REM All arguments handled
REM
:AllChkd

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 323

Exercises

REM =====================================
REM End of SWITCH block
REM =====================================
REM =====================================
REM Start of execution block
REM =====================================

rsh %machine% @all_dos2unix

rsh %machine% @eclipse -ver %version% %file%

REM =====================================
REM End of execution block
REM =====================================

exit

The final step is to set-up ECLIPSE Office to run the job. The following
steps set the Run Manager in ECLIPSE Office to execute the script:

1. In the Run Manager set the Environment to EXTERNAL JOB.

2. Select Options > Run Environment….

3. Set the Executable to your script name (for example

$jobonunix.bat)

4. Set the Simulator Parameters to include the machine name and the
version (for example -machine myunixbox -ver 2000a_1).

5. Now run simulation as usual.

TIP: If you run with non-unified output, ECLIPSE Office can provide
run-time monitoring by way of the SUMMARY vectors.

Submitting jobs to LSF from a UNIX machine

This describes a set-up for submitting ECLIPSE jobs to an LSF queue from a
UNIX machine.

The following C-shell script allows a job to be submitted to an LSF queue:

#!/usr/bin/csh
#
# NAME

Exercises 324 ECLIPSE Office User Course

 Exercises

# @lsf
#
# PURPOSE:
# Sets up a job to run under lsf
# because the full executable path is specified (-exec)
# any simulator can be run using this script.
#
# FLAGS:
# The following flags are accepted as arguments:
# -file the data file
# -exec the full path to the executable
# NOTE: all other flags are read but discarded.
#
# Store the command line arguments in local variables
# the arguments should be -argument_type argument
while ($#argv)
switch ($1)
case -exec:
if ($#argv == 1) breaksw
shift
set ecl_exec = $1
breaksw
case -file:
if ($#argv == 1) breaksw
shift
set ecl_file = $1
breaksw
default:
if ($#argv == 1) breaksw
set ecl_file = $1
shift
endsw
if ($#argv >= 1) shift
end
# Now we have extracted the file and exec names, run the
job
bsub $ecl_exec $ecl_file

When running this script the command line arguments are:

-exec the full path to the executable (that is not the @eclipse macro but
eclipse.exe).

-file the name of the ECLIPSE file to be executed (this is supplied as

default by ECLIPSE Office).

ECLIPSE Office User Course Exercises 325

Exercises

Exercises 326 ECLIPSE Office User Course